2012 Pilot - Service Express

2012 Pilot - Service Express
2012 Pilot
Owner’s Manual
(Unlinked)
This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web use. This is due to changes
in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a
hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.
© 2011 American Honda Motor Co., Inc. - All Rights Reserved
P/N 00X31-SZA-6300
11/08/01 08:15:26 31SZA630_001
Owner’s Identification
This owner’s manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
OWNER
This owner’s manual covers all models of
the Pilot. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
ADDRESS
STREET
CITY
STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME
DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
Images throughout this owner’s manual
(including the front cover) represent
features and equipment that are available on
some, but not all, models. Your particular
model may not have some of these features.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
STREET
CITY
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votre concessionnaire de
commander le numéro de pièce
33SZAC30
11/08/01 08:15:33 31SZA630_002
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2012 Honda Pilot was a wise investment.
It will give you years of driving pleasure.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
you can refer to it at any time.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a
symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the Maintenance MinderTM shown in
the instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it
preserves your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in
mind that your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many
systems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction
and will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
i
11/08/01 08:15:38 31SZA630_003
Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials − special
handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
ii
11/08/01 08:15:48 31SZA630_004
Introduction
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the
permission of the vehicle owner.
iii
11/08/01 08:16:04 31SZA630_005
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
and one of
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
iv
11/08/01 08:16:09 31SZA630_006
Important Handling Information
Your Pilot has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground
clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high
center of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear
seat belts.
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page 512 of this manual and the
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines section on page 552 . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of
control, a crash, or rollover.
v
11/08/01 08:16:12 31SZA630_007
11/08/01 08:16:25 31SZA630_008
Contents
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ................................................................................................ 3
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) ............................................................. 5
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column) ........ 63
Features (climate control, audio, steering wheel, rear entertainment, security, cruise control, and HomeLink ) ... 191
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ........................................................................ 493
Driving (engine and transmission operation).......................................................................................... 511
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage).................................................. 557
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, jump starting, overheating, and fuses) ......................................... 611
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)............................................... 639
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information)................... 657
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) (how to order) ................................................................................... 661
Service Information Summary (fluid capacities and tire pressures) ................................................... last page
1
INDEX
Index ................................................................................................................................................. I
11/08/01 08:16:48 31SZA630_009
Overview of Contents
Contents
A convenient reference to the
sections in this manual.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
A quick reference to the main
controls in your vehicle.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important information about the
proper use and care of your vehicle’s
seat belts, an overview of the
supplemental restraint system, and
valuable information on how to
protect children with child restraints.
Instruments and Controls
Explains the purpose of each
instrument panel indicator and gauge,
and how to use the controls on the
dashboard and steering column.
Features
How to operate the climate control
system, the audio system, rear
entertainment system, and other
convenience features.
2
Before Driving
What gasoline to use, how to breakin your new vehicle, and how to load
luggage and other cargo.
Driving
The proper way to start the engine,
shift the transmission, and park; plus
what you need to know if you’re
planning to tow a trailer.
Maintenance
The Maintenance MinderTM shows
you when you need to take your
vehicle to the dealer for maintenance
service. There is also a list of things
to check and instructions on how to
check them.
Technical Information
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
and technical information.
Warranty and Customer
Relations
(U.S. and Canada only)
A summary of the warranties
covering your new vehicle, and how
to contact us for any reason. Refer to
your warranty manual for detailed
information.
Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
How to order manuals and other
technical literature.
Index
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers several problems
motorists sometimes experience,
and details how to handle them.
Service Information Summary
A summary of the information you
need when you pull up to the fuel
pump.
11/08/01 08:16:57 31SZA630_010
Your Vehicle at a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS (P.67)
GAUGES (P.80)
MOONROOF SWITCH*
(P.170)
HomeLink BUTTONS*
(P.437)
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM*
(P.174)
PASSENGER’S
FRONT AIRBAG
(P.11, 28)
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.171)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.209)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.137)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS (P.192)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM (P.199)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.167)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.497)
GLASS HATCH
RELEASE BUTTON/
POWER TAILGATE
SWITCH*
(P.144, 149) HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE (P.499)
MIRROR CONTROL
AUTO BUTTON*
(P.172)
Your Vehicle at a Glance
DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG (P.11, 28)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.515)
REAR HEATING/
COOLING CONTROLS
(P.197)
REAR CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM
(P.205)
PARKING BRAKE
PEDAL (P.171)
AUXILIARY INPUT
JACKS* (P.428)
HEADPHONE
CONNECTORS* (P.428)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET (P.186)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
*: If equipped
CONTINUED
3
11/08/01 08:17:07 31SZA630_011
Your Vehicle at a Glance
HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNAL/
FRONT FOG LIGHTS*3
(P.125)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH (P.534)
HAZARD WARNING
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS*3
BUTTON (P.129)
(P.392)
BLUETOOTH
HANDSFREELINK SYSTEM
VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS*3
(P.441, 462)
PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM
SWITCH*3 (P.484)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR
BUTTON*3 (P.129, 173)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET (P.186)
MIRROR CONTROLS (P.172)
POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER
SWITCH (P.137)
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
*4 :
4
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.123)
VTM-4 LOCK
BUTTON*4 (P.520)
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY
SYSTEM*3 (P.174)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES (P.167)
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE
HANDLE (P.497)
GLASS HATCH RELEASE BUTTON/
POWER TAILGATE SWITCH*3
(P.144, 149)
PARKING BRAKE RELEASE
HANDLE (P.171)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.35)
SEAT HEATER
SWITCHES*3 (P.165)
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS (P.430)
HORN*1
VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS*2
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
(P.132)
MULTI-INFORMATION
BUTTONS*3
(P.85)
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
If equipped
4WD models only
11/08/01 08:17:11 31SZA630_012
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 8
Seat Belts ........................................ 9
Airbags .......................................... 11
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 13
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 13
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 15
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 16
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 16
5. Fasten and Position the
Seat Belts .............................. 17
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position ................................. 19
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 20
Additional Safety Precautions .... 21
Additional Information About
Your Seat Belts ........................ 22
Seat Belt System Components ... 22
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 23
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 24
Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 25
Additional Information About
Your Airbags ............................ 26
Airbag System Components ....... 26
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 28
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 31
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 33
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 34
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 34
How the Passenger Airbag
Off Indicator Works ................ 35
Airbag Service .............................. 36
Additional Safety Precautions .... 36
Protecting Children − General
Guidelines ................................. 38
All Children Must Be
Restrained ................................ 38
All Children Should Sit in a
Back Seat .................................. 39
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 39
If You Must Drive with Several
Children .................................... 41
If a Child Requires Close
Attention ................................... 41
Additional Safety Precautions .... 42
Protecting Infants and
Small Children.......................... 43
Protecting Infants ........................ 43
Protecting Small Children .......... 44
Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 46
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 47
With LATCH ................................ 48
With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 52
With a Tether ............................... 53
Protecting Larger Children ............ 56
Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 56
Using a Booster Seat ................... 57
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front .......................................... 58
Additional Safety Precautions .... 59
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 60
Safety Labels .................................... 61
5
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
11/08/01 08:17:20 31SZA630_013
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
The recommendations on this page
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
6
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page 17 ).
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Restrain All Children
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
small children should be restrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages 38 − 59 ).
Don’t Drink and Drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
11/08/01 08:17:28 31SZA630_014
Important Safety Precautions
Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page 599 ).
7
Driver and Passenger Safety
Pay Appropriate Attention to the
Task of Driving Safely
Engaging in mobile phone
conversation or other activities that
keep you from paying close attention
to the road, other vehicles and
pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change
quickly, and only you can decide
when it is safe to divert attention
away from driving.
11/08/01 08:17:37 31SZA630_015
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
(9)
(6)
(12)
(3)
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
(4)
(8)
(11)
(10)
(5)
(7)
(2)
8
(1)
(2)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(11) Door Locks
(12) Occupant Position Detection
System (OPDS) Sensors
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
the correct position and always wear
your seat belts. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
can take an active role in protecting
yourself and your passengers.
11/08/01 08:17:46 31SZA630_016
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Why Wear Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
CONTINUED
9
11/08/01 08:17:55 31SZA630_017
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including:
− frontal impacts
− side impacts
− rear impacts
− rollovers
10
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt, and make sure you
wear it properly.
11/08/01 08:18:04 31SZA630_018
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
28 for more information on how
your front airbags work).
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the torso and pelvis of
the driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page 31 for more
information on how your side airbags
work).
In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side impact or rollover (see
page 33 for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).
CONTINUED
11
11/08/01 08:18:12 31SZA630_019
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
collisions, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
12
What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
11/08/01 08:18:25 31SZA630_020
Protecting Adults and Teens
See pages 38 − 59 for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
Except Touring models
On Touring models
Your vehicle also has a
tailgate, glass hatch, and
door open indicator on the
information display to indicate when
the tailgate, the glass hatch, or a
specific door is open. You will see
the appropriate indicator(s) for each
condition.
Your vehicle also has a tailgate, glass
hatch, and door open indicator on
the multi-information display to
indicate when the tailgate, the glass
hatch, or a specific door is open. You
will see the appropriate indicator(s)
and message(s) for each condition.
1. Close and Lock the Doors
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors and the
tailgate are closed and locked.
Your vehicle has a dooropen indicator on the
instrument panel to indicate when
any door is open.
When one or more doors are open,
the ‘‘DOOR OPEN’’ message will
come on.
CONTINUED
13
Driver and Passenger Safety
Introduction
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult
passengers, and teenage children
who are large enough and mature
enough to drive or ride in the front.
11/08/01 08:18:34 31SZA630_021
Protecting Adults and Teens
Locking the doors, the glass hatch,
and the tailgate reduces the chance
of someone being thrown out of the
vehicle during a crash, and it helps
prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door, the
glass hatch, or the tailgate and
falling out.
When the glass hatch, the tailgate,
or both glass hatch and tailgate are
open, the ‘‘HATCH OPEN,’’
‘‘TAILGATE OPEN,’’ or ‘‘HATCH &
TAILGATE OPEN’’ message will
come on.
When the glass hatch, tailgate, and
one or more doors are open, the
‘‘DOOR, HATCH & TAILGATE
OPEN’’ message will come on.
Locking the doors, the glass hatch
and the tailgate also helps prevent an
outsider from unexpectedly opening
a door, the glass hatch, or the
tailgate when you come to a stop.
Except Touring models
This vehicle has auto door locking/
unlocking features. See page 138 for
how to set them.
On Touring models
This vehicle has auto door locking/
unlocking features. See pages
114 and 115 for how to set them.
14
11/08/01 08:18:44 31SZA630_022
Protecting Adults and Teens
2.Adjust the Front Seats
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page 132 ).
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
On vehicles with manual adjustable
seats
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
See page 154 for how to adjust a
front seat (power adjustment) and
page 155 for a manual adjustment.
15
Driver and Passenger Safety
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
11/08/01 08:18:55 31SZA630_023
Protecting Adults and Teens
3.Adjust the Seat-Backs
4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seatbacks should also adjust their seatback to a comfortable, upright
position.
16
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See page 155 for how to adjust the
manual adjustable seat-back, and
page 154 for the power adjustable
seat-back.
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the center of the back of your head
rests against the center of the
restraint.
Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.
11/08/01 08:19:05 31SZA630_024
Protecting Adults and Teens
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page 157 for how to adjust the
head restraints and how the driver’s
and front passenger’s active head
restraints work.
The center seating position in the
second row and all third row seats
have a detachable seat belt that can
be unlatched and retracted into the
ceiling to allow the seats to be folded
down. See page 163 for how to
unlatch and relatch a belt.
Detachable seat belts should
normally be latched whenever the
seat-backs are in an upright position.
See page 163 for how to unlatch a
belt, and page 164 for how to relatch
a belt.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
CONTINUED
17
Driver and Passenger Safety
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
5.Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
11/08/01 08:19:12 31SZA630_025
Protecting Adults and Teens
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
18
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
RELEASE BUTTON
The front seats and second row seats
have adjustable seat belt anchors. To
adjust the height of an anchor,
squeeze the two release buttons, and
slide the anchor up or down as
needed (it has four positions).
11/08/01 08:19:23 31SZA630_026
Protecting Adults and Teens
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
See page 22 for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
19
Driver and Passenger Safety
very serious injuries in a crash.
6.Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and head restraints, and
put on their seat belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
upright, well back in their seats, with
their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is safely parked and the
engine is off.
11/08/01 08:19:30 31SZA630_027
Protecting Adults and Teens
Advice for Pregnant Women
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
20
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
11/08/01 08:19:41 31SZA630_028
Protecting Adults and Teens
Additional Safety Precautions
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts. Devices intended to improve
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers. Objects on
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door. If a side airbag or a
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers. If your
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
Do not cover or replace front seatback covers without consulting
your dealer. Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
21
Driver and Passenger Safety
Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a foldeddown back seat. If they do, they
11/08/01 08:19:50 31SZA630_029
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all seating positions.
The front seat belts are also
equipped with automatic seat belt
tensioners.
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your front passenger
to fasten your seat belts.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
22
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
SEAT BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 93 ).
When an infant or small child is
riding there, the indicator may not
come on and the beeper may not
sound.
11/08/01 08:20:04 31SZA630_030
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s) touching the rear of
the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Lap/Shoulder Belt
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page 17 for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat (see page 52 ).
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
CONTINUED
23
Driver and Passenger Safety
If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
11/08/01 08:20:12 31SZA630_031
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
Allowing a child to play with a
seat belt or wrap one around
their neck can result in serious
injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with
any seat belt and make sure
any unused seat belt a child
can reach is buckled, fully
retracted, and locked.
DETACHABLE ANCHOR
The lap/shoulder belts in the center
seat of the second row and both of
the third row seats are equipped with
a detachable anchor that has two
parts: a small latch plate and a
buckle.
The detachable seat belt should
normally be latched whenever the
seat-backs are in an upright position.
For more information about the
detachable seat belt, see page 163 .
24
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
11/08/01 08:20:22 31SZA630_032
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
If the tensioner is activated, the SRS
indicator comes on and the tensioner
must be replaced.
Seat Belt Maintenance
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
593 ). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
Honda provides a limited warranty
on seat belts. See your Honda
Warranty Information booklet for
details.
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
you should have your dealer inspect
the belt, and replace it if necessary.
A belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
25
Driver and Passenger Safety
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
extra tension in the seat belt could
be helpful.
11/08/01 08:20:28 31SZA630_033
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
(12)
(3)
(9)
(13) (2) (7)(11) (10)
(5)
(4)
(1)
(17)
(13)
(5)
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit/Rollover Sensor
(6)
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(8)
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(4)
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(11) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors Control Unit/
OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(12) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
(13) Front Impact Sensors
(14) Rear Safing Sensor
(15) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
(16) Side Impact Sensors (Third)
(17) Side Curtain Airbags
26
(15)
(16)
(15)
(16)
(14)
11/08/01 08:20:42 31SZA630_034
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Your Airbag System includes:
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 31 ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
33 ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact,
side impact, or if your vehicle is
about to rollover.
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the control
unit to turn the airbag off (see
page 32 ).
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and the front
passenger’s seat belt are latched
or unlatched (see page 22 ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
30 ).
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs
(29 kg) or less (the weight of an
infant or small child), the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page 30 ).
A rollover sensor that can detect if
your vehicle is about to roll over
and signal the control unit to
deploy both side curtain airbags
and front seat belt tensioners (see
page 33 ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
CONTINUED
27
Driver and Passenger Safety
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 28 ).
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page 24 ).
11/08/01 08:20:54 31SZA630_035
Additional Information About Your Airbags
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbag system
components (see page 34 ).
How Your Front Airbags Work
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page 34 ).
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page 35 ).
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will inflate
the driver’s and front passenger’s
airbags, at the time and with the
force needed.
Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page 35 ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
28
11/08/01 08:21:01 31SZA630_036
Additional Information About Your Airbags
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
may experience some temporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold
Front Airbags (SRS)
Your vehicle is equipped with dualstage, multiple-threshold front
airbags (SRS). During a frontal crash
severe enough to cause one or both
front airbags to deploy, the airbags
can inflate at different rates,
depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts
are latched, and/or other factors.
Front airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help
reduce the likelihood of head and
chest injuries in frontal crashes.
CONTINUED
29
Driver and Passenger Safety
The total time for inflation and
deflation is less than a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
11/08/01 08:21:13 31SZA630_037
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbagcaused injuries to short drivers and
children or small-statured adults who
ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any objects or metal items
under the front seats.
Objects placed or pushed under
the front passenger’s seat may
cause the sensor to malfunction,
increasing the risk of injury in a
crash.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
30
DRIVER’S SEAT POSITION SENSOR
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
PASSENGER’S SEAT
WEIGHT SENSOR
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
11/08/01 08:21:27 31SZA630_038
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.
When the passenger airbag gets
turned off by the weight sensors, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page 35 ).
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag is automatically turned off.
However, the passenger airbag off
indicator in this situation will not
come on.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly, do not do anything
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
Also, make sure the floor mat behind
the front passenger’s seat is hooked
to the floor mat anchor (see page
594 ). If it is not, the mat may
interfere with the proper operation
of the sensors and operation of the
seat.
This includes:
A second-row passenger pushing
or pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
How Your Side Airbags Work
Driver and Passenger Safety
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.
Moving the front passenger’s seat
or seat-back forcibly back against
the folded right-side second-row
seat.
Second-row passengers should not
wedge objects or intentionally
force their feet under the front
passenger seat.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
CONTINUED
31
11/08/01 08:21:38 31SZA630_039
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag may not deploy if there is
no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Side Airbag Cutoff System
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, if the
position sensors detect a child has
leaned into the side airbag’s
deployment path, the airbag will shut
off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
32
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page 34 ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or another object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
11/08/01 08:21:47 31SZA630_040
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
In a Rollover
If the rollover sensor detects your
vehicle is about to roll over, it signals
the control unit, which immediately
deploys both side curtain airbags and
activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
The airbag on the passenger’s side
will deploy, even if there are no
passengers on that side of the
vehicle.
In a Side Impact
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and active the seat belt
tensioner on the impacted side of the
vehicle.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
33
Driver and Passenger Safety
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
11/08/01 08:22:03 31SZA630_041
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the SRS Indicator Works
The SRS indicator alerts
you to a potential problem
with your airbag system components.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on briefly then goes off. This
tells you the system is working
properly.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashes on and off while you drive.
34
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
93 ).
If you see any of these indications,
the airbag system components may
not work properly when you need
them.
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works
U.S.
Canada
This indicator
alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does not
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on briefly and then go
off (see page 70 ). If it doesn’t come
on, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the
front seat, have the system checked.
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER
SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
93 ).
11/08/01 08:22:15 31SZA630_042
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
U.S.
Canada
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator
may come on and off repeatedly if
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s), such as a foldeddown back seat, that are touching
the rear of the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
35
Driver and Passenger Safety
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
11/08/01 08:22:26 31SZA630_043
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag Service
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
We recommend against the use of
salvaged airbag system
components, including the airbag,
tensioners, sensors, and control
unit.
Do not try to remove or replace
any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
36
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact. Even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts and their anchors worn
during a crash to make sure they
are operating properly.
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not attempt to deactivate your
airbags. Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid. If water or
another liquid soaks into a seatback, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.
11/08/01 08:22:30 31SZA630_044
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting your
dealer. This could make the
Driver and Passenger Safety
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009 in the US, or
Honda Customer Relations at 1888-9-HONDA-9 in Canada.
37
11/08/01 08:22:40 31SZA630_045
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, traffic
collisions are the number one cause
of death of children age 12 and
under.
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to properly protect child
passengers.
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
38
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state,
Canadian province and territory
requires that infants and children be
properly restrained when they ride in
a vehicle.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle (see pages 43 − 55 ).
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly (see pages 56 − 59 ).
11/08/01 08:22:54 31SZA630_046
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
aged 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat. Some
states have laws restricting where
children may ride.
Children who ride in the back are
less likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off under certain
circumstances (see page 35 ), please
follow these guidelines:
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag. If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag. Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt. (See page 56 for important
information about protecting larger
children.)
CONTINUED
39
Driver and Passenger Safety
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
According to crash statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat.
11/08/01 08:23:10 31SZA630_047
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
U.S. Models
SUN VISORS
Canadian Models
SUN VISORS
40
DASHBOARD
11/08/01 08:23:20 31SZA630_048
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page 56 ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page 15 ).
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in a back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
Have the child sit upright and well
back in the seat (see page 19 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
17 ).
41
Driver and Passenger Safety
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Your vehicle has two rows of back
seats where children can be properly
restrained. If you ever have to carry
a group of children, and a child must
ride in front:
11/08/01 08:23:31 31SZA630_049
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Additional Safety Precautions
Never hold an infant or child on
your lap. If you are not wearing a
Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is fully retracted and
locked. If a child wraps a loose
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages 52 and 53 for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child. During a crash, the
Never let two children use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Use the childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
rear doors. This can prevent
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle. Leaving children without
children from accidentally falling
out (see page 143 ).
42
adult supervision is illegal in most
states, Canadian provinces and
territories, and can be very
hazardous.
For example, infants and small
children left in a vehicle on a hot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
Lock all doors, the tailgate and the
glass hatch when your vehicle is
not in use. Children who play in
vehicles can accidentally get
trapped inside. Teach your
children not to play in or around
vehicles.
Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children. Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the tailgate or
the glass hatch, which can lead to
accidental injury or death.
11/08/01 08:23:43 31SZA630_050
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
Child Seat Type
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front. Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed in the
second row, a rear-facing child seat
may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat as
far back as recommended, or from
locking their seat-back in the desired
position.
It could also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
CONTINUED
43
Driver and Passenger Safety
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rearfacing, reclining mode.
11/08/01 08:23:51 31SZA630_051
Protecting Infants and Small Children
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
Protecting Small Children
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a fivepoint harness system as shown.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
crash.
Child Seat Type
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
44
and weight are appropriate for a
rear-facing seat.
Many states, Canadian provinces and
territories allow a child one year of
age or older who also meets the
minimum size and weight
requirements to transition from a
rear-facing child seat to a forward
facing seat. Know the requirements
where you are driving and follow the
child seat instructions. Many experts
recommend use of a rear-facing seat
up to age two, if the child’s height
11/08/01 08:23:58 31SZA630_052
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Child Seat Placement
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page 35 ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
If it is necessary to put a forwardfacing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
Driver and Passenger Safety
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
If you must place a forwardfacing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
45
11/08/01 08:24:07 31SZA630_053
Selecting a Child Seat
Most child seats are LATCHcompatible (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren). Some have a
rigid-type connector, while others
have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some
existing and previously owned child
seats can only be installed using the
seat belt. Whichever type you
choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer’s use and care
instructions as well as the
instructions in this manual. Proper
installation is key to maximizing your
child’s safety.
46
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCHcompatible child seat can be installed
using the seat belt and a top tether
for added security. This is because
all child seats are required to be
designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a
lap/shoulder belt.
In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat
belt be used to attach a LATCHcompatible seat once a child reaches
a specified weight. Please read the
child seat owner’s manual for proper
installation instructions.
Important considerations when
selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the
following three requirements:
The child seat is the correct type
and size for the child.
The child seat is the correct type
for the seating position.
The child seat is compliant with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
11/08/01 08:24:15 31SZA630_054
Installing a Child Seat
1. Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle. All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rearfacing child seats.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
3. Secure the child in the child seat.
Make sure the child is properly
strapped in the child seat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
47
Driver and Passenger Safety
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
11/08/01 08:24:27 31SZA630_055
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) at each of the
second row seats and the passenger’s
side third row seat.
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
You can find lower anchors in the
slits in the seat-backs.
MARKS
LOWER ANCHORS
When you install a child seat in the
second row seating position, use the
lower anchors as shown in the
illustration. You can install up to
three child seats at a time with
LATCH.
Do not attach two child seat
connectors to a single lower anchor
at a time.
48
Using the Outer LATCH
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat in either outer second row seat:
1. Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
2. Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
11/08/01 08:24:37 31SZA630_056
Installing a Child Seat
TETHER STRAP
3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.
Driver and Passenger Safety
RIGID TYPE
FLEXIBLE TYPE
Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connector as
shown above.
4. Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
5. Lift the head restraint (see page
157 ), then route the tether strap
through the legs of the head
restraint and over the seat-back,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
CONTINUED
49
11/08/01 08:24:47 31SZA630_057
Installing a Child Seat
Using the Center LATCH
2. Follow step 1 through 4 as
described previously to secure the
child seat.
3. Lower the head restraint first.
Route the tether strap over the
head restraint and seat-back, then
attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
4. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
6. Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat in the center seating position on
the second row seat, use the center
lower anchors as shown above.
7. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
1. Unlatch the detachable seat belt
anchor latch and retract the seat
belt all the way into the ceiling.
Place the latch plate and anchor
latch in their holding slots (see
page 163 ).
50
11/08/01 08:24:56 31SZA630_058
Installing a Child Seat
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat in the passenger’s side seating
position of the third row:
1. Unlatch the detachable seat belt
anchor latch and retract the seat
belt all the way into the passenger’s
side panel. Place the latch plate
and anchor latch in their holding
slots (see page 163 ).
4. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
LOWER ANCHORS
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
You can find lower anchors in the
slits in the seat-backs.
2. Follow steps 1 through 6 of the
second row installation on pages
48 and 50 .
51
Driver and Passenger Safety
3. If the child seat cannot be installed
properly or interferes with the
head restraint when in the highest
position, remove the head
restraint. Make sure the removed
head restraint is secured in a safe
place.
11/08/01 08:25:06 31SZA630_059
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
If you intend to install a child seat in
the center seating position of the
second row or in the third row, make
sure the detachable seat belt is
securely latched (see page 163 ).
52
1. With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle and remove any slack from
the lap portion of the belt.
2. To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
11/08/01 08:25:16 31SZA630_060
Installing a Child Seat
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
4. After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
5. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
CONTINUED
53
Driver and Passenger Safety
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the second or third row.
11/08/01 08:25:24 31SZA630_061
Installing a Child Seat
Second Row Installation
TETHER STRAP
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT
Each second row seat has a tether
anchorage point behind the seatback.
54
Outer seating position
1. After properly securing the child
seat (see page 52 ), lift the head
restraint, then route the tether
strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
For the center seat, lower the head
restraint, then route the tether strap
over the head restraint and seat-back.
11/08/01 08:25:36 31SZA630_062
Installing a Child Seat
Third Row Installation
3. Attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the tether
strap is not twisted.
2. Attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the tether
strap is not twisted.
Each third row seat has a tether
anchorage point behind the seatback.
3. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
1. After properly securing the child
seat (see pages 52 and 53 ), lift the
left and right head restraint, then
route the tether strap over the
seat-back and through the head
restraint legs.
4. For the center seating position,
lower the head restraint first.
Route the tether strap over the
head restraint and seat-back, then
attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
5. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
CONTINUED
55
Driver and Passenger Safety
2. If the child seat cannot be installed
properly or interferes with the
head restraint when in the highest
position, remove the head
restraint. Make sure the removed
head restraint is secured in a safe
place.
11/08/01 08:25:46 31SZA630_063
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear the lap/
shoulder belt.
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
56
11/08/01 08:25:57 31SZA630_064
Protecting Larger Children
3. Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Using a Booster Seat
5. Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat.
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
46 ) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
A child who has outgrown a forwardfacing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
CONTINUED
57
Driver and Passenger Safety
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
Some states, Canadian provinces and
territories also require children to
use a booster seat until they reach a
given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or
60 lbs). Be sure to check current
laws in the states, provinces or
territories where you intend to drive.
11/08/01 08:26:08 31SZA630_065
Protecting Larger Children
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
Physical Size
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages 17 and 56 ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
Maturity
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
58
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
11/08/01 08:26:20 31SZA630_066
Protecting Larger Children
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Move the vehicle seat to the rearmost position.
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck. This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt. Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
59
Driver and Passenger Safety
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Additional Safety Precautions
11/08/01 08:26:31 31SZA630_067
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in a crash that
may have damaged the underside.
60
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
With the tailgate/glass hatch open,
airflow can pull exhaust gas into your
vehicle’s interior and create a
hazardous condition. If you must
drive with the tailgate/glass hatch
open, open all the windows and set
the heating and cooling system/
climate control system as shown
below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system/climate control
system as follows:
1. Select the fresh air mode.
mode.
2. Select the
3. Turn the fan on high speed.
4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
11/08/01 08:26:42 31SZA630_068
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
DASHBOARD
U.S. models only
Driver and Passenger Safety
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
RADIATOR CAP
BATTERY LABEL
CONTINUED
61
11/08/01 08:27:01 31SZA630_069
Safety Labels
SUN VISOR
DOORJAMBS
U.S. models
U.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models
62
Canadian models
11/08/01 08:27:06 31SZA630_070
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
Seat Heaters ................................... 165
Power Windows ............................. 167
Moonroof ........................................ 170
Parking Brake ................................ 171
Mirrors ............................................ 172
Driving Position Memory
System......................................... 174
Interior Lights ................................ 176
Interior Convenience Items .......... 179
Center Console .......................... 180
Console Compartments ........ 180
Beverage Holders ...................... 181
Storage Compartment ............... 182
Glove Box ................................... 183
Integrated Sunshades ............... 183
Sunglasses Holder ..................... 183
Conversation Mirror ................. 184
Sun Visor .................................... 184
Vanity Mirror ............................. 185
Coat Hooks ................................. 185
Accessory Power Sockets......... 186
AC Power Outlet ........................ 187
Cargo Floor Storage
Compartment ......................... 188
Cargo Net ................................... 188
63
Instruments and Controls
Control Locations ............................ 64
Instrument Panel ............................. 65
Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 67
Gauges .............................................. 80
Multi-Information Display .............. 85
Controls Near the Steering
Wheel .......................................... 122
Windshield Wipers and
Washers .................................. 123
Rear Window Wiper and
Washer .................................... 124
Turn Signals and Headlights ........ 125
Hazard Warning Button ................ 129
Rear Window Defogger ................ 129
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 130
Steering Wheel Adjustment ......... 132
Keys and Locks.............................. 133
Immobilizer System....................... 134
Ignition Switch ............................... 136
Door Locks ..................................... 137
Childproof Door Locks ............. 143
Tailgate and Glass Hatch.............. 143
Power Tailgate ........................... 144
Glass Hatch ................................ 148
Remote Transmitter ...................... 150
Seats ................................................ 154
Detachable Anchor.................... 163
11/08/01 08:27:14 31SZA630_071
Control Locations
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM*
(P.174)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS (P.67)
GAUGES (P.80)
MOONROOF SWITCH*
(P.170)
HomeLink BUTTONS*
(P.437)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.209)
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.171)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS (P.192)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM (P.199)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.137)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.515)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.167)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.497)
GLASS HATCH
RELEASE BUTTON/
POWER TAILGATE
SWITCH*
(P.144, 149) HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE (P.499)
On Touring models is shown.
*: If equipped
64
MIRROR CONTROL
AUTO BUTTON*
(P.172)
REAR HEATING/
COOLING CONTROLS
(P.197)
REAR CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM
(P.205)
PARKING BRAKE
PEDAL (P.171)
AUXILIARY INPUT
JACKS* (P.428)
HEADPHONE
CONNECTORS*
(P.428)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
(P.186)
11/08/01 08:27:25 31SZA630_072
Instrument Panel
Except Touring models
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR (P.75)
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.68)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR (P.68)
*2
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
INDICATOR (P.77)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (P.68)
FUEL ECONOMY INDICATOR (P.77)
A/T TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR*2 (P.74)
LOW TIRE PRESSURE
INDICATOR (P.72)
VSA OFF INDICATOR
(P.71)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.71)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.76)
INFORMATION DISPLAY (P.81)
FOG LIGHT
INDICATOR*1(P.76)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR (P.70)
POWER TAILGATE INDICATOR (P.74)
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.76)
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P.76)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.70)
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR (P.76)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR(P.76)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.69)
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR (P.67)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.70)
DOOR-OPEN INDICATOR (P.77)
LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.78)
WASHER LEVEL INDICATOR*1 (P.78)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR*1 (P.79)
STARTER SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.73)
*1 : If equipped
*2 : 4WD models only
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
65
Instruments and Controls
VTM-4 INDICATOR (P.75)
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) INDICATOR (P.73)
11/08/01 08:27:32 31SZA630_073
Instrument Panel
On Touring models
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR (P.68)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P.70)
*
VTM-4 INDICATOR (P.75)
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.68)
FOG LIGHT
INDICATOR (P.76)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (P.68)
FUEL ECONOMY INDICATOR (P.77)
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.76)
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P.76)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.70)
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.76)
A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR* (P.74)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.76)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.69)
LOW TIRE PRESSURE/
TPMS INDICATOR (P.72)
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR (P.67)
VSA OFF INDICATOR
(P.71)
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.70)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.71)
LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.78)
DOOR-OPEN INDICATOR (P.77)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.76)
MESSAGE INDICATOR (P.75)
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY (P.85)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.79)
* : 4WD models only
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
66
11/08/01 08:27:40 31SZA630_074
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belt, the beeper sounds,
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belt before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page 22 .
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
SEAT BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 93 ).
For more information, see page 22 .
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
67
Instruments and Controls
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you have not
fastened your seat belt.
11/08/01 08:27:51 31SZA630_075
Instrument Panel Indicators
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
The engine can be severely
damaged if this indicator flashes
or stays on when the engine is
running. For more information,
see page 625 .
Charging System
Indicator
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For more information,
see page 626 .
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page 93 ).
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message
on the multi-information display
(see page 93 ).
68
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
For more information, see page
626 .
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page 93 ). For more information, see
page 626 .
11/08/01 08:27:59 31SZA630_076
Instrument Panel Indicators
U.S.
Canada
Parking Brake
and Brake
System
Indicator (Red)
This indicator has two functions:
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘LOW BRAKE
FLUID’’ or ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 93 ).
Instruments and Controls
1. It comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. A beeper
sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.
2. If it remains on after you have
fully released the parking brake
while the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page 627 .
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page 93 ).
69
11/08/01 08:28:11 31SZA630_077
Instrument Panel Indicators
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates a
potential problem with your front
airbags. This indicator will also alert
you to a potential problem with your
airbag system components. For
more information, see page 34 .
U.S.
Canada
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
This indicator comes on for several
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates that the passenger’s side
airbag has automatically shut off.
For more information, see page 34 .
On Touring models
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
93 ).
70
You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER
SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
93 ).
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on
for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any
other time, there is a problem with
the ABS. If this happens, have
your vehicle checked at a dealer.
With this indicator on, your
vehicle still has normal braking
ability but no anti-lock function.
For more information, see page
531 .
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page
93 ).
11/08/01 08:28:26 31SZA630_078
Instrument Panel Indicators
It flashes when VSA is active (see
page 533 ).
If it comes on and stays on at any
other time, there is a problem with
the VSA or Hill Start Assist system.
Take your vehicle to a dealer to have
it checked. Without VSA, your
vehicle still has normal driving ability,
but will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement. See page
533 for more information on the
VSA system.
VSA OFF Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. For more information, see
page 533 .
It comes on as a reminder that you
have turned off the vehicle stability
assist (VSA) system.
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see page 587 ). Replace
the bulb as soon as possible, since
other drivers cannot see that you are
signaling.
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 93 ).
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page
93 ).
71
Instruments and Controls
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
11/08/01 08:28:37 31SZA630_079
Instrument Panel Indicators
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
Except Touring models
On Touring models
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on while driving,
it indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
This indicator has two functions:
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost pressure, and determine the
cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page 612 ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service
(see page 636 ). For more
information, see page 522 .
72
1. If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE’’ message on the
multi-information display (see
page 94 ).
Check the tire pressure monitor
on the multi-information display
and determine the cause (see page
526 ).
If this happens, pull to the side
of the road when it is safe,
check which tire has lost
pressure on the multiinformation display, and
determine the cause. If it is
because of a flat tire, have the
flat tire repaired as soon as
possible. If two or more tires are
underinflated, call a professional
towing service. For more
information, see page 636 .
11/08/01 08:28:48 31SZA630_080
Instrument Panel Indicators
U.S.
Canada
Starter System
Indicator
Except Touring models
This indicator comes on when there
is a problem with the starter system.
For more information, see page 513 .
On Touring models
If you see a ‘‘CHECK STARTER
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display, there is a
problem with the starter system (see
page 94 ).
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
Except Touring models
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If this indicator comes on and stays
on at any other time, or if it does not
come on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, there
is a problem with the TPMS. With
this indicator on, the low tire
pressure indicator and the tire
pressure monitor will not come on
when a tire loses pressure. Take the
vehicle to your dealer to have the
system checked.
73
Instruments and Controls
2. If this indicator begins to flash,
there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system
(TPMS). You will also see a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display. The indicator continues to
flash for a while (approximately 1
minute), then stays on. If this
happens, have your dealer check
the system as soon as possible.
For more information, see page
528 .
11/08/01 08:28:58 31SZA630_081
Instrument Panel Indicators
A/T Temperature
Indicator
4WD models only
This indicator monitors the
temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid. It should come on
for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on while driving,
it means the transmission fluid
temperature is too high. Pull to the
side of the road when it is safe, shift
to Park, and let the engine idle until
the indicator goes out.
On Touring 4WD models
You will also see an ‘‘A/T TEMP
HIGH’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 94 ).
Continuing to drive with the A/T
temperature indicator on may cause
serious damage to the transmission.
U.S.
Canada
Power Tailgate
Indicator
On EX-L models
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. If it
comes on at any other time, there is
a problem in the power tailgate
system. Have the system checked by
your dealer as soon as possible. You
can still open or close the tailgate
manually. For more information on
the power tailgate, see page 144 .
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK POWER
TAILGATE SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display.
74
11/08/01 08:29:11 31SZA630_082
Instrument Panel Indicators
Maintenance Minder
Indicator
Message Indicator
VTM-4 Indicator
On Touring models
4WD models only
This indicator comes on when there
is a system message on the multiinformation display. Press the INFO
button on the steering wheel (see
page 85 ) to see the message (see
page 92 ).
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem in the 4WD
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer to have it checked.
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.
Most of the time, this indicator
comes on along with other indicators
in the instrument panel such as the
seat belt reminder indicator, SRS
indicator, VSA system indicator, etc.
If the indicator blinks while driving,
the VTM-4 fluid temperature is too
high. Pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, shift to Park, and let
the engine idle until the indicator
goes out.
Continuing to drive with the VTM-4
indicator blinking may cause serious
damage to the system.
75
Instruments and Controls
Except Touring models
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It
reminds you that it is time to take
your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance. The maintenance main
items and sub items will be displayed
in the information display. See page
559 for more information on the
Maintenance MinderTM.
11/08/01 08:29:27 31SZA630_083
Instrument Panel Indicators
Immobilizer System
Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly coded
ignition key. If it is not a properly
coded key, the indicator will blink,
and the engine’s fuel system will be
disabled (see page 134 ).
Lights On Indicator
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or
position. This indicator
will also come on when the light
switch is in AUTO and the lights
turn on automatically. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will remain on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door.
Fog Light Indicator
Except LX models
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the fog lights. For more
information, see page 127 .
76
High Beam Indicator
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page 125 .
Cruise Main Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button (see
page 430 ).
Cruise Control Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
430 for information on operating the
cruise control.
11/08/01 08:29:36 31SZA630_084
Instrument Panel Indicators
Daytime Running Lights
Indicator
Except Touring models
Fuel Economy Indicator
While the engine is operating in its
most economical range, this
indicator may come on and stay on.
It goes off when your vehicle uses
extra fuel.
Door-open Indicator
This indicator comes on if any door,
tailgate, or glass hatch is not closed
tightly.
77
Instruments and Controls
If this indicator comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position and the parking brake is
released, it means there is a problem
in the high beam headlight’s circuit.
Have your vehicle checked by your
dealer.
On Touring models
If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display, there is a
problem with the daytime running
light system. Take your vehicle to a
dealer to have it checked.
11/08/01 08:29:46 31SZA630_085
Instrument Panel Indicators
Washer Level Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
If equipped
This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
come on (see page 581 ).
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘LOW FUEL’’
message on the multi-information
display.
On Touring 4WD models
You will see a ‘‘LOW WASHER
FLUID’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 94 ).
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
U.S. model is shown.
This indicator comes on as a
reminder that you must refuel soon.
United States:
When the indicator comes on, there
are about 3.1 US gal (11.9 ) of fuel
remaining in the tank.
Canada:
When the indicator comes on, there
are about 9.3 (2.45 US gal) of fuel
remaining in the tank.
78
When the needle reaches E, there is
a very small amount of fuel in the
tank.
11/08/01 08:29:59 31SZA630_086
Instrument Panel Indicators
Security System Indicator
Except LX models
Door, Glass Hatch, and Tailgate
Open Indicator
Except Touring models
U.S. model is shown.
This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. See page
429 for more information on the
security system.
Except Touring models
The appropriate tire indicator will
come on in the information display
along with the low tire pressure
indicator if a tire is significantly
underinflated or has suddenly lost
pressure. See Low Tire Pressure
Indicator for what to do if this
indicator comes on.
On Touring models
This indicator is displayed as the
system message on the multiinformation display (see page 526 ).
On Touring models
The door, glass hatch, and tailgate
open indicator appears on the multiinformation display (see page 13 ).
79
Instruments and Controls
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
Your vehicle has a door, glass hatch,
and tailgate open indicator on the
information display. If any door(s),
the glass hatch, or the tailgate is not
closed tightly, the appropriate light/
lights will come on to remind you to
close the tailgate, the glass hatch or
the door(s).
Tire Pressure Monitor
11/08/01 08:30:10 31SZA630_087
Gauges
Except Touring models
SPEEDOMETER
TACHOMETER
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
SELECT/RESET KNOB
On Touring models
INFORMATION DISPLAY
SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE
TACHOMETER
SELECT/RESET KNOB
U.S. models are shown.
80
FUEL GAUGE
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
Temperature Gauge
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise to
about the middle of the gauge. In
severe driving conditions, the pointer
may rise to the upper zone. If it
reaches the red (hot) mark, pull
safely to the side of the road. For
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system, see page 623 .
Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you
have. It may show slightly more
or less than the actual amount.
Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
11/08/01 08:30:26 31SZA630_088
Gauges
INFORMATION DISPLAY
SELECT/RESET KNOB
OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
ODOMETER
RANGE
TRIP METER A
ENGINE
OIL LIFE
INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY
AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY
U.S. model with outside temperature indicator is shown.
Information Display
Except Touring models
The information display shows the
odometer, trip meter, engine oil life,
outside temperature (if equipped),
instant fuel economy, average fuel
economy, range (estimated distance),
and maintenance item code(s).
To switch the display, press and
release the select/reset knob
repeatedly. When you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, your last selection is
displayed.
On Touring models
For information about the multiinformation display, see page 85 .
Trip Meter
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the select/reset
knob repeatedly.
Each trip meter works independently,
so you can keep track of two
different distances.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the select/reset
knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
81
Instruments and Controls
TRIP METER B
Odometer
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial/
territorial regulations to disconnect,
reset, or alter the odometer with the
intent to change the number of miles
or kilometers indicated.
11/08/01 08:30:36 31SZA630_089
Gauges
Instant Fuel Economy
This display shows the instant fuel
economy you are getting.
It shows the number of mpg (U.S.)
or l/100 km (Canada).
Average Fuel Economy
When either of the trip meters (trip
A or B) is displayed, your vehicle’s
average fuel economy since you last
reset that trip meter can be shown
on the information display (mpg on
U.S. models and l/100 km on
Canadian models). This number is
updated once per 10 seconds. To see
the average fuel economy, press and
release the select/reset knob
repeatedly.
When you reset a trip meter, the
average fuel economy for that trip
meter also resets.
82
Range (Estimated Distance)
This display shows the estimated
distance you can travel on the fuel
remaining in the tank.
This distance is estimated from the
fuel economy you have achieved
over the last few miles (kilometers),
so it will vary with changes in speed,
traffic condition, etc.
11/08/01 08:30:50 31SZA630_090
Gauges
Outside Temperature Indicator
Except LX models
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. The temperature
reading can be affected by heat
reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
surrounding traffic. This can cause
an incorrect temperature reading
when your vehicle speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.
If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it up to ±5°F in U.S. models (±3°C
in Canadian models) warmer or
cooler.
NOTE: The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this
procedure.
To adjust outside temperature
indicator,
1. Press and hold the select/reset
knob until ‘‘Oil Life’’ appears
(about 10 seconds).
3. Press and hold the select/reset
knob until a numerical value
appears (about 2 seconds).
4. Turn the select/reset knob to the
desired temperature offset. The
possible setting are 0, +1, +2,
+3, +4, +5, −5, −4, −3, −2,
−1 (U.S.) or 0, +1, +2, +3, −3,
−2, −1 (Canada).
5. When the desired setting is
reached, press and quickly release
the select/reset knob to save the
new offset.
On Touring models
To adjust outside temperature, see
Customize Settings, page 103 .
2. Press and quickly release the
select/reset knob again, and
‘‘Outside’’ appears.
83
Instruments and Controls
This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
models) or Celsius (Canadian
models).
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
11/08/01 08:30:58 31SZA630_091
Gauges
Maintenance MinderTM
The information display in the
instrument panel shows you the
engine oil life and maintenance
service items when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. This
information helps to keep you aware
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued troublefree driving. Refer to page 559 for
more information.
Check Fuel Cap Message
Your vehicle’s onboard diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the information display.
Turn the engine off, and confirm the
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
it, then retighten it until it clicks at
least once. The message should go
off after several days of normal
driving once you tighten or replace
the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another
display, press the select/reset knob.
The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
will appear each time you restart the
engine until the system turns the
message off.
84
If the system still detects a leak in
your vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page 626 .
11/08/01 08:31:09 31SZA630_092
Multi-Information Display
On Touring models
When you open the driver’s door, a
‘‘Welcome’’ message is shown on the
multi-information display.
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the multi-information
display changes as shown on the
next page each time you press the
INFO (▲/▼) button or the SEL/
RESET button.
INFO (▲/▼)
BUTTON
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, your last
selection is displayed.
SEL/RESET
BUTTON
To change the display, press the
INFO (▲/▼) button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the main
menu appears (see page 86 ).
In the multi-information display, the
system message is also displayed
(see page 92 ) and you can
customize your vehicle control
settings (see page 95 ).
You can also change the display by
pressing the select/reset knob in the
instrument panel.
CONTINUED
85
Instruments and Controls
The multi-information display in the
instrument panel displays various
information and messages when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position. Some of the messages help
you operate your vehicle more
comfortably. Others help to keep
you aware of the periodic
maintenance your vehicle needs for
continued trouble-free driving.
11/08/01 08:31:14 31SZA630_093
Multi-Information Display
Main Menu
INFO button
Go to Customize Menu (See page 95)
SEL/RESET button
(See page 87)
Trip Computer
(See page 90)
Tire Pressure for each tire (See page 89)
U.S. model is shown.
86
11/08/01 08:31:24 31SZA630_094
Multi-Information Display
Odometer
Trip Meter
TRIP METER
ODOMETER
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial/
territorial regulations to disconnect,
reset, or alter the odometer with the
intent to change the number of miles
or kilometers indicated.
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it. There
are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip
B. Each trip meter works
independently, so you can keep track
of two different distances.
CONTINUED
87
Instruments and Controls
U.S. model is shown.
When the main menu is blank or
Trip Computer is displayed, pressing
the SEL/RESET button changes the
display to ‘‘odometer/trip meter’’
‘‘outside temperature/trip meter’’
and ‘‘engine oil life.’’
11/08/01 08:31:34 31SZA630_095
Multi-Information Display
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0.’’
When you reset Trip A, average fuel
economy A is reset at the same time.
When you reset Trip B, average fuel
economy B is reset.
In the customizing mode, you can set
Trip A and average fuel economy A
to reset at the same time when you
refuel your vehicle (see page 104 ).
Outside Temperature
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE
U.S.
Canada
This shows the outside Fahrenheit
temperature in U.S. models, and
Celsius temperature in Canadian
models.
88
11/08/01 08:31:45 31SZA630_096
Multi-Information Display
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. The temperature
reading can be affected by heat
reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
surrounding traffic. This can cause
an incorrect temperature reading
when your vehicle speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.
Engine Oil Life
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
You can adjust the outside
temperature display (see page 103 ).
This shows the remaining life of the
engine oil. It shows 100% after the
engine oil is replaced and the display
is reset. The engine oil life is
calculated based on engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions. For more information,
see page 559 .
Tire Pressure Monitor
ENGINE OIL LIFE
Canada
When the tire pressure monitor is
shown on the multi-information
display, press the SEL/RESET
button. The display changes as
shown.
You can see the pressure of each tire
in this monitor. If one or more tires
are low, inflate them to the correct
pressure. For more information, see
page 526 .
89
Instruments and Controls
U.S.
11/08/01 08:32:00 31SZA630_097
Multi-Information Display
Trip Computer
INSTANT FUEL MPG (U.S.
models)/INSTANT FUEL L/100 km
(Canadian models)
This shows your instant fuel
economy.
AVERAGE FUEL A/B
This shows your vehicle’s average
fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models)
or liter/100 km (Canadian models)
since you last reset Trip A or Trip B.
Along with the trip meter, the trip
computer calculates these values:
Instant Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy
Range
Average Vehicle Speed
Elapsed Time
90
You can customize the Trip A and
AVERAGE FUEL A reset condition
on the multi-information display (see
page 104 ).
RANGE
This shows the estimated distance
you can travel on the fuel remaining
in the fuel tank. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy
you received over the last several
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada),
so it will vary with changes in speed,
traffic, etc.
11/08/01 08:32:07 31SZA630_098
Multi-Information Display
AVERAGE SPEED A/B
ELAPSED TIME A/B
This shows the average speed you
are traveling in miles per hour (mph)
for U.S. models or kilometers per
hour (km/h) for Canadian models.
This shows the accumulated
traveling time since you last reset it.
Instruments and Controls
To reset the AVERAGE SPEED you
have traveled, press and hold the
SEL/RESET button until the
number resets.
If you want to reset the ELAPSED
TIME manually, go to the trip
computer’s ELAPSED TIME display,
and press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets.
91
11/08/01 08:32:15 31SZA630_099
Multi-Information Display
System Messages
The system message(s) triggers the
appropriate indicator(s) on the
instrument panel, including the
system message indicator, to come
on. The system message indicator
does not go off until the problem(s)
is corrected.
You will also hear a beep when the
system message comes on for the
first time.
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR
U.S. model is shown.
If there is a problem with your
vehicle, for example the engine oil
level is low or a door is not fully
closed, the multi-information display
will show you the problem. It does
this by interrupting the current
display with one or more messages.
92
When there are several messages to
be shown, the system switches the
messages every 5 seconds.
The message is shown until you
push the INFO (▲ or ▼) button.
To see the message again, press the
INFO (▲ or ▼) button, 5 seconds
after the display disappears.
Here is a list of messages shown on
the multi-information display:
11/08/01 08:32:34 31SZA630_100
Multi-Information Display
See page
13
U.S.
Canada
See page
626
See page
22
See page
22
See page
626
U.S.
Canada
See page
625
See page
627
See page
34
Canada
See page
532
U.S.
U.S.
See page
34
Instruments and Controls
See page
171
Canada
See page
533
See page
627
See page
623
CONTINUED
93
11/08/01 08:32:53 31SZA630_101
Multi-Information Display
U.S.
See page
527
See page
485
Canada
See page
514
See page
528
See page
127
See page
528
See page
515
See page
74
See page
488
See page
564
See page
581
See page
498
See page
78
See page
136
U.S.
Canada
94
See page
146
11/08/01 08:33:05 31SZA630_102
Multi-Information Display
Customize Settings
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position, or move the shift lever out
of Park, the display will change to
the normal screen.
Touring model is shown.
When the main menu displays
‘‘CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS’’ you can
customize some vehicle control
settings.
To enter the customizing mode,
press the SEL/RESET button.
To change the settings, the ignition
switch must be in the ON (II)
position, and the vehicle must be
stopped with the transmission in
Park.
To have the driver’s ID detected,
make sure your remote transmitter
is linked to the system (see Recalling
a Memorized Driving Position on
page 153 ).
If you want the settings as they were
when the vehicle left the factory,
select DEFAULT ALL, as described
on page 98 .
If you want to change any vehicle
control settings, select CHG
SETTING, then press the SEL/
RESET button.
Refer to the table on the following
pages about the settings you want to
CONTINUED
customize.
95
Instruments and Controls
On Touring models
You can customize some vehicle
control settings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ and
‘‘DRIVER 2’’ separately. If ‘‘DRIVER
1’’ or ‘‘DRIVER 2’’ is not displayed,
customizing is not possible.
11/08/01 08:33:13 31SZA630_103
Multi-Information Display
Group Setup
METER SETUP
(P.101)
POSITION SETUP*2
(P.106)
LIGHTING SETUP
(P.108)
Menu Item
LANGUAGE SELECTION
ADJUST OUTSIDE
TEMP. DISPLAY
Changes the outside temperature reading above or
below its current reading.
TRIP A INFO RESET
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,
average fuel A, elapsed time A, and average speed
A.
Changes the driver’s seat and the outside mirror
positions to a stored setting.
Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lights
stay on after you close the doors and the tailgate.
Changes how long (in seconds) the exterior lights
stay on after you close the driver’s door.
MEMORY POSITION LINK
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
HEADLIGHT
AUTO OFF TIMER
AUTO LIGHT
SENSITIVITY
*1 : Default setting
*2 : On Touring models
96
Description
Changes the language used in the display.
Changes the timing of when the headlights come
on. The headlight switch needs to be in the AUTO
position.
Setting Option
ENGLISH*1
FRENCH
SPANISH
−5°F ∼ ±0°F*1 ∼ 5°F
(U.S.)
−3°C ∼ ±0°C*1 ∼ 3°C
(Canada)
with REFUEL
MANUAL ONLY *1
IGN OFF
ON*1
OFF
15 SEC
60 SEC
30 SEC*1
60 SEC
0 SEC
30 SEC
15 SEC*1
LOW
MAX
MIN
HIGH
MID*1
Page
102
103
104
107
109
110
111
11/08/01 08:33:21 31SZA630_104
Multi-Information Display
Group Setup
DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP
(P.113)
Menu Item
AUTO DOOR LOCK
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
SECURITY RELOCK
TIMER
PTG KEYLESS OPEN
MODE
DEFAULT ALL
(P.98)
*:
Changes the setting of when to automatically
unlock the driver’s/all the doors.
Changes which doors unlock with the remote
transmitter on a first push.
The exterior lights flash each time you press the
LOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will also
sound when you press the LOCK button twice.
Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for the
doors to relock and the security system to set after
you unlock but do not open the door.
Changes the power tailgate opening setting.
Set/Cancel all the customized settings as default.
Setting Option
SHIFT FROM P
WITH VEH SPEED*
OFF
SHIFT TO P*
DRIVER DOOR*/
ALL DOORS
IGN OFF
OFF
DRIVER DOOR *
ALL DOORS
ON*
OFF
90 SEC
60 SEC
30 SEC*
ANY TIME*
WHEN UNLOCKED
SET
CANCEL *
Page
114
115
117
118
119
120
98
Default setting
97
Instruments and Controls
KEY AND REMOTE
UNLOCK MODE
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
Description
Changes the setting of when to automatically lock
the doors.
11/08/01 08:33:30 31SZA630_105
Multi-Information Display
DEFAULT ALL
Touring model is shown.
If you want to set the default settings,
press the INFO (▲/▼) button to
select DEFAULT ALL, then press
the SEL/RESET button.
To set the default settings, press the
INFO (▲/▼) button to select SET
then press the SEL/RESET button.
If you want to cancel DEFAULT
ALL, select CANCEL, then press the
SEL/RESET button. The screen
goes back to the previous display.
98
When DEFAULT ALL is set, you will
see the above display for several
seconds, then the screen returns to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.
If the setting is not successfully
completed, ‘‘FAILED’’ is shown for
several seconds, and then the screen
goes back to the normal message
mode. Repeat the same procedure to
select DEFAULT ALL.
11/08/01 08:33:40 31SZA630_106
Multi-Information Display
METER SETUP
POSITION SETUP
LIGHTING SETUP
DOOR/WINDOW SETUP
Touring model is shown.
When you want to change the
vehicle control settings, press the
INFO (▲/▼) button to select CHG
SETTING, then press the SEL/
RESET button.
CONTINUED
99
Instruments and Controls
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown on the next page. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setup you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
Customize Settings
You can customize some of the
vehicle control settings to your
preference. Here are the settings
you can customize:
11/08/01 08:33:45 31SZA630_107
Multi-Information Display
METER SETUP
(See page 101)
POSITION SETUP
(See page 106)
Select ‘‘EXIT’’
LIGHTING SETUP
(See page 108)
Select ‘‘CANCEL’’
Select
‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’
INFO button
SEL/RESET button
Touring model is shown.
100
DOOR/WINDOW SETUP
(See page 113)
11/08/01 08:33:54 31SZA630_108
Multi-Information Display
Meter Setup
Here are the three custom settings
for the meter setup:
Instruments and Controls
LANGUAGE SELECTION
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY
TRIP A INFO RESET
While ‘‘METER SETUP’’ is shown,
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
INFO button
SEL/RESET button
Touring model is shown.
CONTINUED
101
11/08/01 08:34:04 31SZA630_109
Multi-Information Display
Language Selection
There are three language selections
you can make: English, French, and
Spanish. To choose the language you
want, follow these instructions:
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
102
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired language by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
11/08/01 08:34:16 31SZA630_110
Multi-Information Display
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
U.S.
Canada
Canada
Adjust the outside temperature value
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly. Press the SEL/RESET
button to set the desired value.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
CONTINUED
103
Instruments and Controls
If you sometimes find that the
temperature reading is a few
degrees above or below the actual
temperature, you can adjust it by
following these instructions:
U.S.
11/08/01 08:34:27 31SZA630_111
Multi-Information Display
Trip A Info Reset
There are three settings you can
choose from:
with REFUEL − Trip A Info is reset
every time you refuel your vehicle.
MANUAL ONLY − You can reset
Trip A Info when you press and hold
the SEL/RESET button until the
number resets.
IGN OFF − Trip A Info is reset
when you turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position.
104
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
11/08/01 08:34:32 31SZA630_112
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘TRIP
A INFO RESET’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
105
11/08/01 08:34:39 31SZA630_113
Multi-Information Display
Position Setup
You can customize the MEMORY
POSITION LINK setting in position
setup.
While ‘‘POSITION SETUP’’ is shown,
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
INFO button
SEL/RESET button
Touring model is shown.
106
11/08/01 08:34:50 31SZA630_114
Multi-Information Display
Memory Position Link
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘POSITION
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
107
Instruments and Controls
If ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ is
‘‘ON,’’ the driver’s seat and outside
mirrors move to the positions stored
in the memory when you open the
driver’s door, using the remote
transmitter.
11/08/01 08:34:59 31SZA630_115
Multi-Information Display
Lighting Setup
Here are the three custom settings
for the lighting setup:
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY
While ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ is
shown, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
INFO button
SEL/RESET
button
Touring model is shown.
108
11/08/01 08:35:10 31SZA630_116
Multi-Information Display
Interior Light Dimming Time
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING
TIME’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
CONTINUED
109
Instruments and Controls
The interior lights fade out when you
close all doors and tailgate. To
change how long the lights stay on
before they fade out, follow these
instructions:
11/08/01 08:35:18 31SZA630_117
Multi-Information Display
Headlight Auto Off Timer
The headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights, and license
plate lights go off after the selected
time when you remove the key from
the ignition switch and close the
driver’s door. To change how long
the lights stay on before they go off,
follow these instructions:
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
110
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
11/08/01 08:35:31 31SZA630_118
Multi-Information Display
Auto Light Sensitivity
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER’’
and repeat the procedure again.
HIGH −
The headlights come on when it is
somewhat bright.
MID −
The headlights come on when it is as
bright as sunset or sunrise.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
LOW −
The headlights come on when it is
somewhat dark.
MIN −
The headlights come on when it is
dark.
CONTINUED
111
Instruments and Controls
The headlights automatically come
on when the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position and the ambient
light reaches a changeable level. You
can select the auto light sensitivity
from the following five levels:
MAX −
The headlights come on when it is
bright.
11/08/01 08:35:38 31SZA630_119
Multi-Information Display
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
112
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
LIGHT SENSITIVITY’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
11/08/01 08:35:51 31SZA630_120
Multi-Information Display
Door/Window Setup
Here are the six custom settings for
the door/window setup:
While ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’
is shown, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
Instruments and Controls
AUTO DOOR LOCK
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK
MODE
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER
PTG (POWER TAILGATE)
KEYLESS OPEN MODE
SEL/RESET
button
INFO button
Touring model is shown.
CONTINUED
113
11/08/01 08:36:00 31SZA630_121
Multi-Information Display
Auto Door Lock
There are three settings you can
choose from:
SHIFT FROM P −
The doors lock whenever you move
the shift lever out of Park.
WITH VEH SPEED −
The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches about 10 mph (U.S.)
and 15 km/h (Canada).
OFF −
The auto door lock mode is
deactivated all the time.
114
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
11/08/01 08:36:11 31SZA630_122
Multi-Information Display
Auto Door Unlock
There are three settings you can
choose from:
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
IGN OFF − The driver’s door or all
the doors, depending on your
selection in the next step, unlock
when you turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position.
OFF − The auto door unlock mode
is deactivated all the time.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
DOOR LOCK’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
CONTINUED
115
Instruments and Controls
SHIFT TO P − The driver’s door or
all the doors, depending on your
selection in the next step, unlock
when you move the shift lever to
Park with the brake pedal depressed.
11/08/01 08:36:20 31SZA630_123
Multi-Information Display
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
If you choose ‘‘SHIFT TO P’’ or ‘‘IGN
OFF’’, you will see the above display.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
Press the INFO (▲/▼) button to
switch the door lock mode setting
between the driver’s door and all
doors. Then, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter your selection.
116
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
DOOR UNLOCK’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
11/08/01 08:36:32 31SZA630_124
Multi-Information Display
Key and Remote Unlock Mode
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘KEY
AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE’’
and repeat the procedure again.
CONTINUED
117
Instruments and Controls
To select whether the driver’s or all
doors unlock when the remote
transmitter or key is used, follow
these instructions.
11/08/01 08:36:39 31SZA630_125
Multi-Information Display
Keyless Lock Acknowledgment
When you push the LOCK button on
the remote transmitter, some
exterior lights flash, and a beeper
sounds when you push the LOCK
button again within 5 seconds to
verify that the doors and the tailgate
are locked and the security system
has set (see page 429 ). You can
customize the exterior lights not to
flash and the beeper not to sound.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
118
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
11/08/01 08:36:49 31SZA630_126
Multi-Information Display
Security Relock Timer
You can change this relock time
from 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
CONTINUED
119
Instruments and Controls
If you unlock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter,
but do not open any of the doors or
the tailgate within 30 seconds, the
doors and the tailgate automatically
relock and the security system sets.
11/08/01 08:37:00 31SZA630_127
Multi-Information Display
PTG (Power Tailgate) Keyless Open
Mode
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
You can customize the power
tailgate setting not to open without
unlocking the tailgate lock first by
remote transmitter from the outside.
There are two settings you can
choose from:
ANYTIME − The tailgate unlocks
and opens when you press and hold
the tailgate button on the remote
transmitter for 1 second. The
tailgate will automatically relock
when you close it when the doors are
locked.
WHEN UNLOCKED − In this mode,
you must unlock the tailgate before
opening it. In addition, the tailgate
will not automatically relock when
you close it.
On EX-L models
See page 146 for how to customize
the power tailgate keyless open
mode.
120
11/08/01 08:37:09 31SZA630_128
Multi-Information Display
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘PTG
KEYLESS OPEN MODE’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
121
Instruments and Controls
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
11/08/01 08:37:20 31SZA630_129
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNAL/
FRONT FOG LIGHTS*3
(P.125)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH (P.534)
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS*3
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON (P.129)
(P.392)
BLUETOOTH
HANDSFREELINK SYSTEM
VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS*3
(P.441, 462)
PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM
SWITCH*3 (P.484)
MIRROR CONTROLS (P.172)
POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER
SWITCH (P.137)
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
*4 :
122
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.35)
VTM-4 LOCK
BUTTON*4 (P.520)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR
BUTTON*3 (P.129, 173)
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY
SYSTEM*3 (P.174)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES (P.167)
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE
HANDLE (P.497)
GLASS HATCH RELEASE BUTTON/
POWER TAILGATE SWITCH*3
HORN*1
(P.144, 149)
PARKING BRAKE RELEASE VOICE CONTROL
HANDLE (P.171)
BUTTONS*2
On Touring models is shown.
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.123)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET (P.186)
SEAT HEATER
SWITCHES*3 (P.165)
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS (P.430)
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
(P.132)
MULTI-INFORMATION
BUTTONS*3
(P.85)
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
If equipped
4WD models only
11/08/01 08:37:29 31SZA630_130
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
LO − The wipers run at low speed.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
INT − The length of the wipe
interval is varied automatically
according to vehicle speed.
1. MIST
2. OFF
3. INT − Intermittent
4. LO − Low speed
5. HI − High speed
6. Windshield washers
If you turn it to the shortest delay,
the wipers change to low speed
operation when the vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
123
Instruments and Controls
OFF − The wipers are not activated.
Windshield Washer − Pull the
wiper control lever toward you,
and hold it. The washers spray
until you release the lever. The
wipers run at low speed, then
complete one more sweep after
you release the lever.
11/08/01 08:37:40 31SZA630_131
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Rear Window Wiper and Washer
3. When you turn the wiper switch to
the ‘‘OFF’’ position, the wiper will
return to its parked position.
4. Rotate the switch
counterclockwise to spray the
window washer.
The rear wiper will not work if the
glass hatch is not fully closed.
1. To turn on the rear window wiper,
rotate the switch clockwise to ON.
It operates intermittently.
2. Hold past ON to turn the rear
window wiper on and to spray the
rear window washer.
124
If you attempt to open the glass
hatch while the rear wiper is
operating, the wiper will return to
the parked position, and then the
glass hatch can be opened. After the
glass hatch is closed, the rear wiper
starts to operate again after a few
seconds delay.
When you shift the transmission to
the reverse position with the front
windshield wipers activated, the rear
window wiper operates automatically.
The rear window washer uses the
same fluid reservoir as the windshield washer.
11/08/01 08:37:49 31SZA630_132
Turn Signals and Headlights
Headlights On − Turning the
switch to the ‘‘
’’ position turns
on the parking lights, taillights,
instrument panel lights, side-marker
lights, and rear license plate lights.
1. Turn signal
2. Off
3. Parking and indicator lights
4. AUTO
5. Headlights on
6. High beams
7. Flash high beams
8. Fog lights off *
9. Fog lights on*
Turning the switch to the ‘‘
’’
position turns on the headlights. If
you leave the lights on with the key
removed from the ignition switch,
you will hear a reminder chime when
you open the driver’s door.
When the light switch is in either of
these positions, the lights on
indicator comes on as a reminder.
This indicator stays on if you leave
the lights on and turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or
LOCK (0) position.
High Beams − To switch from low
beams to high beams, push the left
lever forward until you hear a click.
The blue high beam indicator will
come on (see page 76 ). Pull it back
to return to low beams. To flash the
high beams, pull the lever back
lightly, then release it. The high
beams stay on as long as you hold
the lever back.
*: If equipped
125
Instruments and Controls
Turn Signal − Push down on the
left lever to signal a left turn and up
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever and
hold it. The lever will return to the
center when you release it or
complete a turn.
11/08/01 08:37:58 31SZA630_133
Headlights
Except LX models
AUTO − The automatic lighting
feature turns on the headlights and
all other exterior lights, when it
senses low ambient light.
To turn on automatic lighting, turn
the light switch to AUTO. The lights
will come on automatically when the
outside light level becomes low (at
dusk, for example). The lights on
indicator comes on as a reminder.
The lights and indicator will turn off
automatically when the system
senses high ambient light.
The lights will remain on when you
turn off the ignition switch. They will
turn off automatically when you
remove the key and open the driver’s
door. To turn them on again, either
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position or turn the light switch
to the
position.
126
Even with the automatic lighting
feature turned on, we recommend
that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night or in a dense
fog, or when you enter dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking
facilities.
LIGHT SENSOR
On Touring models
To change the ‘‘AUTO LIGHT
SENSITIVITY’’ setting, see page
111 .
Do not leave the light switch in
AUTO if you will not be driving the
vehicle for an extended period (a
week or more). You should also turn
off the lights if you plan to leave the
engine idling or off for a long time.
The automatic lighting feature is
controlled by a sensor located on top
of the dashboard. Do not cover this
sensor or spill liquids on it.
11/08/01 08:38:07 31SZA630_134
Headlights
Fog Lights
Except LX models
Turn the fog lights on and off by
turning the switch next to the
headlight switch.
When the headlights are on, the
daytime running lights are off.
On Touring models
If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display, there is a
problem with the daytime running
light system. Take your vehicle to a
dealer to have it checked.
When the multi-information display
shows a ‘‘DRL OFF’’ message, the
daytime running lights are off.
Follow the procedure in the left
column to turn them on.
127
Instruments and Controls
You can use the fog lights only when
the headlights are on low beam.
With the light switch in the AUTO
position, you can also use the fog
lights when the headlights turn on
automatically. They will go off when
the headlights turn off.
Daytime Running Lights
With the headlight switch off, the
daytime running lights come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position and release the
parking brake. They remain on until
you turn the ignition switch off, even
if you set the parking brake.
11/08/01 08:38:16 31SZA630_135
Headlights
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
This feature turns off the headlights,
all other exterior lights, and the
instrument panel lights within 15
seconds after you remove the key
and close the driver’s door.
On Touring models
To change the ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO
OFF TIMER’’ setting, see page 110 .
The automatic lighting off feature
activates if you leave the headlight
switch in the ‘‘
’’ or ‘‘
’’
position or if the lights are turned on
by setting the switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’
position, and you remove the key,
then open and close the driver’s door.
128
If you turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position with the
headlight switch on, but do not open
the door, the lights turn off after 10
minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is
in the ‘‘AUTO’’ position).
The lights turn on again when you
unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
go off. With the driver’s door open,
you will hear a lights-on reminder
chime.
11/08/01 08:38:27 31SZA630_136
Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger
Hazard Warning Button
Rear Window Defogger
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
If equipped
Pushing this button also turns the
mirror heaters on or off. For more
information, see page 173 .
Push the button to turn on the
hazard warning lights (four-way
flashers). This causes all four
outside turn signals and both turn
indicators in the instrument panel to
flash. Use the hazard warning lights
if you need to park in a dangerous
area near heavy traffic, or if your
vehicle is disabled.
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The indicator in
the button lights to show the
defogger is on. If you do not turn it
off, the defogger will shut itself off
after about 15 minutes. It also shuts
off when you turn off the ignition.
You have to turn it on again when
you restart the vehicle.
129
Instruments and Controls
The defogger wires on the inside of
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side-to-side.
11/08/01 08:38:34 31SZA630_137
Instrument Panel Brightness
You will hear a beep when maximum
or minimum brightness is reached.
You will also hear a beep when the
maximum level is canceled by
turning the knob a click to the left.
To reduce glare at night, the
instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to
or
. Turning the select/
reset knob to the right until you hear
a beep will cancel the reduced
brightness.
The select/reset knob on the
instrument panel controls the
brightness of the instrument panel
lights. Turn the knob to adjust the
brightness.
130
U.S. model is shown.
Except Touring models
The level of brightness is shown on
the information display while you
adjust it. It goes out about 5 seconds
after you finish adjusting.
11/08/01 08:38:39 31SZA630_138
Instrument Panel Brightness
Brightness can only be adjusted
when ambient light is low.
Instruments and Controls
On Touring models
The level of brightness is shown on
the multi-information display while
you adjust it. It goes out 5 seconds
after you finish adjusting.
When the brightness reaches the
maximum level, ‘‘BRIGHTNESS
MAXIMUM LEVEL’’ appears on the
display.
131
11/08/01 08:38:48 31SZA630_139
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
3. Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in position.
4. Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
1. Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down, and in or out, so it points
toward your chest, not toward
your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.
132
11/08/01 08:38:56 31SZA630_140
Keys and Locks
KEY
MASTER KEY VALET KEY
NUMBER WITH REMOTE (Light Gray)
TAG
TRANSMITTER
You should have received a key
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle. The valet key works
only in the ignition and the driver’s
door lock. You can keep the glove
box locked when you leave your
vehicle and the valet key at a parking
facility.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
The valet key does not contain a
battery. Do not try to take it apart.
133
Instruments and Controls
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
11/08/01 08:39:03 31SZA630_141
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
chain) is near the ignition switch
when you insert the key.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on
briefly, then go off. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position, remove the key,
reinsert it, and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position again.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
134
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle inoperable.
If you have lost your key and you
cannot start the engine, contact your
dealer.
11/08/01 08:39:08 31SZA630_142
Immobilizer System
Always take the ignition key with you
whenever you leave the vehicle alone.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
135
Instruments and Controls
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
11/08/01 08:39:19 31SZA630_143
Ignition Switch
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
ACCESSORY (I) − You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
LOCK (0) − You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key to the LOCK (0)
position, the shift lever must be in
Park, and you must push the key in
slightly.
136
ON (II) − This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
START (III) − Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page 94 ).
The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
11/08/01 08:39:30 31SZA630_144
Door Locks
Lock
Lock
Unlock
On Touring models
To change the ‘‘KEY AND REMOTE
UNLOCK MODE’’ setting, see page
117 .
Unlock
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
LOCK’’ setting, see page 114 .
To lock all doors, the tailgate, and
the glass hatch, push the top of the
master door lock switch on either
front door, pull the lock tab rearward
on the driver’s door, or use the key
on the outside lock on the driver’s
door.
Pushing the rear of either master
door lock switch will unlock all doors
and the tailgate. Pushing forward the
lock tab on the driver’s door unlocks
only that door.
The lock tab on each passenger’s
door locks and unlocks that door.
When you shift to P after driving, the
driver’s door unlocks.
All doors, the tailgate, and the glass
hatch, can be locked from the
outside by using the key in the
driver’s door lock. To unlock only
the driver’s door, insert the key, turn
the key, and release it. The
remaining doors and the tailgate
unlock when you turn the key a
second time within a few seconds.
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK’’ setting, see page 115 .
137
Instruments and Controls
When the vehicle speed reaches
about 10 mph (U.S.) and 15 km/h
(Canada) or more, all the doors lock
automatically.
11/08/01 08:39:45 31SZA630_145
Door Locks
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Auto Door Locking
Except Touring models
Except Touring models
Your vehicle has customizable
settings for the doors and tailgate to
automatically lock and unlock. There
are default settings for each of these
features. You can turn off or change
the settings for these features as
described on the following pages.
The auto door locking feature has
three possible settings:
When you customize the setting,
make sure your vehicle is parked
safely, the engine is off, and the
parking brake is applied. Make all
settings before you start driving.
On Touring models
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
LOCK’’ setting, see page 114 .
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK’’ setting, see page 115 .
138
To turn off the Auto Door Lock
modes:
The auto door locking is
deactivated all the time.
The doors and tailgate lock
whenever you move the shift lever
out of the Park (P) position.
The doors and tailgate lock when
the vehicle speed reaches 10 mph
(15 km/h).
This is the default setting.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.
11/08/01 08:39:56 31SZA630_146
Door Locks
3. Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door until you hear a click
(after about 5 seconds).
To program the Park Lock mode:
Locks all doors and tailgate when the
shift lever is moved out of the Park (P)
position.
4. Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
CONTINUED
139
Instruments and Controls
4. Release the switch, and within 20
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
3. Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
seconds).
11/08/01 08:40:12 31SZA630_147
Door Locks
To program the Drive Lock mode:
Locks all doors and tailgate when the
vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph
(15 km/h).
3. Push and hold the brake pedal,
and move the shift lever out of the
Park (P) position.
4. Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
seconds).
5. Release the switch, and within 20
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
Move the shift lever to the Park
(P) position.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
140
6. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
Auto Door Unlocking
Except Touring models
The auto door unlocking feature has
five possible settings:
The auto door unlocking is
deactivated all the time.
The driver’s door unlocks when
you move the shift lever to the
Park (P) position with the brake
pedal depressed.
This is the default setting.
All doors and tailgate unlock when
you move the shift lever to the
Park (P) position with the brake
pedal depressed.
The driver’s door unlocks
whenever you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
All doors and tailgate unlock
whenever you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
11/08/01 08:40:24 31SZA630_148
Door Locks
To turn off the Auto Door Unlock
modes:
3. Push and hold the rear of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click,
and after about 5 seconds, you will
hear another click.
To program the Park Unlock mode:
Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
and tailgate when the shift lever is
moved into the Park (P) position with
the brake pedal depressed.
Instruments and Controls
4. Release the switch, and within 20
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
CONTINUED
141
11/08/01 08:40:38 31SZA630_149
Door Locks
3. Push and hold the rear of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Continue to hold down the switch:
To program the Ignition Switch
Unlock mode:
Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
and tailgate when the ignition switch is
moved out of the ON (II) position.
Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate driver’s door unlock
3. Push and hold the brake pedal,
and move the shift lever out of P.
4. Push and hold the rear of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Continue to hold the switch:
Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate the driver’s door unlock
feature.
feature.
Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate all doors and tailgate
unlock feature.
Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate all doors and tailgate
unlock feature.
4. Release the switch, and within 20
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
5. Release the switch, and within 20
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
Move the shift lever to the Park
(P) position.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
142
11/08/01 08:40:49 31SZA630_150
Door Locks, Tailgate and Glass Hatch
Lockout Prevention
Childproof Door Locks
Tailgate
Lock
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position (lever is
down), the door cannot be opened
from the inside regardless of the
position of the lock tab. To open the
door, push the lock tab forward and
use the outside door handle.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
To open the tailgate, press and hold
the switch, then lift up. To close the
tailgate, use the inner handle to pull
it down, then press down on the back
edge.
CONTINUED
143
Instruments and Controls
With any door or the tailgate open
and the key in the ignition, both
master door lock switches are
disabled. They are not disabled if all
the doors and the tailgate are closed.
If you try to lock an open driver’s
door by pulling the lock tab rearward
the lock tab on the driver’s door pops
out.
11/08/01 08:40:57 31SZA630_151
Tailgate and Glass Hatch
Keep the tailgate closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
from getting into the interior. See
Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
60 .
Power Tailgate
On EX-L and Touring models
Press and hold the tailgate button on
the remote transmitter or the switch
for about 1 second to open or close
the tailgate. Each time you press the
button on the remote transmitter or
the switch, you will hear a beep, and
some front and rear lights will flash.
POWER TAILGATE SWITCH
The tailgate can be opened and
closed with the remote transmitter
(see page 151 ) or the switch in the
driver’s door pocket when both front
doors are unlocked.
144
If the glass hatch is opened, remote
transmitter operation is canceled
until it is closed.
If you push the same button or
switch again while the tailgate is
opening or closing, you will hear
three beeps, and the tailgate will stop
moving, reverse direction, and stop
at the fully opened or closed position.
11/08/01 08:41:07 31SZA630_152
Tailgate and Glass Hatch
Auto-Reverse
TAILGATE SWITCH
The tailgate can also be closed by
pressing the button on the tailgate. If
you press the button again while the
tailgate is closing, you will hear three
beeps, and the tailgate will stop
moving, reverse direction, and stop
at the fully opened position.
Closing a power tailgate while
anyone is in the path of the
tailgate can cause serious
injury.
Make sure everyone is clear
before closing the power
tailgate.
Also check that passengers,
especially children, do not have their
hands on the edge of the tailgate or
on the tailgate sill. The auto reverse
feature stops working when the
tailgate is about to latch so the motor
can pull the tailgate shut.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, goes dead, or the fuse
is removed while the tailgate is fully
open, the power tailgate needs to be
reset. After connecting the battery
or installing the fuse, close the
tailgate fully by hand.
The power tailgate may not open or
close under the these conditions:
The vehicle is parked on a steep
hill.
When the vehicle is swayed in a
strong wind.
CONTINUED
145
Instruments and Controls
The power tailgate has an autoreverse feature. If it meets
resistance while opening or closing,
it will beep three times and reverse
direction. However, the tailgate may
not reverse immediately. Always
make sure passengers and objects
are clear of the tailgate before
opening or closing it.
11/08/01 08:41:20 31SZA630_153
Tailgate and Glass Hatch
When the tailgate or the roof is
covered with snow or ice.
Do not install any accessories on the
tailgate. It may cause the tailgate to
malfunction. If there is snow or ice
on the tailgate, make sure to remove
it before you operate the tailgate.
If you push the tailgate release
button inside the handle while the
tailgate is opening or closing, it will
stop moving. You need to open or
close it the rest of the way manually.
The tailgate has sensors on both
sides. Be careful not to damage them.
If the sensors are damaged, the
power tailgate does not function
properly.
146
On Touring models
If you try to drive off with the
tailgate open, a beeper sounds and a
‘‘TAILGATE OPEN’’ message is
shown on the multi-information
display.
Keep the tailgate closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
from getting into the interior. See
Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
60 .
If there is a problem in the power
tailgate system, you will see a
‘‘CHECK POWER TAILGATE’’
message on the multi-information
display, or the power tailgate
indicator comes on. Have the system
checked by your dealer.
With this message shown on the
multi-information display, or the
power tailgate indicator comes on,
you can still open or close the
tailgate manually.
On EX-L models
To Customize the Power Tailgate
Setting
You can customize the power
tailgate setting not to open without
unlocking the tailgate lock first by
remote transmitter from the outside.
When you customize the setting,
make sure your vehicle is parked
safely, the parking brake is applied,
all doors and the tailgate are fully
closed and locked, and the key is
removed from the ignition switch.
There are two settings you can
choose from:
ANYTIME − The tailgate unlocks
and opens when you press and hold
the tailgate button on the remote
transmitter for 1 second. The
tailgate will automatically relock
when you close it when the doors are
locked.
11/08/01 08:41:33 31SZA630_154
Tailgate and Glass Hatch
WHEN UNLOCKED − In this mode,
you must unlock the tailgate before
opening it. In addition, the tailgate
will not automatically relock when
you close it.
2. Press and hold the power tailgate
switch until the PTG buzzer
sounds. (Switch should be held on
longer than 5 seconds).
Unlocking the Tailgate
1. Insert the key into the ignition and
turn to the ON (II) position.
4. Turn off the ignition and remove
the key.
To go back to the other setting,
repeat the above procedure.
When mode is set the ‘‘WHEN
UNLOCKED,’’ you will hear three
short beeps.
When mode is set the ‘‘ANYTIME,’’
you will hear a long beep when the
ignition is turned OFF (0).
If the power door lock system cannot
unlock the tailgate, unlock it
manually.
Place a cloth on the top side of the
cover to prevent scratches, then use
a small flat-tip screwdriver to remove
the cover on the back of the tailgate.
CONTINUED
147
Instruments and Controls
3. Release the switch.
You can switch between these two
modes as following:
11/08/01 08:41:43 31SZA630_155
Tailgate and Glass Hatch
Glass Hatch
On EX-L and Touring models
Except EX-L and Touring models
GLASS HATCH RELEASE BUTTON
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Push the release lever to the right as
shown.
If you need to unlock the tailgate
manually, it means there is a
problem with the tailgate. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
148
If you cannot open the tailgate,
remove the cover on the back of the
tailgate (see page 147 ). Make sure
the shift lever is in the Park (P)
position. Push the release lever to
the right as shown, then pull the
outer handle to open the tailgate.
To open the glass hatch, press the
glass hatch release button on the
tailgate.
To close the glass hatch, lower it and
press on the handle until it latches.
11/08/01 08:41:49 31SZA630_156
Tailgate and Glass Hatch
Except EX-L and Touring models
Keep the tailgate and the glass hatch
closed at all times while driving to
avoid damaging the tailgate and the
glass hatch, and to prevent exhaust
gas from getting into the interior.
See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
page 60 .
GLASS HATCH RELEASE BUTTON
You can also open the glass hatch by
pressing the glass hatch release
button on the driver’s door or on the
remote transmitter.
149
Instruments and Controls
The rear wiper will not operate with
the glass hatch open. If you open the
glass hatch while the rear wiper is
operating, the wiper will return to its
parked position (see page 124 ). The
wiper will resume operation after the
glass hatch is closed.
11/08/01 08:41:58 31SZA630_157
Remote Transmitter
Except EX-L and Touring models
UNLOCK
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON
UNLOCK
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON
GLASS
HATCH
RELEASE
BUTTON
TAILGATE
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
LOCK − Press this button once to
lock all doors and the tailgate. Some
exterior lights will flash. When you
push LOCK twice within 5 seconds,
you will hear a beep to verify that the
doors and tailgate are locked and the
security system has set. This button
does not work if any door or tailgate
is not fully closed.
150
On EX-L and Touring models
UNLOCK − Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the other doors.
Some exterior lights will flash twice
when you push the button. If you do
not open any door or the tailgate
within 30 seconds, they will
automatically relock.
On Touring models
To change the ‘‘KEY AND REMOTE
UNLOCK MODE’’ setting, see page
117 .
On Touring models
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT’’ setting,
see page 118 .
To change the ‘‘SECURITY
RELOCK TIMER’’ setting, see page
119 .
11/08/01 08:42:09 31SZA630_158
Remote Transmitter
Except EX-L and Touring models
GLASS HATCH RELEASE −
Press this button for about 1 second
to open the glass hatch. Even if the
glass hatch is open, the tailgate can
be locked with the remote
transmitter.
On EX-L and Touring models
TAILGATE − Press and hold the
TAILGATE button to open or close
the power tailgate. When the tailgate
begins to move, you will hear a beep,
and some front and rear lights will
flash.
If you push the same button again
while the tailgate is opening or
closing, three beeps sound, the
tailgate stops moving, reverses
direction and stops in the fully
opened or fully closed position.
PANIC − Press and hold this
button for about 1 second to attract
attention; the horn will sound, and
the exterior lights will flash for about
30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,
press any other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. Panic
mode does not work when the key is
in the ignition switch.
Remote Transmitter Care
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperatures.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
151
Instruments and Controls
When you press the UNLOCK
button, the front and rear individual
map lights and the cargo area light,
depending on their switch positions,
will come on (see page 176 ). If you
do not open any door or the tailgate,
the lights stay on for about 30
seconds, then go out. If you relock
the doors and the tailgate with the
remote transmitter before 30
seconds have elapsed, the lights will
go off immediately.
11/08/01 08:42:19 31SZA630_159
Remote Transmitter
Replacing the Transmitter
Battery
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors
and the tailgate, replace the battery
as soon as possible.
BATTERY
Battery type: CR1616
SCREW
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
NOTE: Be careful when removing
this screw as the head of the
screw can strip out.
2. Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
152
3. Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
11/08/01 08:42:30 31SZA630_160
Remote Transmitter
4. Remove the old battery, and insert
a new battery into the back of the
cover with the + side facing down.
Recalling a Memorized Driving
Position
On Touring models
Instruments and Controls
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations
for battery disposal.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
5. Install the parts in reverse order.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
When you unlock the door with your
remote, each remote activates the
keyless memory settings related to
that remote. The driver’s ID (Driver
1 or Driver 2) is shown on the back
of each remote.
CONTINUED
153
11/08/01 08:42:41 31SZA630_161
Remote Transmitter, Seats
Here are the settings activated with
the remote:
Customized settings
(see page 95 ).
Driving position memory
(see page 174 ).
When you unlock and open the
driver’s door with the remote
transmitter, the driver’s seat (except
the power lumbar feature) and
outside mirrors start to move to the
positions stored in memory. The
indicator in the related memory
button to the remote comes on.
Front Seat Power Adjustments
Except LX models
See pages 15 − 16 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seatbacks.
The controls for the power
adjustable front seats are on the
outside edge of each seat bottom.
You can adjust the seats with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.
On EX-L and Touring models
The passenger seat has the same
adjustments as the driver’s seat but
without any height and lumbar
adjustments.
Except EX-L and Touring models
The front passenger’s seat adjusts
manually.
154
11/08/01 08:42:56 31SZA630_162
Seats
Front Seat Manual Adjustments
Adjusts the seat-back
angle forward or
backward.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
Except EX-L and Touring models
See pages 15 − 16 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seatbacks.
Increases or decreases
the lumbar support.
(Driver’s seat only)
Moves the front of the
seat up or down.
Raises or lowers the seat.
CONTINUED
155
Instruments and Controls
Moves the seat forward
and backward.
Moves the whole seat up
and forward, or down
and backward. The front
of the seat also tilts up or
down at the same time.
11/08/01 08:43:05 31SZA630_163
Seats
Driver’s Seat Manual Height
Adjustment
On LX models
To adjust the seat forward or
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
release the bar. Try to move the seat
to make sure it is locked in position.
156
To change the seat-back angle, pull
up on the lever on the outside of the
seat bottom.
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. To raise the seat,
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower
the seat, push the lever down
repeatedly.
11/08/01 08:43:15 31SZA630_164
Seats
Head Restraints
Front
See page 16 for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.
CUSHION
SEATBACK
LEGS
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the center of the back
of the occupant’s head rests against
the center of the restraint.
RELEASE BUTTON
Adjusting the Head Restraint
The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust the
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
CONTINUED
157
Instruments and Controls
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from the likelihood of
whiplash and other injuries.
11/08/01 08:43:23 31SZA630_165
Seats
Third Row Center Seat
Third Row Center Seat
Second center and third row
CUSHION
LONG
SHORT
LEGS
To lower the restraint, push short
side of the cap and pry up on long
side of the cap. Push the release
buttons sideways, and push the
restraint down.
158
RELEASE BUTTON
Removing the Head Restraint
To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button,
then pull the restraint out of the seatback.
Push short side of the cap and pry up
on long side of the cap. Push the
release buttons, then pull the
restraint out of the seat-back.
11/08/01 08:43:34 31SZA630_166
Seats
Active Head Restraints
After a collision, the activated
restraint should return to its normal
position.
Always replace the head
restraints before driving.
When reinstalling a head restraint,
put the legs back in place. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height
while pressing the release button.
Third Row Center Seat
When reinstalling a head restraint,
install the cap with the long side
toward the release button. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height
while pressing the release buttons.
The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats have active head restraints. If
the vehicle is struck severely from
the rear, the occupant properly
secured with the seat belt will be
pushed against the seat-back and the
head restraint will automatically
move forward.
If the restraints do not return to their
normal position, or in the event of a
severe collision, have the vehicle
inspected by a Honda dealer.
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it.
CONTINUED
159
Instruments and Controls
Failure to reinstall, or correctly
reinstall, the head restraints can
result in severe injury during a
crash.
This reduces the distance between
the restraint and the occupant’s head.
It also helps protect the occupants
against the likelihood of whiplash
and injuries to the neck and upper
spine.
11/08/01 08:43:45 31SZA630_167
Seats
For a head restraint system to work
properly:
Adjusting the Second Row Seats
Do not hang any items on the head
restraints, or from the restraint
legs.
Do not place any object between
an occupant and the seat-back.
Install each restraint in its proper
location.
HANDLE
Only use genuine Honda
replacement head restraints.
160
To adjust the second row seats
forward and backward, pull up on the
bar under the front edge of the seat
cushion. Move the seat to the
desired position and release the bar.
Try to move the seat to make sure it
is locked in position.
To change the seat-back angle of the
seats in the second row, pull up on
the handle on the outside of the seatback, and push the seat-back.
11/08/01 08:43:57 31SZA630_168
Seats
Folding the Second Row Seats
The left and right halves can be
folded separately.
Third Row Access
Make sure that the folded seat-back
does not press against the front
passenger’s seat, as this could cause
the weight sensors to work
improperly.
RELEASE LEVER
2. Lower the head restraints to their
lowest positions.
3. Pull up the handle on the outside
of the seat-back.
To get into the third row seats, pull
up the lever on the side of the
passenger’s side second row seatback. The seat-back will tilt forward,
and then can be slid forward.
4. Fold the seat-back forward.
After you return the seat-back to the
upright position, push the whole seat
backwards until it latches. Make
sure the seat is fully latched before
sitting in it.
161
Instruments and Controls
1. To unlatch the detachable anchor
before folding the seat-back, insert
the latch plate into the slot on the
side of the anchor buckle (see
page 163 ) and allow the seat belt
to retract. Store the detachable
anchor and seat belt latch plates in
the retractor housing.
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat to the upright position. Make
sure the seat is locked securely
before driving.
11/08/01 08:44:07 31SZA630_169
Seats
Folding the Third Row Seat
1. Use the latch plate to release the
seat belt from the detachable
anchor (see page 163 ).
HANDLE
2. Lower the head restraints to their
lowest positions.
NOTE: To fold the third row seat,
the second row seat-back must be
folded down or in the full up right
position.
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo
on page 506 ).
Third seat
3. Unlock the seat-back by pulling
the handle. Push the seat-back
forward.
Make sure the outer shoulder belts
are positioned in each holding slot on
the side panel whenever the third
seat is folded.
162
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat to the upright position. Make
sure the seat is locked securely
before driving. Reconnect the seat
belts to the detachable anchors.
11/08/01 08:44:15 31SZA630_170
Seats
Detachable Anchor
When the seats are returned to the
upright position, these detachable
anchors should be latched back
properly.
LATCH PLATE
The seat belts in the second row
center seat and the third row seats
are equipped with detachable
anchors.
Before using the seat belt,
make sure the detachable
anchor is correctly latched.
To unlatch the detachable anchor,
insert the latch plate into the slot on
the side of the anchor buckle. Store
the detachable anchor and seat belt
latch plates in the retractor housing.
CONTINUED
163
Instruments and Controls
Using the seat belt with the
detachable anchor unlatched
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash.
If any children are riding in the rear
seats, be sure that any unused seat
belts are either buckled, the lockable
retractor activated, and the belt fully
retracted, or in the case of any
unused detachable center belts,
stored in the roof slots so they are
out of reach. See page 24 for
additional information.
11/08/01 08:44:24 31SZA630_171
Seats
SMALL LATCH PLATE
Second row and third row center seats
LATCH PLATE
TRIANGLE
MARKS
SMALL LATCH PLATE
Pull out the small latch plate and the
latch plate from each holding slot in
the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt
to extend it.
164
ANCHOR BUCKLE
Pull out the outer shoulder belts
from the holding slots. Both of the
third-row holding slots should only
be used when the seat belt is
detached.
Line up the triangle marks on the
small latch plate and anchor buckle
when reattaching the belt and buckle.
Tug on the seat belt to verify that
the detachable anchor is securely
latched. Make sure the seat belt is
not twisted.
11/08/01 08:44:35 31SZA630_172
Seat Heaters
Passenger’s
seat
HEATERS
Driver’s
seat
If equipped
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. Because of the sensors
for the side airbag cutoff system,
there is no heater in the passenger’s
seat-back. The ignition switch must
be in the ON (II) position to use the
heaters.
Front seat
LOW
To use the heaters, press the seat
heater switch. The indicator (amber)
in the switch will come on. There are
three settings in the heaters: HI, LO,
and OFF.
When you press the seat heater
switch once, the heater is set to HI.
Select LO by pressing the seat
heater switch again. To shut down
the heater, press the seats heater
switch until the indicators go off.
Second row seat
On Canadian Touring models
The outer second row seat cushions
and seat-backs are equipped with
seat heaters. Turning the switch on
the driver side warms the outer seat
behind the driver’s seat only. The
passenger side switch warms the
outer seat behind the front
passenger seat.
CONTINUED
165
Instruments and Controls
HI
11/08/01 08:44:42 31SZA630_173
Seat Heaters
Push the right side of the switch, HI,
to rapidly heat up the seat. After the
seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the left side of the switch. This will
keep the seat warm.
Follow these precautions when using
the seat heaters:
Do not use the seat heater in the
HI setting for an extended period,
because it draws large amounts of
current from the battery.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
The heater runs continuously and
does not automatically turn off
after a period of time.
166
Heat induced burns are
possible when using seat
heaters.
Persons with a diminished
ability to sense temperature
(e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or
paralysis) or with sensitive skin
should not use seat heaters.
11/08/01 08:44:52 31SZA630_174
Power Windows
DRIVER’S WINDOW
SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
The windows will operate for up to
10 minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either front
door cancels this function.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open a window, push the
switch down and hold it. Release the
switch when you want the window to
stop. Pull back on the switch and
hold it to close the window.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
AUTO − To open either front
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down to the second
detent, then release it. The window
automatically goes down all the way.
To stop the window from going all
the way down, pull back on the
window switch briefly.
When you push the MAIN switch in,
the switch is off, and the passengers’
windows cannot be raised or lowered.
To cancel this feature, push on the
switch again to get it to pop out.
Keep the MAIN switch pushed in
when you have children in the
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally.
CONTINUED
167
Instruments and Controls
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
To close either front window fully,
pull back the window switch firmly
to the second detent, then release it.
The window automatically goes all
the way up. To stop the window from
going all the way up, push down on
the window switch briefly.
11/08/01 08:45:05 31SZA630_175
Power Windows
AUTO REVERSE − If either front
window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
driver’s window fuse is removed, the
AUTO function may be disabled. If
the AUTO function is disabled, the
power window system will need to be
reset after reconnecting the battery
or installing the fuse.
Opening the Windows and
Moonroof with the Remote
Transmitter
You can open all of the windows and
the moonroof (if equipped) from the
outside with the remote transmitter.
1. Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the driver’s door.
1. Start the engine. Push down and
hold the driver’s window switch
until the window is fully open.
2. Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. All the
doors unlock, and all four windows
and moonroof start to open. To
stop the windows and moonroof,
release the button.
2. Pull and hold the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for about 2 seconds.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
168
3. To open the windows and
moonroof further, press the
button again (within 10 seconds of
step 1) and hold it. If the windows
and the moonroof stop before the
desired position, repeat steps 1
and 2.
You cannot close the windows or the
moonroof with the remote
transmitter.
11/08/01 08:45:19 31SZA630_176
Power Windows
Opening/Closing the Windows
and Moonroof with the Key
3. Turn the key clockwise again, and
hold it. All four windows and the
moonroof start to open. To stop
the windows and the moonroof,
release the key.
To close:
1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
You can open and close the windows
and the moonroof (if equipped) with
the key in the driver’s door lock.
To open:
1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
2. Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.
Auto reverse does not work when
closing the windows and moonroof
with the key.
NOTE: If the windows and the
moonroof stop before the desired
position, repeat steps 2 and 3.
2. Turn the key counterclockwise,
then release it.
3. Turn the key counterclockwise
again, and hold it. All four
windows and the moonroof start to
close. To stop the windows and
the moonroof, release the key.
169
Instruments and Controls
4. To open the windows and the
moonroof further, turn and hold
the key again (within 10 seconds
of step 2).
4. To close the windows and the
moonroof further, turn and hold
the key again (within 10 seconds
of step 2).
11/08/01 08:45:29 31SZA630_177
Moonroof
To tilt up the moonroof, push on the
center of the moonroof switch. To
stop the moonroof from tilting up
fully, push the switch briefly.
To close the moonroof fully, firmly
push the moonroof switch forward,
then release it. The moonroof
automatically closes all the way. To
stop the moonroof from closing,
push the switch briefly.
MOONROOF SWITCH
On EX-L and Touring models
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position before operating the
moonroof switch on the ceiling
console.
To open the moonroof fully, pull
back the moonroof switch firmly.
The moonroof opens all the way. To
stop the moonroof from opening
fully, push the switch briefly.
170
To open or close the moonroof
partially, pull back or push forward
the moonroof switch lightly and hold
it. The moonroof will stop when you
release the switch.
AUTO REVERSE − If the
moonroof runs into any obstacle
while it is closing automatically, it
will reverse direction and then stop.
To close the moonroof, remove the
obstacle, then use the moonroof
switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed. You
should always check that all
passengers and objects are away
from the moonroof before closing it.
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
11/08/01 08:45:39 31SZA630_178
Moonroof, Parking Brake
You can open and close the
moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
you turn off the ignition switch.
Opening either front door cancels
this function.
Operating the Moonroof with the
Remote Transmitter or the Key
You can use the remote transmitter
or the key to operate the moonroof
from the outside. Refer to page
168 for details.
RELEASE HANDLE
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and hubs. A beeper will sound if
the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
On Touring models
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
You will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
93 ).
To apply the parking brake, push the
pedal down with your foot. To
release it, pull the release handle
fully. The parking brake indicator on
the instrument panel should go out
when the parking brake is fully
released (see page 69 ).
171
Instruments and Controls
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or its
motor.
Parking Brake
11/08/01 08:45:49 31SZA630_179
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
SELECTOR SWITCH
INDICATOR
SENSOR
AUTO BUTTON
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
On LX and EX models
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
172
On EX-L and Touring models
The inside mirror can automatically
darken to reduce glare. To turn on
this feature, press the button on the
bottom of the mirror. The AUTO
indicator comes on as a reminder.
When it is on, the mirror darkens
when it senses the headlights of a
vehicle behind you, then returns to
normal visibility when the lights are
gone. Press the button again to turn
off this feature.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
11/08/01 08:46:01 31SZA630_180
Mirrors
3. Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirror right, left, up, or down.
Heated Mirrors
On Touring models
Both outside door mirrors have a
reverse tilt feature. When in reverse,
the selected mirror will tilt down
slightly to improve your view as you
parallel park. Shifting out of reverse
will return the mirror to its original
position.
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
Instruments and Controls
4. When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
Reverse Tilt Door Mirror
To tilt the driver’s mirror, place
the selector switch in the left
position.
To tilt the passenger’s mirror,
place the switch in the right
position.
To turn the feature off, place the
switch in the center position.
Outside mirror positions can be
stored in the driving position
memory system (see page 174 ).
If equipped
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off. Pressing this button also
turns the rear window defogger on
and off.
173
11/08/01 08:46:11 31SZA630_181
Driving Position Memory System
Your vehicle has a memory feature
for the driver’s seat and outside
mirror positions.
Storing a Driving Position in
Memory
Store a driving position only when
the vehicle is parked.
Two seat and outside mirror
positions can be stored in separate
memories. You select a memorized
position by pushing the appropriate
button or using the appropriate
remote transmitter (Driver 1 or
Driver 2).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. You cannot add a
new driving position to the
memory unless the ignition switch
is in the ON (II) position. You can
recall a memorized position with
the ignition switch in any position.
You can change the ‘‘MEMORY
POSITION LINK’’ setting on the
multi-information display (see page
107 ).
2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable
position (see page 154 ).
On Touring models
174
3. Adjust the outside mirrors for best
visibility (see page 172 ).
MEMORY BUTTONS
SET BUTTON
4. Press and release the SET button
on the control panel. You will hear
a beep. Immediately press and
hold one of the memory buttons (1
or 2) until you hear two beeps.
The indicator in the memory
button will come on. The current
positions of the driver’s seat and
outside mirrors are now stored.
11/08/01 08:46:29 31SZA630_182
Driving Position Memory System
Selecting a Memorized Position
To select a memorized position, do
this:
Fail to press a memory button
within 5 seconds.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Pressing the SET button again
within 5 seconds.
2. Press the desired memory button
(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, then
release the button.
To stop the system’s automatic
adjustment, do any of these actions:
Press any button on the control
panel: SET, 1, or 2.
Push any of the adjustment
switches for the seat.
Shift out of Park.
Readjust the seat position.
Readjusting the outside mirror
position.
Each memory button stores only one
driving position. Storing a new
position erases the previous setting
stored in that button’s memory. If
you want to add a new position while
retaining the current one, use the
other memory button.
All stored driving positions will be
lost if your vehicle’s battery goes
dead or is disconnected.
The system will move the seat and
outside mirrors to the memorized
positions. The indicator in the
selected memory button will flash
during movement. When the
adjustments are complete, you will
hear two beeps, and the indicator will
remain on.
Adjust the outside mirrors.
If desired, you can use the
adjustment switches to change the
positions of the seat or outside
mirrors after they are in their
memorized positions. If you change
the memorized position, the
indicator in the memory button will
go out. To keep this driving position
for later use, you must store it in the
driving position memory.
175
Instruments and Controls
To cancel the storing procedure
after pressing the SET button, do
any of the following:
11/08/01 08:46:40 31SZA630_183
Interior Lights
Light Control Switch
When the switch is in the OFF position:
DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION
ON
OFF
The individual door lights will
operate when a door is opened.
The individual map lights in the
front can be turned on and off by
pressing the lenses.
The individual map lights in the
second and third rows cannot be
turned on.
The light control switch has three
positions: OFF, Door Activated, and
ON.
176
When the switch is in the door activated
position:
The individual map lights come on
when any door or the tailgate is
opened, or when the remote
transmitter is used to unlock the
doors. When the doors and the
tailgate are closed, each light can
be turned on and off by pushing
the lens.
The cargo area light comes on
when the tailgate is opened if the
light control switch is in the door
activated (center) position. When
the tailgate is closed, the cargo
area light can be turned on with
the switch in the light.
11/08/01 08:46:51 31SZA630_184
Interior Lights
After all doors are closed tightly, the
lights dim slightly, then fade out in
about 30 seconds.
ON position:
On Touring models
All the individual map lights come on
and stay on as long as the switch
remains in the ON position.
Individual Map Lights
Front
With any door or the tailgate left
open, the lights stay on about 15
minutes, then go out.
The lights also come on when the
key is removed from the ignition
switch.
Turn on the front row individual map
lights by pushing the lens. Push the
lens again to turn it off. With the
light control switch in the door
activated position, the second row
and third row map lights can be
turned on by pushing the lens. Push
the lens again to turn it off.
CONTINUED
177
Instruments and Controls
To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page
109 .
When the light control switch is in the
11/08/01 08:47:00 31SZA630_185
Interior Lights
Cargo Area Light
ON
OFF
Individual Interior Lights
The courtesy lights in all four doors
come on when you open any door.
The light around the ignition switch
only comes on when you open the
driver’s door. After you close the
door, the ignition switch light stays
on for several seconds.
On Touring models
To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page
109 .
COURTESY LIGHT
The courtesy light between the front
map lights comes on when you turn
the parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, turn the instrument
panel brightness control dial on the
dashboard (see page 130 ).
178
The cargo area light has a threeposition switch. In the OFF position,
the light does not come on. In the
center position, the light comes on
when you open the tailgate or the
glass hatch. In the ON position, the
light stays on continuously.
11/08/01 08:47:05 31SZA630_186
Interior Convenience Items
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
CONVERSATION MIRROR*
INTEGRATED SUNSHADE*
VANITY MIRROR
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
COAT HOOK
GROCERY HOOK
SUN VISOR
Instruments and Controls
GLOVE BOX
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
ARMREST/BEVERAGE HOLDER
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
* : If equipped
179
11/08/01 08:47:15 31SZA630_187
Interior Convenience Items
Center Console
Console Compartments
LEVER
CONSOLE FRONT COMPARTMENT
Your vehicle has a multi-function
center console. It includes beverage
holders, storage compartments, an
armrest, and a storage tray.
180
To open the front of the console
compartment, squeeze the knob, and
push it forward. To close, squeeze
the knob and slide the cover
backward.
CONSOLE REAR COMPARTMENT
To open the rear of the console
compartment, pull up on the lever
and lift the armrest.
To close, lower the armrest, and
push it down until it latches.
11/08/01 08:47:21 31SZA630_188
Interior Convenience Items
Beverage Holders
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage
holders when you open or close the
doors. Use only resealable
containers in the door pockets.
Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
Instruments and Controls
There is a removable partition in the
main compartment area. The
partition can be used to divide the
forward compartment from the
beverage holder area, or can be
stored to the rear of the beverage
area to create a deeper storage tray.
CONTINUED
181
11/08/01 08:47:29 31SZA630_189
Interior Convenience Items
Storage Compartment
BEVERAGE HOLDER
To open the beverage holder,
squeeze the knob, and slide the
cover forward.
182
The center seat-back in the second
row is equipped with an armrest that
provides the beverage holder. Pivot
down the seat-back to use them.
To open the compartment, pull the
lever and lift the lid. To close, lower
the lid and push it down until it
latches.
11/08/01 08:47:40 31SZA630_190
Interior Convenience Items
Glove Box
Open the glove box by pulling up on
the handle. Close it with a firm push.
Lock or unlock the glove box with
the master key.
Integrated Sunshades
Sunglasses Holder
On Touring models
HOOK
Push
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
TAB
Each rear door has an integrated
sunshade. To use a sunshade, hold
the tab on the top, and pull the
sunshade all the way up. Insert the
holes on the sunshade into the hooks
on the window frame.
To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the front edge. Make sure the
holder is closed while you are driving.
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
CONTINUED
183
Instruments and Controls
The glove box light comes on when
the parking lights are on.
11/08/01 08:47:51 31SZA630_191
Interior Convenience Items
Conversation Mirror
Sun Visor
Slide
SUN VISOR
You may also store small items in
this holder. Make sure they are
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.
184
On EX-L and Touring models
The sunglasses holder uses a convex
mirror for its bottom panel. You can
see all the vehicle passengers in this
mirror. To use the mirror, open the
sunglasses holder fully, push it to the
first detent, and release it.
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
When using the sun visor for the
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing it out.
In this position, the sun visor can be
adjusted by moving it on its slider.
Do not use the extended sun visor
over the inside mirror.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
11/08/01 08:47:59 31SZA630_192
Interior Convenience Items
Coat Hooks
To use the vanity mirror on the back
of the sun visor, pull up the cover.
These hooks are not designed for
large or heavy items.
Instruments and Controls
Vanity Mirror
185
11/08/01 08:48:07 31SZA630_193
Interior Convenience Items
Each socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
Accessory Power Sockets
When more than one socket is being
used, the combined power rating of
the accessories should be 120 watts
or less (10 amps).
Your vehicle has four accessory
power sockets. These are located on
the instrument panel, in the console
compartment, back of the center
console box, or behind the third row
seat on the passenger’s side.
186
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
11/08/01 08:48:17 31SZA630_194
Interior Convenience Items
AC Power Outlet
Always run the engine when you use
the AC power outlet.
Rear
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
Make sure to put the socket cover
back in place to prevent any small
foreign objects from getting into the
socket.
On vehicles with rear entertainment
system
There is a 115 volt AC power outlet
inside the front console
compartment. To use the AC power
outlet, open the lids and open the
outlet cover. Insert the plug into the
receptacle slightly, turn it 90°
clockwise, then push in the plug all
the way.
CONTINUED
187
Instruments and Controls
The maximum capacity for this
power outlet is 115 volt AC at 150
watts or less. If you use an appliance
which requires more than 150 watts,
it automatically stops supplying the
power. If this happens, turn the
ignition switch off and turn it on
again.
11/08/01 08:48:25 31SZA630_195
Interior Convenience Items
NOTE: The AC power outlet is not
designed for electric appliances
which require high initial peak
wattage such as cathode-ray tube
type televisions, refrigerators,
electric pumps, etc. It is also not
suitable for devices that process
precise data such as medical
equipment or measuring instruments.
Any appliances that require an
extremely stable power supply such
as microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.,
should not be connected to this
outlet.
Cargo Floor Storage
Compartment
Additional storage space for large
items can be accessed by strapping
the cargo floor to the seat back.
Cargo Net
On Touring models
The cargo net will separate the
storage area into two storage areas.
On the upper area, you can store
small and light items. You should
place heavy items in the lower
storage area. You can store the
cargo net under the cargo floor to
make a larger cargo area.
Make sure to use the cargo net
securely hooked.
188
11/08/01 08:48:34 31SZA630_196
Interior Convenience Items
Do not use this cargo net if the
third row seats are folded down.
When any of the third row seats are
folded down, do not place any
objects on the cargo net. Make sure
to store the cargo net under the
cargo area floor. It could be
unlatched during a crash.
Instruments and Controls
Objects placed on the cargo net
could be thrown forward during
a crash or sudden stop and hurt
someone.
The maximum load on the cargo net
is 22 lbs on U.S. models, and 10 kg
on Canadian models. This is shown
on a label back of the cargo area
floor (see page 189 ). To prevent
damage to the cargo net, do not
exceed the maximum load.
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo
on page 506 ).
To prevent damage, do not place
more than 22 lbs (10 kg) on this
cargo net.
189
11/08/01 08:48:36 31SZA630_197
190
11/08/01 08:48:45 31SZA630_198
Features
On vehicles with navigation system
The climate control system and the
audio system have a voice control
feature. Refer to the navigation
system manual for more information.
Playing a Disc ................................. 219
Disc Player Error Messages ........ 226
EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models
without navigation system
Audio System ................................. 227
Playing the FM/AM Radio ........... 228
Playing the XM Radio ................. 237
Playing a Disc ................................. 243
Disc Player Error Messages ........ 253
Playing CD Library Audio ............ 254
Playing an iPod ............................. 265
iPod Error Messages .................. 273
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device .. 274
USB Flash Memory Device Error
Messages .................................... 281
Bluetooth Audio System .............. 282
Wallpaper Setup ............................. 288
Display Setup.................................. 291
Setting the Clock ........................... 294
Setting the Language .................... 297
Models with navigation system
Vents, Heating, and A/C .............. 192
Climate Control System ................ 199
Audio System ................................. 209
U.S. LX model
Playing the FM/AM Radio ........... 212
Audio System ................................. 298
Playing the FM/AM Radio ........... 299
Playing the XM Radio ................. 312
Playing a Disc ................................. 319
Disc Player Error Messages ........ 331
Protecting Your Discs ................... 332
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD)
Audio ........................................... 335
Playing an iPod ............................. 363
iPod Error Messages .................. 371
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device .. 372
USB Flash Memory Device Error
Messages .................................... 383
Bluetooth Audio System .............. 384
FM/AM Radio Reception ............. 389
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 391
Remote Audio Controls................. 392
Radio Theft Protection.................. 394
Rear Entertainment System ......... 396
Security System ............................. 429
Cruise Control ................................ 430
Compass.......................................... 433
HomeLink Universal Transceiver...... 437
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
(Models without navigation
system) ................................... 441
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
(Models with navigation
system) ................................... 462
Parking Sensor System ................. 484
Reaview Camera and Monitor ..... 491
191
Features
The heating and air conditioning
system in your vehicle provides a
comfortable driving environment in
all weather conditions.
The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The security system helps to
discourage vandalism and theft of
your vehicle.
11/08/01 08:48:51 31SZA630_199
Vents, Heating, and A/C
U.S. LX models
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
MAX A/C BUTTON
FAN CONTROL BUTTONS
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) BUTTON
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
MODE CONTROL BUTTONS
ON/OFF BUTTON
REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
FAN CONTROL/
OFF BUTTON
MODE CONTROL BUTTONS
192
11/08/01 08:49:04 31SZA630_200
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Fan Control
Press the
▲ button to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Press the
▼ button to decrease it.
Recirculation Button
When the indicator in the button is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
The system should be left in fresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
193
Features
Temperature Control
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. You will see
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
11/08/01 08:49:21 31SZA630_201
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Rear Window Defogger
Button
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page 129 ).
Air flows from the floor
vents. When you select
, the
system automatically switches to
fresh air mode.
Mode Control
Use the mode control buttons to
select the vents air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard
corner vents in all modes.
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and defroster vents at
the base of the windshield.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
194
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
The system automatically
turns on the A/C and switches to
Recirculation mode. Air flows from
the center and side vents in the
dashboard.
When you switch to
from
, the A/C stays on, and you
can turn it on and off manually.
11/08/01 08:49:37 31SZA630_202
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Ventilation
The ventilation system draws in
outside air, circulates it through the
interior, then exhausts it through
vents near the rear side panels.
and fresh air mode.
1. Select
2. Set the fan to the desired speed.
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
Using the A/C
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
80 ). If it moves near the red mark,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reads normally.
1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. You will see A/C ON in
the display.
2. Make sure the temperature is set
to the lower limit.
.
3. Select
4. If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
5. Set the fan to the desired speed.
CONTINUED
195
Features
1. Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
2. Make sure the A/C is off.
and fresh air mode.
3. Select
4. Set the fan to the desired speed.
Using the Heater
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.
11/08/01 08:49:52 31SZA630_203
Vents, Heating, and A/C
If the interior is very warm, you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
air conditioning, and setting the fan
to maximum speed in fresh air mode.
To Defog and Defrost
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
1. Switch the fan on.
2. Turn on the air conditioning.
and fresh air mode.
3. Select
4. Adjust the temperature to your
preference.
1. Set the fan to the desired speed, or
high for faster defrosting.
. The system
2. Select
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. The
A/C indicator will not come on if it
was off to start with.
3. Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
to help clear the
4. Select
rear window.
5. To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
When you switch to another mode
from
, the A/C turns off. But
if it was on to start with, it stays on.
Dehumidify the Interior
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry.
196
To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
. The system
1. Select
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
The A/C indicator does not come
on if it was off to start with.
.
2. Select
3. Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel next to each vent.
This sends more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select fresh air
mode to avoid fogging the windows.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
11/08/01 08:50:04 31SZA630_204
Vents, Heating, and A/C
To Turn Everything Off
To turn the system completely off,
press the ON/OFF button.
Rear Control Panel
Keep the system completely off
for short periods only.
Using the Rear A/C Unit
The rear passengers can adjust the
fan speed, temperature, and airflow
of the rear A/C unit with the rear
control panel.
REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
BUTTONS
Features
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
FAN CONTROL/
OFF BUTTON
MODE CONTROL BUTTONS
Temperature Control
Press the ▲ temperature control
button to increase the temperature
of airflow, and the ▼ button to
decrease it. The temperature you
adjust is shown in the system display.
CONTINUED
197
11/08/01 08:50:14 31SZA630_205
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Fan Control
Mode Control
Press the
▲ fan control button
to increase the fan speed and airflow.
▼ button to
Press the
decrease it. The level of the fan
speed is shown in the display.
When
is selected, air flows
from the upper vents on the back of
the center console.
198
When
is selected, air flows
from the lower vents.
To shut off the rear A/C unit, press
the OFF button until the system
shuts off.
To turn on the rear A/C unit,
increase the fan speed and airflow.
11/08/01 08:50:20 31SZA630_206
Climate Control System
Except U.S. LX models
FRONT CONTROL PANEL
FAN CONTROL BUTTONS
MODE BUTTON
ON/OFF BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER BUTTON
FRONT PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
SYNC BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE CONTROL BUTTON
REAR LOCK BUTTON
Features
AUTO BUTTON
REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE CONTROL BUTTON
REAR CONTROL PANEL
REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
AUTO BUTTON
REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
FAN CONTROL/
OFF BUTTON
MODE BUTTON
199
11/08/01 08:50:31 31SZA630_207
Climate Control System
Voice Control System
On vehicles with navigation system
The climate control system for your
vehicle can also be operated using
the voice control system. See the
navigation system manual for
complete details.
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control
system in your vehicle maintains the
interior temperature you select. The
system also adjusts the fan speed
and airflow levels.
1. Press the Auto button on the front
control panel.
2. Set the desired temperature with
the temperature control dial. You
will see AUTO in the system’s
display.
3. You can set the driver’s side
temperature, the passenger’s side
temperature, and the temperature
of the rear passenger
compartment separately.
200
The system automatically selects
the proper mix of conditioned
and/or heated air that will, as
quickly as possible, raise or lower
the interior temperature to your
preference.
Temperature Control
The driver’s side temperature, the
passenger’s side temperature and
the rear passenger compartment
temperature can be set separately.
Turning each temperature control
dial on the front control panel
clockwise will increase the
temperature of airflow. On the rear
control panel, press the ▲ button to
increase the temperature of airflow.
Press the ▼ button to decrease it.
Each set temperature is shown in the
display. The rear temperature is
shown in the display on the back of
the center console.
11/08/01 08:50:42 31SZA630_208
Climate Control System
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit (
) or its upper limit
(
), the system runs at full
cooling or heating only. It does not
regulate the interior temperature.
Rear Lock Button
When this button is on, you will see
LOCK on the system display. The
rear climate controls can only be
controlled by the front control panel.
The rear system automatically
changes to AUTO mode and adjusts
the fan speed and airflow levels to
maintain the selected temperature of
the rear passenger compartment.
AUTO LOCK will be displayed on
the rear control panel.
When this button is on while the
system is in SYNC mode, the rear
climate control system will be kept in
SYNC mode and the rear control
panel will be disabled. AUTO LOCK
SYNC will be displayed on the rear
control panel.
CONTINUED
201
Features
When you press a fan control button,
the fan is taken out of AUTO mode.
On vehicles with navigation system
In the Auto mode, the vehicle’s
interior temperature is
independently regulated for the
driver, front passenger, and rear
passengers according to each
adjusted temperature. The system
also regulates each temperature
based on the information of the
sunlight sensor and the sun’s
position which is updated
automatically by the navigation’s
global positioning system (GPS). For
example, if the driver’s side of the
vehicle is getting too much sun, the
system will adjust to a lower
temperature.
11/08/01 08:50:50 31SZA630_209
Climate Control System
SYNC Button
When you press this button, the
indicator comes on, and the
passenger’s side temperature and
the rear passenger compartment
temperature are set to the same
temperature as the driver’s side
temperature. When SYNC is on the
entire vehicle interior temperature
can be adjust via the driver’s side
temperature control dial on the front
climate control. Changing the
passenger’s side temperature or
pressing any control button for the
rear passenger compartment makes
the indicator go off, and takes the
system out of SYNC mode.
202
To Turn Everything Off
To turn the system completely off,
press the ON/OFF button.
Keep the system completely off
for short periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
Semi-automatic Operation
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in fully automatic
mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
AUTO in the display to go out.
11/08/01 08:51:01 31SZA630_210
Climate Control System
Fan Control
▲ button to increase
Press the
the fan speed and airflow. Press the
▼ button to decrease it.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the
temperature control below the
outside temperature.
The outside air intakes for the
climate control system are at the
base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
The system should be left in fresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
203
Features
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. You will see
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
Recirculation Button
When the indicator in the button is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent through the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
11/08/01 08:51:21 31SZA630_211
Climate Control System
This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page 129 ).
Airflow is divided between
the floor and corner vents and the
defroster vents at the base of the
windshield.
If equipped
Windshield Defroster Button
Pushing this button also turns the
power mirror heaters on and off.
This button directs the main airflow
to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
mode selection you may have made.
Rear Window Defogger
Button
/
Mode Control
Use the mode control button to
select the vents the air flows from.
Some air will flow from the
dashboard vents in all modes.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
204
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. For
faster defrosting, manually set the
fan speed to high. You can also
increase airflow to the windshield by
closing the corner vents on the
dashboard. To close the vents, rotate
the wheel under each corner vent.
When you turn off
by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
When the indicator in the button is
on, the front passenger’s
temperature cannot be set separately
from the driver’s.
11/08/01 08:51:32 31SZA630_212
Climate Control System
Rear Climate Controls
REAR CONTROL PANEL
REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
AUTO BUTTON
Features
FAN CONTROL/
OFF BUTTON
REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
MODE BUTTON
REAR LOCK BUTTON
Rear Lock Button
Temperature Control
When this button is on, you will see
LOCK on the system display. The
rear climate controls can only be
controlled by the front control panel.
See page 201 for how to use the rear
lock button.
Press the ▲ temperature control
button to increase the temperature
of airflow, and the ▼ button to
decrease it. The temperature you
adjust is shown in the system display.
CONTINUED
205
11/08/01 08:51:46 31SZA630_213
Climate Control System
Fan Control
Automatic Operation
Press the
▲ fan control button
to increase the fan speed and airflow.
▼ button to
Press the
decrease it. The level of the fan
speed is shown in the display.
Pressing the AUTO button puts the
system in automatic operation mode.
The rear system automatically
adjusts the fan speed and airflow
levels to maintain the selected
temperature of the rear passenger
compartment. You will see AUTO in
the display.
Mode Control
Each time you press the mode
button, the mode display changes
from
to
.
When
is selected, air flows
from the upper vents on the back of
the center console.
When
is selected, air flows
from the lower vents.
206
To shut off the rear climate control
system, press the OFF button until
the system shuts off, or push and
hold rear lock button for 3 seconds.
To turn on the system, press the rear
lock button once, or press fan speed
up button on rear control.
11/08/01 08:51:55 31SZA630_214
Climate Control System
Triple Zone Temperature Control
The temperatures of the driver’s side
and the front passenger’s side can be
controlled independently.
Driver’s side
Passenger’s side
Features
When the REAR LOCK button is off,
the temperature of the rear
passenger compartment can be
controlled independently.
To adjust each temperature, press
either of the temperature control
buttons (▲or▼) on the climate
control panel.
When you set each temperature to
its lower limit or its upper limit, it will
be displayed as ‘‘
’’ or ‘‘
.’’
Rear passenger compartment
207
11/08/01 08:52:00 31SZA630_215
Climate Control System
Sunlight and Temperature
Sensors
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
The climate control system has two
sensors: a sunlight sensor on top of
the dashboard, and a temperature
and humidity sensor next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
208
TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR
11/08/01 08:52:13 31SZA630_216
Audio System
An audio system is standard on all
models. Read the appropriate pages
(as shown below) to use your
vehicle’s audio system.
Without Navigation system
U.S. LX models
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
For LX models, see pages
212 through 226 .
Features
For vehicles without navigation
system, see pages 227 through 297 .
For vehicles with navigation system,
see pages 298 through 395 .
For vehicles with rear entertainment
system, see pages 396 through 428 .
CONTINUED
209
11/08/01 08:52:21 31SZA630_217
Audio System
Without Navigation system
Canadian EX models
210
EX-L models without Rear
Entertainment System
EX-L models with Rear
Entertainment System
11/08/01 08:52:29 31SZA630_218
Audio System
With Navigation system
Features
U.S. EX-L models
Touring models
211
11/08/01 08:52:35 31SZA630_219
Playing the FM/AM Radio (U.S. LX model)
DISPLAY
FM BUTTON
AM BUTTON
/VOL (POWER/VOLUME) KNOB
TITLE BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
PRESET BUTTONS
A.SEL (AUTO SELECT) BUTTON
FOLDER BAR
SCAN BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
TUNE/
212
(SOUND) KNOB
11/08/01 08:52:48 31SZA630_220
Playing the FM/AM Radio (U.S. LX model)
To Play the Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob or the AM or
FM button. Adjust the volume by
turning the power/volume knob.
On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.
On the FM band, you can also use
the features provided by the radio
data system (RDS). For more
information on the RDS, see page
215 .
TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency.
SKIP − The skip function searches
up and down from the current
frequency to find a station with a
strong signal. To activate it, press
either of the SKIP buttons (
or
), then release it.
Each time you press and release
either of the SKIP buttons (
or
), the radio frequency changes
in small increments.
SCAN − The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
When the system finds a strong
signal, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
CONTINUED
213
Features
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button. On the FM band, ST will
be displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction in AM is not available.
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, skip, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
11/08/01 08:53:00 31SZA630_221
Playing the FM/AM Radio (U.S. LX model)
Preset − Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
six stations each.
2. Use the tune, skip, scan, or RDS
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Pick a preset button, then press
and hold it until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling and can no longer receive
your preset stations, you can use the
auto select feature to find stations in
the local area.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A-SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
that preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
214
To turn off auto select, press the
A. SEL (auto select) button. This
restores the presets you originally
set.
For information on FM/AM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
389 .
11/08/01 08:53:08 31SZA630_222
Playing the FM/AM Radio (U.S. LX model)
Radio Data System (RDS)
On the FM band, you can select a
favorite station and display the
program service name provided by
the radio data system (RDS).
Program Service (PS) Name Display
If the station you are listening to is
not an RDS station, the display
continues to show the frequency
with the PS name display function on.
When you turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button, the
display shows ‘‘RDS INFO OFF.’’
CONTINUED
215
Features
The program service name display
function shows the name of the
station you are listening to. You can
turn this function on or off.
To switch the function between on
and off, press and release the TITLE
button. With the system on, you will
see the ‘‘RDS INFO ON’’ message on
the display. If the station you are
listening to is an RDS station, the
displayed frequency switches to the
station name and the RDS icon will
appear.
11/08/01 08:53:24 31SZA630_223
Playing the FM/AM Radio (U.S. LX model)
Radio Data System (RDS) Category
On the FM band selected, you can
select the program category
provided by the RDS. Press either
side of the FOLDER bar (+ or −)
to display and select an RDS
category. The principal RDS
categories are shown as follows;
ALL: All RDS category stations
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music
COUNTRY: Country music
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
TOP 40: Top 40 hits
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
RELIGION: Programs concerned
with religion
216
CLASSIC: Classical music
JAZZ: Jazz
INFO: News, information, sports,
talk shows, foreign language,
personality, public, college, and
weather
TRAFFIC: Traffic information
Press either side of the FOLDER bar
to select an RDS category. The
display shows the selected RDS
category name for about 10 seconds.
You can use the search or scan
function to find radio stations on the
selected RDS category. If you do
nothing while the RDS category
name is displayed, the selected
category is canceled.
RDS Program Search
This function searches up and down
a frequency for the strongest signal
from the frequencies that carry the
selected RDS category information.
This can help you to find a station in
your favorite category. To activate it,
first press either side of the
FOLDER bar to select an RDS
category, then press and release
either of the SKIP buttons (
or
). You will see the selected
RDS category name blinking while
searching it. When the system finds
a station, the selected RDS category
name will be displayed again for
about 10 seconds.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ blinks for about five
seconds, then the system goes back
to the last selected station.
11/08/01 08:53:31 31SZA630_224
Playing the FM/AM Radio (U.S. LX model)
RDS Program SCAN
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
You can use the RDS program
search or scan function even if the
RDS information display function is
off. In this case, the display shows a
frequency in place of a RDS station
name.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ blinks for about five
seconds, then the system goes back
to the last selected station.
Features
The scan function samples all
stations with strong signals on the
selected RDS category. To activate it,
first press either side of the
FOLDER bar to select an RDS
category, then press and release the
SCAN button. You will see SCAN in
the display. The system will scan for
a station with a strong signal in the
selected RDS category. You will also
see the selected RDS category name
blinking while searching it. When it
finds a strong signal, it will stop and
play that station for about 10 seconds.
217
11/08/01 08:53:48 31SZA630_225
Playing the FM/AM Radio (U.S. LX model)
Adjusting the Sound
Press the TUNE/
(SOUND)
knob repeatedly to display the BASS,
TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE,
SUBW (subwoofer), and SVC
(speed-sensitive volume
compensation) settings.
SVC − Adjusts the volume level
based on the vehicle speed.
Each mode is shown in the display as
it changes. Turn the TUNE/
(SOUND) knob to adjust the
setting to your liking.
BASS − Adjusts the bass.
Except SVC adjustment
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble.
When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
Wait 10 seconds and the display
returns to normal.
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-toside strength of the sound.
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
SUBWOOFER − Adjusts the
strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker.
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the TUNE/
218
(SOUND) knob to adjust the
setting to your liking. If you feel the
sound is too loud, choose low. If you
feel the sound is too quiet, choose
high.
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 130 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
11/08/01 08:53:56 31SZA630_226
Playing a Disc (U.S. LX model)
DISPLAY
Features
CD BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
DISC EJECT BUTTON
/VOL (POWER/VOLUME) KNOB
FOLDER BAR
RPT/RDM (REPEAT/RANDOM) BAR
SCAN BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
TUNE/
(SOUND) KNOB
219
11/08/01 08:54:05 31SZA630_227
Playing a Disc (U.S. LX model)
To Play a Disc
To load or play a disc, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
You operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
select the disc player, press the CD
button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the
display.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
220
The CD player can play CD-Rs and
CD-RWs compressed in MP3, WMA
or AAC formats. When playing a disc
in MP3, WMA or AAC, you will see
‘‘MP3,’’ ‘‘WMA’’ or ‘‘AAC’’ on the
display. A disc can support more
than 99 folders, and each folder can
hold up to 255 playable files.
If you have a disc that is a
combination of CD-DA tracks and
MP3/WMA files, you can choose the
format to listen by pressing and
holding CD button until you hear a
beep.
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays UNSUPPORTED, and then
skips to the next file.
Video CDs and DVDs do not work in
this unit.
11/08/01 08:54:16 31SZA630_228
Playing a Disc (U.S. LX model)
Depending on the software the files
were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or display
some text data.
Text Data Display Function
Each time you press the TITLE
button, the display shows you the
text, if the disc was recorded with
text data.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3, WMA or AAC you
can see the folder and file name, and
the artist, album, and track tag.
When you press and release the
TITLE button while a disc without
text data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
INFO’’ on the display.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
332 .
CONTINUED
221
Features
To Load a Disc
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
in the rest of the way to play it. You
operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio.
The number of the current track is
shown in the display. When playing a
disc in MP3, WMA or AAC, the
numbers of the current folder and
file are shown. The system will
continuously play a disc until you
change modes.
11/08/01 08:54:27 31SZA630_229
Playing a Disc (U.S. LX model)
The display shows up to about 14
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.). If the
text data has more than 14
characters, you will see the first 14
characters and the
indicator in
the display. Press and hold the
TITLE button until the next 14
characters are shown.
If any letter is not available, it is
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.
When the disc has no text data, you
will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.
222
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3, WMA or AAC.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
shown in the display. With a disc in
MP3, WMA or AAC the display
shows the folder and file name.
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
You can use the SKIP buttons while
a disc is playing to select passages
and change tracks (files in MP3,
WMA or AAC mode).
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
SKIP button, the
player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track (file in
MP3, WMA or AAC mode). Press
and release the
to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the
or
SKIP
button.
11/08/01 08:54:36 31SZA630_230
Playing a Disc (U.S. LX model)
In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER-REPEAT − This feature,
when activated, replays all files in
the selected folder in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
repeat, press the RPT side of the
RPT/RDM bar twice. You will see
F-RPT in the display. The system
continuously replays the current
folder. Press the RPT side of the bar
again to turn it off. Pressing the
RDM side of the bar, or selecting a
different folder with the FOLDER
bar also turns off the repeat feature.
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT) − To continuously replay
a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the RPT side of
the RPT/RDM bar. You will see RPT
in the display. Press and hold the
RPT side for 2 seconds to turn it off.
RANDOM (Random within a
disc) − This feature plays the
tracks within a disc (the files in MP3
or WMA mode) in random order. To
activate random play, press and
release the RDM side of the RPT/
RDM bar. In MP3 or WMA mode,
press the RDM side of the bar
repeatedly to select RDM (within a
disc random play). You will see RDM
in the display. Press the RDM side of
the bar for 2 seconds to return to
normal play.
Each time you press and release the
RPT side of the bar, the mode
changes from file repeat to folder
repeat, then to normal play.
CONTINUED
223
Features
In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER SELECTION − To
select a different folder, press either
side of the FOLDER bar. Press the
+ side of the bar to skip to the next
folder, and the − side of the bar to
skip to the beginning of the previous
folder.
11/08/01 08:54:46 31SZA630_231
Playing a Disc (U.S. LX model)
In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER-RANDOM − This
feature, when activated, plays all
files in the selected folder in random
order. To activate folder random,
press the RDM side of the RPT/
RDM bar. You will see F-RDM in the
display. The system will then select
and play files randomly. This
continues until you deactivate folder
random by pressing and holding the
RDM side of the bar again, or by
selecting a different folder with the
FOLDER bar.
Each time you press and release the
RDM side of the bar, the mode
changes from folder random play to
random play (within a disc random
play), then to normal play.
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) −
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc. To activate scan, press and
release the SCAN button. You will
see SCAN in the display. You will get
a 10 second sampling of each track/
file on the disc. Press and hold the
SCAN button until you hear a beep
to get out of scan mode and play the
last track/file sampled.
Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
also turns off the scan feature.
In MP3 or WMA mode
F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN) − This
feature, when activated, samples the
first file in each folder on the disc.
To activate folder scan, press the
SCAN button twice. You will see
F-SCAN in the display.
The system plays the first file in the
first folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
play the first files in the next folders
for 10 seconds. After playing the first
file in the last folder, the system
plays normally.
Pressing either of the SKIP buttons,
selecting a different folder with the
FOLDER bar, or pressing the SCAN
button, also turns off the folder scan.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan to folder scan, then to
normal play.
224
11/08/01 08:54:55 31SZA630_232
Playing a Disc (U.S. LX model)
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the disc will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin
playing where it left off.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
332 .
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM or FM button.
Press the CD button again to switch
back to the disc player.
Features
To Stop Playing a Disc
Press the eject button (
) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the disc after 10 seconds and begin
playing.
225
11/08/01 08:55:04 31SZA630_233
Disc Player Error Messages (U.S. LX model)
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For additional information on
damaged discs, see page 333 .
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
226
Error Message
Cause
Solution
UNSUPPORTED
Track/File format not
supported
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 333). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL
Mechanical Error
Servo Error
The ejected disc will not be reloaded automatically.
11/08/01 08:55:15 31SZA630_234
Audio System (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
Selector Knob
SETUP
BUTTON
SELECTOR
KNOB
When the audio system is in XM
Radio mode or playing discs, pushing
the selector knob switches the
display between the normal display
and the extended display.
SETUP Display
To select any setting such as the
clock or sound adjustment, press the
SETUP button. To use any audio
system function, the ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position. You can select the
item by turning the selector knob.
To go back to the previous display,
press the RETURN button.
Pressing the SETUP button again
will also cancel the setup display
mode.
Most audio system functions can be
controlled by standard buttons, bars,
and knobs. In addition, you can
access some functions by using the
selector knob on the audio system.
227
Features
Without rear entertainment system
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP
BUTTON
SELECTOR
KNOB
With rear entertainment system
RETURN BUTTON
The knob turns left and right. Use it
to scroll through lists, or to make
selections or adjustments to a list or
menu item on the display. When you
make a selection, push the center of
the selector to go to that selection.
11/08/01 08:55:21 31SZA630_235
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
AM BUTTON
FM BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
TITLE BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
PRESET BUTTONS
ALBUM/FOLDER BAR
SCAN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
RETURN BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
228
11/08/01 08:55:33 31SZA630_236
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
EX-L models
EX-L models with Rear
Entertainment System
PRESET BUTTONS
AM/FM BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
AM/FM BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
FOLDER
BAR
AM/FM BUTTON POWER/ CATEGORY
VOLUME BAR
TITLE
KNOB
BUTTON
TITLE
BUTTON
PRESET
BUTTONS
PRESET
BUTTONS
SCAN
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
TITLE
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
SKIP BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
229
Features
Canadian EX models
11/08/01 08:55:42 31SZA630_237
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
To Play the Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob. Adjust the
volume by turning the same knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button, or AM/FM button. On
the FM band, ST will be displayed if
the station is broadcasting in stereo.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not
available.
On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.
230
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
On the FM band, you can also use
the features provided by the radio
data system (RDS). For more
information on the RDS, see page
232 .
TUNE − Use the selector knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency.
SKIP − The skip function searches
up and down from the current
frequency to find a station with a
strong signal. To activate it, press
and hold the
or
side of the
SKIP bar until you hear a beep, then
release it.
11/08/01 08:55:54 31SZA630_238
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
Preset − Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
2. Use the tune, skip, scan, or RDS
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. You can store one frequency
on FM1, and one frequency on
FM2 with each preset button.
3. Pick a preset button, then press
and hold it until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling and can no longer receive
your preset stations, you can use the
auto select feature to find stations in
the local area.
Push the SETUP button to display
the setup MENU. Turn the selector
knob to select Auto Select, then
press the selector knob. The display
changes to the auto select mode.
Select ‘‘ON,’’ then press the selector
knob. You will see Auto Select on the
display, and the system goes into the
auto select mode for several seconds.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
CONTINUED
231
Features
SCAN − The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
When the system finds a strong
signal, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.
11/08/01 08:56:05 31SZA630_239
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
To cancel auto select, select Auto
Select on the setup menu again and
turn the selector knob to select
‘‘OFF,’’ then press the selector knob.
This restores the presets you
originally set.
For information on FM/AM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
389 .
Radio Data System (RDS)
On the FM band, you can select a
favorite station and display the
program service name provided by
the radio data system (RDS).
RDS INFO Display
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
The RDS information display
function shows the name of the RDS
station you are listening to. With the
audio system on and the FM band
selected, you can turn this function
on or off.
On U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
To switch the function between on
and off, press and release the TITLE
button. With the system on, you will
see the ‘‘RDS Info On’’ message
briefly on the display. If the station
you are listening to is an RDS station,
the display shows the station name.
232
11/08/01 08:56:24 31SZA630_240
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
If the station you are listening to is
not an RDS station, the display
continues to show the frequency
with the PS name display function on.
On EX-L and Canadian EX models
If the station you are listening to is
an RDS station, the RDS icon
appears in the display. To switch the
function between on and off, press
and release the TITLE button. With
the system on, you will see the
station name on the display.
You can turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button.
ALL: All RDS category stations
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music
COUNTRY: Country music
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
TOP 40: Top 40 hits
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
RELIGION: Programs concerned
with religion
CLASSIC: Classical music
JAZZ: Jazz
INFO: News, information, sports,
talk shows, foreign language,
personality, public, college, and
weather
TRAFFIC: Traffic information
Press either side of the FOLDER bar
or the CATEGORY bar to select an
RDS category. The display shows
the selected RDS category name for
about 10 seconds. You can use the
search or scan function to find radio
stations on the selected RDS
category. If you do nothing while the
RDS category name is displayed, the
selected category is canceled.
CONTINUED
233
Features
When you turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button, the
display briefly shows ‘‘RDS Info Off.’’
Radio Data System (RDS) Category
On the FM band selected, you can
select the program category
provided by the RDS. Press either
side (− or +) of the FOLDER bar
or the CATEGORY bar to display
and select an RDS category. The
principal RDS categories are shown
as follows:
11/08/01 08:56:32 31SZA630_241
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
RDS Program Search
RDS Program SCAN
This function searches up and down
a frequency for the strongest signal
from the frequencies that carry the
selected RDS category information.
This can help you to find a station in
your favorite category. To activate it,
press either side of the FOLDER bar
to select an RDS category, then
press and release either side
(
or
) of the SKIP bar. You
will see the selected RDS category
name blinking while searching it.
When the system finds a station, the
selected RDS category name will be
displayed again for about 10 seconds.
The scan function samples all
stations with strong signals on the
selected RDS category. To activate it,
press either side of the FOLDER bar
or the CATEGORY bar to select an
RDS category, then press and
release the SCAN button. You will
see SCAN in the display. The system
will scan for a station with a strong
signal in the selected RDS category.
You will also see the selected RDS
category name blinking while
searching it. When it finds a strong
signal, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘No selected category found’’ or
‘‘NOTHING’’ blinks for about 5
seconds, then the system goes back
to the last selected station.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
234
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘No selected category found’’ or
‘‘NOTHING’’ blinks for about 5
seconds, then the system goes back
to the last selected station.
You can use the RDS program
search or scan function even if the
RDS information display function is
off.
11/08/01 08:56:44 31SZA630_242
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
Adjusting the Sound
On U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
On EX-L and Canadian EX models
setting. Press the selector knob
again to set your setting.
BASS − Adjusts the bass.
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble.
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-toside strength of the sound.
Press the SETUP button to display
the sound settings. Turn the selector
knob to select an appropriate setting:
BASS, TREBLE, FADER,
BALANCE, SUBW (subwoofer), and
SVC (speed-sensitive volume
compensation). Press the selector
knob to enter the setting, then turn
the selector knob to adjust the
setting.
Press the SETUP button to display
the Setup menu. Turn the selector
knob to select Sound Settings, then
press the selector knob. Turn the
selector knob to select an
appropriate setting: Bass, Treble,
Fader, Balance, Subwoofer, and SVC
(speed-sensitive volume
compensation). Press the selector
knob to enter the setting, then turn
the selector knob to adjust the
SUBW (SUBWOOFER) − Adjusts
the strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker.
SVC − Adjusts the volume level
based on the vehicle speed.
CONTINUED
235
Features
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
11/08/01 08:56:52 31SZA630_243
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
Each mode is shown in the display as
it changes. Turn the selector knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
Wait a few seconds and the display
returns to normal or press the
RETURN or MENU button.
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the selector knob to
adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
236
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 130 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
11/08/01 08:57:02 31SZA630_244
Playing the XM Radio (EX-L model without navigation system)
Features
EX-L models
EX-L models with Rear Entertainment System
XM BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
XM BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
PRESET
BUTTONS
PRESET
BUTTONS
PRESET
BUTTONS
SKIP BAR
CATEGORY
BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
SETUP
BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
CATEGORY BAR
SKIP BAR
SCAN BUTTON
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
RETURN BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
SELECTOR KNOB
CONTINUED
237
11/08/01 08:57:12 31SZA630_245
Playing the XM Radio (EX-L model without navigation system)
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM Radio anywhere in the United
States and Canada, except Hawaii,
Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM is a
registered trademark of Sirius XM
Radio , Inc. and XM CANADA is a
registered business name of
Canadian Satellite Radio Inc.
Operating the XM Radio
To listen to XM Radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position, and press the
button. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
Adjust the volume by turning the
power/volume knob.
You can also change the mode from
the setup menu. Press the SETUP
button to display the setup menu.
Turn the selector knob to select XM
Mode and press the selector knob.
You can select Channel mode or
Category mode by turning and
pressing the selector knob.
XM Radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, highquality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM Radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.
MODE − To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
press and hold the TITLE button
until the mode changes.
Each time you press and release the
TITLE button, the display changes
from artist name to song name.
238
In the channel mode, you can select
all of the available channels. In the
category mode, such as Jazz, Rock,
Classical, etc., you can select all of
the channels within that category.
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
11/08/01 08:57:20 31SZA630_246
Playing the XM Radio (EX-L model without navigation system)
CATEGORY (− or +) − Press
either side of the CATEGORY bar to
select another category.
TUNE − Turn the selector knob to
change channel selections. Turn the
knob right for higher numbered
channels and left for lower
numbered channels. In the category
mode, you can only select channels
within that category.
CONTINUED
239
Features
You can also select a channel from
the list by using the selector knob.
Push the selector knob to switch the
display to the list, then turn the knob
to select a channel. Press the
selector knob to set your selection.
SCAN − The SCAN function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the stations within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button. The
system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, press the
button again.
11/08/01 08:57:38 31SZA630_247
Playing the XM Radio (EX-L model without navigation system)
Preset − You can store up to 12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.
To store a channel:
button. Either
1. Press the
XM1 or XM2 will show in the
display.
2. Use the selector knob, SKIP bar,
CATEGORY bar or SCAN button
to tune to a desired channel.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
3. Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
240
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
button again.
5. Press the
The other XM band will show.
Store the next six channels using
steps 2 and 3.
Once a channel is stored, simply
press and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the
audio or program information.
‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
‘‘UNAUTHORIZED’’ − The
encryption code is being updated.
Wait until the encryption code is
fully updated. Channels 0 and 1
should still work normally.
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
‘‘UNAVAILABLE’’ − The selected
channel number does not exist, is
not part of your subscription, or this
channel has no artist or title
information at this time.
‘‘NO INFO’’ − The selected
channel has no artist or title
information at this time.
‘‘CHECK ANTENNA’’ − There is
a problem with the XM antenna.
Please consult your dealer.
11/08/01 08:57:50 31SZA630_248
Playing the XM Radio (EX-L model without navigation system)
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
Features
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
SATELLITE
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
GROUND REPEATER
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Large items carried on a roof rack.
CONTINUED
241
11/08/01 08:58:01 31SZA630_249
Playing the XM Radio (EX-L model without navigation system)
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
This Category II radiocommunication
device complies with Industry Canada
Standard RSS-310.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM Radio
reception.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
242
Receiving XM Radio Service
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Radio. With the ignition
switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or the
ON (II) position, press the
button. A variety of music
types and styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM radio
service, contact XM Radio at
www.siriusxm.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact
XM CANADA at www.xmradio.ca, or
at 1-877-209-0079. You will need to
give them your radio I.D. number
and your credit card number. To get
your radio I.D. number, press the
button, then turn the
selector knob until ‘‘CH 000’’ appears
in the display. Your I.D. will appear
in the display.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
XM Radio mode while you wait for
activation. This should take about 30
minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. XM Radio
will continue to send an activation
signal to your vehicle for at least 12
hours from the activation request. If
the service has not been activated
after 36 hours, contact XM Radio.
In Canada, contact XM CANADA .
11/08/01 08:58:08 31SZA630_250
Playing a Disc (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
Features
DISC SLOT
CD BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
TITLE BUTTON
EJECT BUTTON
ALBUM/FOLDER BAR
SKIP BAR
SCAN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
RETURN BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
CONTINUED
243
11/08/01 08:58:21 31SZA630_251
Playing a Disc (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
Canadian EX models
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
EX-L models
FOLDER BAR
EJECT BUTTON
CD BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
CD BUTTON
TITLE
BUTTON
TITLE
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
SKIP BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
244
CATEGORY BAR
EJECT
BUTTON
EX-L models with Rear
Entertainment System
CD BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
SKIP BAR
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
DISC SLOT
CATEGORY BAR
EJECT
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
RETURN
BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB SETUP BUTTON
11/08/01 08:58:32 31SZA630_252
Playing a Disc (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
To Play a Disc
To load or play a disc, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
The CD player can play CD-Rs and
CD-RWs compressed in MP3, WMA
or AAC formats. When playing a disc
in MP3, WMA or AAC, you will see
‘‘MP3,’’ ‘‘WMA’’ or ‘‘AAC’’ on the
display. A disc can support more
than 99 folders, and each folder can
hold up to 255 playable files.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
Video CDs and DVDs do not work in
this unit.
CONTINUED
245
Features
You operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
select the disc player, press the CD
button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the
display. The number of the track
playing is shown in the display. The
system will continuously play a disc
until you change modes.
Title information will be displayed by
a list when the information is found
in the Gracenote Album Info
(Gracenote Media Database).
When you play a CD recorded with
text data, you will see the genre,
artist name, album and track name
on the screen. When you play MP3/
WMA/AAC discs, you will see the
genre, artist name, album name and
track name on the screen. If the disc
was not recorded with this
information, it will not be displayed.
11/08/01 08:58:41 31SZA630_253
Playing a Disc (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
NOTE:
If a file on a WMA disc is protected
by digital rights management
(DRM), the audio unit displays
UNSUPPORTED, and then skips to
the next file.
Depending on the software the files
were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or display
some text data.
246
Text Data Display Function
On U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
Each time you press the TITLE
button, the display shows you the
text, if the disc was recorded with
text data.
If you select name off, the text
display is turned off.
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3, WMA or AAC you
can see the folder and file name, and
the artist, album, and track tag.
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
When you press and release the
TITLE button while a disc without
text data is playing, you will see ‘‘No
album database information’’ on the
display.
The display shows up to 16
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.).
11/08/01 08:58:52 31SZA630_254
Playing a Disc (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
If the text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 16
characters and the
indicator in
the display. Press and hold the
TITLE button until the next 16
characters are shown. You can see
up to 32 characters of the text data.
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3, WMA or AAC.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
shown in the display. With a disc in
MP3, WMA or AAC the display
shows the folder and file name.
On EX-L and Canadian EX models
In MP3 or WMA mode, each time
you press and release the TITLE
button, the display changes between
track name and file name.
If any letter is not available, it is
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.
When the disc has no text data, you
will see ‘‘No album database
information’’ on the display.
CONTINUED
247
Features
If you press and hold the TITLE
button again, the display shows the
first 16 characters again.
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
11/08/01 08:59:02 31SZA630_255
Playing a Disc (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
Loading Discs
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
in the rest of the way to play it. You
operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio.
The number of the current track is
shown in the display. When playing a
disc in MP3, WMA or AAC, the
numbers of the current folder and
file are shown. The system will
continuously play a disc until you
change modes.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
332 .
248
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track (file in
MP3, WMA or AAC mode). Press
and release the
side of the bar
to skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track or file,
press and hold either side (
or
) of the SKIP bar.
Turning the selector knob to the
right or left also changes a file.
When you insert a CD for the first
time, the recording CD prompt will
appear on the display. If you select
‘‘Yes,’’ the system will start
recording to the flash memory. For
information on recording from music
CDs, see page 257 .
When you insert a CD for the first
time, a Gracenote notification
appears. For more information, see
page 360 .
11/08/01 08:59:13 31SZA630_256
Playing a Disc (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
In MP3 or WMA mode
You can also select a track from the
list by using the selector knob. Push
the selector knob while playing a CD.
The display switches to the track list.
Then turn the knob to select a track.
Press the selector knob to start your
selected track.
In MP3, WMA or AAC mode, push
the selector knob to switch the
display to the folder list then turn the
knob to select a folder. Press the
selector knob to change the display
to the track/file list, then turn the
selector knob to select a track/file.
To Select Repeat, Random or Scan
Mode:
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
Turn the selector knob to select an
appropriate repeat, random or scan
mode, then press the selector knob
to set your selection.
Features
FOLDER SELECTION − To
select a different folder, press either
side (+ or −) of the FOLDER bar
or the CATEGORY bar to move to
the beginning of the next folder.
Press the + side to skip to the next
folder, and press the − side to skip
to the beginning of the previous
folder.
EX-L and Canadian EX models
You can select any type of repeat,
random and scan modes by using the
SETUP button and the selector knob.
Push the SETUP button to display
the menu items, then turn the
selector knob to select ‘‘PLAY
MODE.’’ Press the selector knob to
set the selection.
CONTINUED
249
11/08/01 08:59:21 31SZA630_257
Playing a Disc (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
To cancel the selected mode, press
the SETUP button to show ‘‘PLAY
MODE,’’ then press the selector
knob. When you see ‘‘NORMAL
PLAY,’’ press ENTER again.
250
REPEAT TRACK − To
continuously replay a track (file in
MP3, WMA or AAC mode), select
Repeat Track or Repeat One Track
from the menu items. You will see
the track repeat icon in the display.
Select normal play to turn it off.
REPEAT FOLDER − This feature,
when activated, replays all the files
on the selected folder in the order
they are compressed in MP3, WMA
or AAC. To activate folder repeat
mode, select Repeat Folder or
Repeat One Folder from the menu
items. You will see the folder repeat
icon in the display. The system
continuously replays the current list.
Select normal play to turn it off.
RANDOM IN FOLDER − This
feature, when activated, plays the
files within the current folder in
random order, rather than in the
order they are compressed in MP3,
WMA or AAC. To activate folder
random play, select RANDOM IN
FLD or Random in FOLDER from
the menu items. You will see the
folder random icon in the display.
The system will then select and play
files randomly. This continues until
you deactivate folder random play by
selecting it, or you select a different
album list with the FOLDER bar or
the CATEGORY bar.
11/08/01 08:59:28 31SZA630_258
Playing a Disc (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
SCAN TRACK (Scan Tracks) −
The SCAN function samples all the
tracks on the disc in the order they
are recorded on the disc (all files in
the selected folder in MP3, WMA or
AAC mode). To activate the scan
feature, press and release the SCAN
button. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’ in the
display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each track/file in the
disc/folder. Press and hold the
SCAN button to get out of scan
mode and play the last track sampled.
SCAN FOLDER (Scan Folders) −
This function samples the first file in
each folder on the disc in the order
they are stored. To activate the
folder scan feature, press and
release the SCAN button repeatedly.
You will see ‘‘F-SCAN’’ or ‘‘SCAN’’ in
the display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of the first file in each
folder.
You can also select the folder scan
feature from the menu items with
the selector knob (see page 249 ).
You can also select the scan feature
from the menu items with the
selector knob (see page 249 ).
CONTINUED
251
Features
RANDOM (Random in Disc) −
This feature plays the tracks on disc
(the files in MP3, WMA or AAC
mode) in random order. To activate
random play, select Random in Disc
from the menu items. You will see
disc random icon in the display.
Select normal play to return to
normal play.
11/08/01 08:59:36 31SZA630_259
Playing a Disc (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
To turn this feature off, press and
hold the SCAN button for more than
2 seconds, or press and release the
selector knob while in scan mode.
To Stop Playing a Disc
To take the system out of the disc
mode, press one of the other source
buttons than the CD button.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan to folder scan, then to
normal play.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or the ignition
switch, play will continue at the same
point when you turn it back on.
252
Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
332 .
11/08/01 08:59:45 31SZA630_260
Disc Player Error Messages (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
Cause
Solution
UNSUPPORTED
Track/File format not
supported
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 333). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 333).
Mechanical Error
PUSH EJECT
Servo Error
CHECK DISC
Disc Error
253
Features
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For additional information on
damaged discs, see page 333 .
Error Message
11/08/01 08:59:51 31SZA630_261
Playing CD Library Audio (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
CDL BUTTON
DISC SLOT
EJECT BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
SKIP BAR
ALBUM/FOLDER BAR
SCAN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
RETURN BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
254
11/08/01 09:00:02 31SZA630_262
Playing CD Library Audio (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
EX-L models
EX-L models with Rear
Entertainment System
FOLDER BAR POWER/ CDL BUTTON
CDL BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
VOLUME
DISC SLOT EJECT BUTTON
DISC SLOT
KNOB
KNOB
CATEGORY
BAR
CDL BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
EJECT
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
CONTINUED
255
Features
Canadian EX models
11/08/01 09:00:14 31SZA630_263
Playing CD Library Audio (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
If equipped
The CD Library Audio function can
record tracks from music CDs to the
flash memory. Each music CD is
stored on an albumlist. This audio
system can store up to 18 albums.
NOTE:
Only recordings from a standard
CD-DA (44.1 kHz, 16 bit stereo
PCM digital sound data) to CD
Library are supported.
Digital music files, such as MP3,
WMA, AAC etc., from CD-R,
DVD-R and USB flash memory
devices cannot be copied to the
CD Library. Likewise, digital
music files recorded in the CD
Library cannot be copied to CD-R,
DVD-R and USB devices.
256
Music data recorded in the CD
Library can only be used for
personal use.
Although data is recorded using
ultra-efficient compression
technology, sound quality may
vary slightly from the original.
Title information will be displayed
when the information is found in
the Gracenote Album Info
(Gracenote Media Database) in
the built-in flash memory. See
page 360 .
Recording function from following
media is not supported.
−CD-DA which prohibits the
copying by SCMS
−CD-DA with copy control
−SACD (Super Audio CD)
−DTS-CD
−DVD-A
−CD-R/RW
−DVD-R/RW
−Copy controlled CDs (Playback
cannot be guaranteed)
−DTS-CDs (Only enabled for
playback)
If the CD Library is ever replaced,
all data will be lost and stored
music will not be recovered.
11/08/01 09:00:30 31SZA630_264
Playing CD Library Audio (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
Recording a Music CD to CD
Library
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
During recording, operation of this
product may be slower.
If you turn off the ignition switch
while recording a CD, the CD will
begin recording again when the
power comes back.
1. If you play a music CD that has
not been recorded in the CD
Library, the recording CD prompt
will appear on the display. Select
‘‘YES’’ to start recording to the
flash memory. To turn this display
off, see page 258 .
2. The display will change to the
album list. Select the desired
number of the list by turning the
selector knob, then press the
selector knob. The recording icon,
recording album number, and
current recording track number
will appear while recording. When
recording is finished, the
recording icon will be turned off.
Tracks from music CDs are
recorded at eight times the
playback speed. You can listen to
tracks as they are being recorded.
Forward/rewind, repeat, random
and scan functions are not
available during recording.
CONTINUED
257
Features
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
NOTE:
Please note that there will be no
compensation offered in the case
of unsuccessful recording of audio
data or the loss of audio data due
to any cause whatsoever.
11/08/01 09:00:40 31SZA630_265
Playing CD Library Audio (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
You can listen to tracks from other
albumlists that have already been
recorded while recording. Press
the CD-L button and switch over
to CD Library Audio.
Changing the Recording Settings
To Stop Displaying the Recording CD
Prompt
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
Recording settings cannot be
changed during recording.
EX-L and Canadian EX models
If you don’t wish to display the
recording CD prompt when you
insert a CD for the first time, press
and release the SETUP button and
turn the selector knob to ‘‘CD
Library Setup,’’ then press the
selector knob and select ‘‘Prompt to
Record’’ or ‘‘Prompt to Record CD.’’
258
Each time you press and release the
selector knob, this feature turns on
and off.
11/08/01 09:00:52 31SZA630_266
Playing CD Library Audio (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
To Record a CD Manually
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
Insert a CD that has not been
recorded in the CD Library, press
the SETUP button and turn the
selector knob to ‘‘CD Library Setup,’’
then press the selector knob. Select
‘‘RECORD CD NOW’’ and press the
selector knob. The display will
change to the albumlist. Select the
desired slot and press the same knob
to start recording.
If you select a slot on the album list
that has been recorded, a
confirmation message will appear.
Select ‘‘YES’’ to overwrite the old
album. Select ‘‘NO’’ to return to the
normal display.
Features
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
If you press the EJECT button while
recording a CD, the recording is
stopped. When you insert the same
CD again, the ‘‘Continue REC’’
message will appear. Select ‘‘YES’’ to
restart the recording feature from
the point that the previous recording
was disabled.
259
11/08/01 09:01:04 31SZA630_267
Playing CD Library Audio (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
Playing Tracks in CD Library
To play tracks in the CD Library,
push the CD-L button until the CD
Library Audio display appears.
Playback will start automatically with
the track previously selected.
Changing a Track/Albumlist
Folder Bar or Category Bar
+
−
The next album in the list is
selected. If you press + while the
last album in the list is selected,
the first album in the list is
selected.
The previous album in the list is
selected. If you press − while the
first album is selected, the last
album in the list is selected.
Skip Bar
Returns to the beginning of the
current track. Press again and hold
to return to the beginning of the
previous track. If you press this
bar while the first track is playing,
the last track is selected.
Skips to the beginning of the next
track. If you press this bar while
the last track is playing, the first
track is selected.
Turning the selector knob to the
right or left also changes a file.
260
Fast Forwarding and Rewinding
To fast forward, press and hold the
side of the SKIP bar. To
rewind, press and hold the
side
of the SKIP bar.
Track Selection
You can also select an album or track
from the list by using the selector
knob. Push the selector knob while
in the CD Library mode, the display
will switch to the albumlist. Turn the
selector knob to select an album.
Press the selector knob to change
the display to the track list, then turn
the selector knob to select a track.
Press the selector knob to start
playing the track you wish to play.
11/08/01 09:01:15 31SZA630_268
Playing CD Library Audio (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
To Select Repeat, Random or
Scan Mode:
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
You can select any type of repeat,
random and scan modes by using the
SETUP button and the selector knob.
Push the SETUP button to display
the menu items, then turn the
selector knob to select ‘‘PLAY
MODE.’’ Press the selector knob to
set the selection.
REPEAT ALBUM − This feature,
when activated, replays all the tracks
on the selected albumlist in the order
they are recorded. To activate this
feature, select ‘‘REPEAT ALBUM’’
and press the selector knob. You will
see the repeat album icon in the
display. The system continuously
replays the current list. Select
‘‘NORMAL PLAY’’ to turn it off.
RANDOM ALBUMS (Random in
Albums) − This feature, when
activated, plays the tracks within the
current albumlist in random order,
rather than in the order they are
recorded. You will see the random
album icon in the display. The
system will then select and play
tracks randomly. This continues
until you deactivate random album
play by selecting ‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’
or you select a different albumlist
with the FOLDER bar or the
CATEGORY bar.
RANDOM (Random All) − This
feature plays all tracks within a CD
Library in random order. You will
see random all icon in the display.
Select ‘‘NORMAL PLAY’’ to return
to normal play.
CONTINUED
261
Features
REPEAT TRACK − To
continuously replay a track, select
‘‘Repeat Track’’ or ‘‘Repeat One
Track’’ from the menu items and
press the selector knob. You will see
the repeat one track icon in the
display. Select ‘‘NORMAL PLAY’’ to
turn it off.
11/08/01 09:01:27 31SZA630_269
Playing CD Library Audio (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
SCAN TRK (Scan Tracks) − The
SCAN function samples all the
tracks on the albumlist in the order
they were recorded. To activate this
feature, press and release the SCAN
button. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’ in the
display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each track in the list.
Press and hold the SCAN button to
get out of scan mode and play the
last track sampled.
SCAN ALBUM − This function
samples the first track in each
albumlist in the order they are stored.
To activate the scan album feature,
press and release the SCAN button
repeatedly. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’ in
the display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of the first track in each list.
Press and hold the SCAN button to
get out of the scan album mode and
play the last track sampled.
You can also select the scan feature
from the menu items with the
selector knob (see page 261 ).
You can also select the scan album
feature from the menu items with
the selector knob (see page 261 ).
Pressing the selector knob turns off
the scan or scan album feature.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from scan track to scan album
feature, then to normal play.
262
Deleting an Album
1. Press the SETUP button and turn
the selector knob to ‘‘CD Library
Setup.’’ Then press the selector
knob.
2. Select ‘‘Delete Album’’ or ‘‘Delete
Library Album,’’ then press the
selector knob.
3. The display will change to the
albumlist. Select the album that
you want to delete, press the
selector knob.
4. The confirmation message is
displayed. Select ‘‘YES’’ to delete
album completely.
11/08/01 09:01:43 31SZA630_270
Playing CD Library Audio (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
Acquiring Title Information
1. On the CD Library Audio display,
press the SETUP button.
On U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
2. Turn the selector knob to ‘‘GET
ALBUM INFO.,’’ then press the
selector knob. The display will
change to the albumlist.
3. Select the title information for the
albumlist, then press the selector
knob. You will be returned to the
normal display.
3. Select ‘‘Update Album Info DB,’’
then press the selector knob.
4. On U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
Press the selector knob to start
updating.
NOTE:
Consult your dealer, or visit
www.honda.com (in U.S.), or
www.honda.ca (in Canada), to acquire
updated files.
Select ‘‘Yes’’ on the confirmation
screen, and press the selector
knob to start updating.
1. Insert the update disc into the disc
slot.
After finishing the update, you will
be returned to the normal display.
On EX-L and Canadian EX models
2. Press the SETUP button and turn
the selector knob to ‘‘CD Library
Setup,’’ then press the selector
knob.
If more than one title is found for
the CD inserted, a screen will
appear to select the correct title.
263
Features
Turn the selector knob to ‘‘CD
Library Setup,’’ then press the
selector knob.
Updating Gracenote Album Info
(Gracenote Media Database)
You can update the Gracenote
Album Info. (Gracenote Media
Database).
11/08/01 09:01:53 31SZA630_271
Playing CD Library Audio (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
Checking Album Info DB Version
1. Press the SETUP button and turn
the selector knob to ‘‘CD Library
Setup,’’ then press the selector
knob.
2. Select ‘‘ALBUM DB VER.’’ or
‘‘Album Info DB Version,’’ then
press the selector knob.
3. The display will show you the
current Album Info DB Version.
Press the RETURN button to
return to the CD Library Setup
menu.
Gracenote Music Recognition
Service (CDDB)
Music recognition technology and
related data are provided by
Gracenote . Gracenote is the
industry standard in music
recognition technology and related
content delivery. For more
information visit www.gracenote.
com.
For more information, see page 360 .
264
11/08/01 09:02:03 31SZA630_272
Playing an iPod (EX-L and Canadian EX models without navigation system)
USB INDICATOR
ALBUM ART
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
EX-L models
USB/AUX BUTTON
Features
Canadian EX models
EX-L models with Rear
Entertainment System
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
USB/AUX BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
USB/AUX BUTTON
SKIP BAR
SKIP BAR
SKIP BAR
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
265
11/08/01 09:02:12 31SZA630_273
Playing an iPod (EX-L and Canadian EX models without navigation system)
To Play an iPod
This audio system can select and
play the audio files on the iPod with
the same controls used for the indash disc player. To play an iPod,
connect it to the USB adapter cable
in the console compartment by using
your dock connector, then press the
USB/AUX button. The ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position. The iPod will
also be charged with the ignition
switch in these settings.
266
The audio system reads and plays
playable sound files on the iPod. The
system cannot operate an iPod as a
mass storage device. The system will
only play songs stored on the iPod
with iTunes.
iPod and iTunes are registered
trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
iPods compatible with your audio
system using the USB adapter cable
are:
Model
iPod 5th
generation
iPod classic
iPod nano
1st generation
iPod nano
2nd generation
iPod nano
3rd generation
iPod nano
4th generation
iPod nano
1st generation
iPod touch
2nd generation
iPhone
iPhone 3G
iPhone 3GS
Software
Ver. 1.3 or more
Ver. 1.1.2 or more
Ver. 1.3.1 or more
Ver. 1.1.3 or more
Ver. 1.1.3 or more
Ver. 1.0.4 or more
Ver. 1.1.1 or more
Ver. 2.2.1 or more
Ver. 2.1.0 or more
Ver. 2.1.0 or more
Ver. 5.12.1 or more
11/08/01 09:02:24 31SZA630_274
Playing an iPod (EX-L and Canadian EX models without navigation system)
Use only compatible iPods with the
latest software. iPods that are not
compatible will not work in this audio
unit.
USB ADAPTER CABLE
DOCK CONNECTOR
Features
NOTE:
Do not connect your iPod using a
hub.
Do not keep the iPod and dock
connector cable in the vehicle.
Direct sunlight and high heat will
damage it.
Do not use an extension cable
between the USB adapter cable
equipped with your vehicle and
your dock connector.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing it.
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.
Connecting an iPod
USB CONNECTOR
1. Unclip the USB connector by
pivoting it, and pull out the USB
adapter cable in the console
compartment.
USB ADAPTER CABLE
2. Connect your dock connector to
the iPod correctly and securely.
3. Install the dock connector to the
USB adapter cable securely.
CONTINUED
267
11/08/01 09:02:35 31SZA630_275
Playing an iPod (EX-L and Canadian EX models without navigation system)
If the iPod indicator does not appear
in the audio display, check the
connections, and try to reconnect the
iPod a few times.
If the audio system still does not
recognize the iPod, the iPod may
need to be reset. Follow the
instructions that came with your
iPod, or you can find reset
instructions online at www.apple.com/
The current file number and total of
the selected playable files are on the
display. It also shows the artist,
album and track (file) names on the
display.
If a file on your iPod has an album
art, it will be shown in the display.
268
To Change or Select Files
Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is
playing to select passages and
change files.
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the
side of the bar
to skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within playing track,
press and hold either side (
or
) of the SKIP bar.
Turning the selector knob to the
right or left also changes a file.
You can also select a file from any
list on the iPod menu: playlists,
artists, albums, songs, genres,
composers and podcasts by using the
selector knob. Push the selector
knob to switch the display to an iPod
menu, then turn the selector knob to
select a desired list. Press the
selector knob to set your selection.
11/08/01 09:02:42 31SZA630_276
Playing an iPod (EX-L and Canadian EX models without navigation system)
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on the artists list,
the albums list is displayed.
The track order that appears at this
time varies depending on the iPod
model and software.
Features
The display shows items on the
selected list. Turn the selector knob
to select an item, then press the
selector knob to set your selection.
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on the albums
list, all the tracks become available
for selection.
CONTINUED
269
11/08/01 09:02:51 31SZA630_277
Playing an iPod (EX-L and Canadian EX models without navigation system)
To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode:
Turn the selector knob to select a
play mode: Normal Play, Repeat One
Track, Shuffle All, Shuffle Repeat,
Shuffle Albums, or Shuffle Album
Repeat, then press the selector knob
to set your selection.
To cancel the selected mode, press
the selector knob and turn the
selector knob to show ‘‘Play Mode,’’
then press the selector knob. When
you see ‘‘Normal Play,’’ press the
selector knob again.
You can select any type of repeat and
shuffle mode by using the SETUP
button and the selector knob. Press
the SETUP button to display the
menu items, then turn the selector
knob to select ‘‘Play Mode.’’ Press
the selector knob to set the selection.
270
Repeat One Track − This feature
continuously plays a file. You will see
the repeat icon in the display. Select
normal play to turn it off.
11/08/01 09:02:58 31SZA630_278
Playing an iPod (EX-L and Canadian EX models without navigation system)
Shuffle All − This feature plays all
available files in a selected list
(playlists, artists, albums, songs,
genres, composers and podcasts) in
random order. You will see the
shuffle all icon in the display. Select
normal play to turn off this feature.
NOTE:
Available operating functions vary on
models or versions. Some functions
may not be available on the vehicle’s
audio system.
Features
Shuffle Repeat − This feature
repeats the shuffle all feature. When
the system finishes playing the
shuffle all feature, it will repeat
playing the songs in the same
shuffled order. You will see the
shuffle all and the repeat icon in the
display. Select normal play to turn off
this feature.
Shuffle Albums − This feature
plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums,
songs and genres) in random order.
The files in each album are played in
the recorded order. You will see the
shuffle albums icon in the display.
Select normal play to turn off this
feature.
Shuffle Albums Repeat − This
feature repeats the shuffle album
feature. When the system finishes
playing the shuffle album feature, it
will repeat playing the albums in the
same shuffled order. You will see the
shuffle albums and the repeat icon in
the display. Select normal play to
turn off this feature.
271
11/08/01 09:03:09 31SZA630_279
Playing an iPod (EX-L and Canadian EX models without navigation system)
To Stop Playing Your iPod
To take the system out of the iPod
mode, press one of the other source
buttons than the USB/AUX button.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the auxiliary input jack,
press the USB/AUX button to select
it.
* : The displayed message may
vary on models or versions. On
some models, there is no
message to disconnect.
You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
change modes.
If you reconnect the same iPod, the
system may begin playing where it
left off, depending on what mode the
iPod is in when it is reconnected.
Disconnecting an iPod
You can disconnect the iPod at any
time when you see the ‘‘OK to
disconnect’’ message* in the iPod
display. Always make sure you see
‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in the
iPod display before you disconnect it.
Make sure to follow the iPod’s
instructions on how to disconnect
the dock connector from the USB
adapter cable.
272
When you disconnect the iPod while
it is playing, the display shows No
Data.
iPod Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
display, see page 273 .
11/08/01 09:03:14 31SZA630_280
iPod Error Messages (EX-L and Canadian EX models without navigation system)
If you see an error message on the
audio display while playing an iPod,
find the solution in the chart to the
right. If you cannot clear the error
message, take your vehicle to your
dealer.
Solution
USB ERROR
BAD USB DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
NO SONG
UNSUPPORTED
There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
Appears when the overcurrent protection feature of the system stops
supplying power to USB because an incompatible device is connected.
Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio system off, and turn it on
again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Appears when the iPod is empty. Store some files in the iPod.
Appears when an unsupported device is connected. Disconnect the
device.
Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. See page 266 for
specification information for iPods. If it appears when a supported
iPod is connected, update the iPod software to the newer version.
Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect
the iPod.
UNSUPPORTED VER.
CONNECT RETRY
273
Features
Error Message
11/08/01 09:03:25 31SZA630_281
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (EX-L and Canadian EX models without navigation system)
USB INDICATOR
ALBUM ART
Canadian EX models
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
EX-L models
USB/AUX BUTTON
EX-L models with Rear
Entertainment System
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
USB/AUX BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
USB/AUX BUTTON
SKIP BAR
SKIP BAR
SKIP BAR
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
274
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
11/08/01 09:03:36 31SZA630_282
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (EX-L and Canadian EX models without navigation system)
The recommended USB flash
memory devices are 256 MB or
higher, and formatted with the FAT
file system. Some digital audio
players may be compatible as well.
Some USB flash memory devices
(such as devices with security lockout features, etc.) will not work in
this audio unit.
NOTE:
Do not use a device such as a card
reader or hard drive as the device
or your files may be damaged.
Do not connect your USB flash
memory device using a hub.
Do not use an extension cable to
the USB adapter cable equipped
with your vehicle.
Do not keep a USB flash memory
device in the vehicle. Direct
sunlight and high heat will damage
it.
CONTINUED
275
Features
To Play a USB Flash Memory
Device
This audio system can select and
play the audio files from a USB flash
memory device with the same
controls used for the in-dash disc
player. To play a USB flash memory
device, connect it to the USB adapter
cable in the console compartment,
then press the USB/AUX button.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
11/08/01 09:03:46 31SZA630_283
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (EX-L and Canadian EX models without navigation system)
We recommend backing up your
data before playing a USB flash
memory device.
Depending on the type and
number of files, it may take some
time before they begin to play.
Depending on the software the
files were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or
display some text data.
Depending on the type of
encoding and writing software
used, there may be cases where
character information does not
display properly.
276
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.
Some versions of MP3, WMA, or
AAC format may not be supported. If
an unsupported file is found, the
audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,
then skips to the next file.
The order of files in USB playback
may be different from the order of
files displayed in PC or other
devices etc. Files are played in the
order stored in USB flash memory
device.
In WMA or AAC format, DRM
(digital rights management) files
cannot be played. If the system finds
a DRM file, the audio unit displays
UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips
to the next file.
Combining a low sampling f requency
with a low bitrate may result in
extremely degraded sound quality.
11/08/01 09:03:56 31SZA630_284
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (EX-L and Canadian EX models without navigation system)
When the USB flash memory device
is connected, the USB indicator is
shown in the display.
Connecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
USB ADAPTER CABLE
If a file on your USB flash memory
device has an album art, it will be
shown in the display.
Features
USB ADAPTER CABLE
USB CONNECTOR
1. Unclip the USB connector by
pivoting it, and pull out the USB
adapter cable in the console
compartment.
2. Connect the USB flash memory
device to the USB adapter cable
correctly and securely.
CONTINUED
277
11/08/01 09:04:05 31SZA630_285
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (EX-L and Canadian EX models without navigation system)
To Change or Select Files
Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash
memory device is playing to select
passages and change files.
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next file. Press and
release the
side of the bar, to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current file. Press it twice to skip
to the beginning of the previous file.
To move rapidly within a file, press
and hold either side (
or
)
of the SKIP bar.
Turning the selector knob to the
right or left also changes a file.
278
You can also select a file from any
list on the USB top menu: artists,
albums, songs, genres, by using the
selector knob. Push the selector
knob to switch the display to the
USB top menu, then turn the
selector knob to select a desired list.
Press the selector knob to set your
selection.
The display shows items on the
selected list. Turn the selector knob
to select an item, then press the
selector knob to set your selection.
11/08/01 09:04:15 31SZA630_286
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (EX-L and Canadian EX models without navigation system)
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on the artists list,
the albums list is displayed.
To Select Repeat or Random Mode:
Turn the selector knob to select a
play mode: Normal Play, Repeat One
Track, Random All or Random
Repeat, then press the selector knob
to set your selection.
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on the albums
list, all the tracks become available
for selection.
Pressing the RETURN button goes
back to the previous display.
You can select any type of repeat and
random mode by using the SETUP
button and the selector knob. Press
the SETUP button to display the
menu items, then turn the selector
knob to select ‘‘Play Mode.’’ Press
the selector knob to set the selection.
CONTINUED
279
Features
To cancel the selected mode, press
the selector knob and turn the
selector knob to show ‘‘Play Mode,’’
then press the selector knob. When
you see ‘‘Normal Play,’’ press the
selector knob again.
11/08/01 09:04:25 31SZA630_287
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (EX-L and Canadian EX models without navigation system)
Random All − This feature plays
all available files in a selected list
(artists, albums, songs or genres) in
random order. You will see the
random all icon in the display. Select
the normal play mode to turn off this
feature.
Repeat One Track − This feature
continuously plays a file. You will see
the repeat icon in the display. Select
normal play to turn it off.
Random Repeat − This feature
repeats the random all feature.
When the system finishes playing
the random all feature, it will repeat
playing the files in the same random
order. You will see the random all
and repeat icons in the display.
Select the normal play to turn off this
feature.
To Stop Playing a USB Flash
Memory Device
To take the system out of the USB
mode, press one of the other source
buttons than the USB/AUX button.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the auxiliary input jack,
press the USB/AUX button to select
it.
Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
You can disconnect the USB flash
memory device at any time even if
the USB mode is selected on the
audio system. Always follow the USB
flash memory device’s instructions
when you remove it.
When you disconnect the USB flash
memory device while it is playing,
the display shows No Data.
280
11/08/01 09:04:30 31SZA630_288
USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (EX-L and Canadian EX models without navigation system)
If you see an error message on the
audio display while playing a USB
flash memory device, find the
solution in the chart to the right. If
you cannot clear the error message,
take your vehicle to your dealer.
Solution
USB ERROR
BAD USB DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
Appears when the overcurrent protection feature of the system stops
supplying power to USB because an incompatible device is connected.
Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio system off, and turn it on
again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Appears when the files in the USB flash memory device are DRM or
an unsupported format. This error message appears for a few seconds,
then plays the next song.
Appears when the USB flash memory device is empty or there are no
MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash memory device. Save some
MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash memory device.
Appears when an unsupported device is connected. See page 275 for
specification information on USB flash memory devices. If it appears
when the supported device is connected, reconnect the device.
UNPLAYABLE FILE
NO SONG
UNSUPPORTED
281
Features
Error Message
11/08/01 09:04:36 31SZA630_289
Bluetooth Audio System (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
Bluetooth Indicator
CD/AUX BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
SKIP BAR
SETUP BUTTON
RETURN BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
282
11/08/01 09:04:47 31SZA630_290
Bluetooth Audio System (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
Bluetooth Indicator
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
EX-L models
USB/AUX BUTTON
EX-L models with Rear
Entertainment System
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
USB/AUX BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
USB/AUX BUTTON
SKIP BAR
SKIP BAR
SKIP BAR
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
CONTINUED
283
Features
Canadian EX models
11/08/01 09:05:00 31SZA630_291
Bluetooth Audio System (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Bluetooth Audio system, which
allows you to listen to streaming
audio from your Bluetooth Audio
compatible phone. This function is
only available on phones that are
paired and linked to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)
system (see page 447 ).
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones
with streaming audio capabilities are
compatible with the system. You can
find an approved phone by visiting
handsfreelink.honda.com or call 888528-7876. In Canada, visit www.
handsfreelink.ca, or call (888) 5287876.
NOTE: In some states, provinces,
and territories, it may be illegal to
perform some data device functions
while driving.
284
To Play Bluetooth Audio Files
Make sure that your phone is paired
and linked to HFL.
To begin to play the audio files, you
may need to operate your phone. If
so, follow the phone maker’s
operating instructions.
Press the USB/AUX or CD/AUX
button* with the ignition switch in
the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position. When the phone is
recognized, you will see the
Bluetooth indicator and Bluetooth
Audio message or text data (album,
artist, and song name) on a phone in
the display.
Until the phone is recognized, you
will see ‘‘No Connect’’ on the display.
This message will go off when the
phone is recognized, then the system
begins to play.
*: If an iPod or USB flash memory
device or CD or audio unit
connected to the auxiliary input
jack was selected at the last
mode, you will see iPod, USB,
CD, or AUX in the display. Push
the USB/AUX or CD/AUX
button again to play audio files
from your Bluetooth Audio
phone.
11/08/01 09:05:12 31SZA630_292
Bluetooth Audio System (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
NOTE: The text display function
may not be available on some phone
devices.
The phone is not linked to HFL.
The phone is not turned on.
The phone is not in the vehicle.
Another HFL compatible phone,
which is not compatible for
Bluetooth Audio, is already
connected.
To skip a file
Press the
side of the SKIP bar
to skip forward to the next file, and
press the
side to skip backward
to the beginning of the current file.
Push the
side again to skip to
the previous file.
Turning the selector knob to the
right or the left also changes the file.
NOTE: The skip function may not be
available on some phone devices.
CONTINUED
285
Features
If more than one phone is paired to
the HFL system, there will be a
delay before the system begins to
play.
In the following conditions, the
display shows ‘‘No Connect’’
message.
11/08/01 09:05:25 31SZA630_293
Bluetooth Audio System (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
To pause or resume a file
The resume/pause mode can stop
playing a file temporarily. Press the
SETUP button to display the setup
menu, then turn the selector knob to
select ‘‘Play Mode.’’ Press the
selector knob to enter the play mode
menu.
NOTE: The pause function may not
be available on some phone devices.
To Select Repeat or Random Mode:
You can select repeat and random
mode by using the SETUP button
and the selector knob. Push the
SETUP button to display the menu
items, then turn the selector knob to
select ‘‘Play Mode.’’ Press the
selector knob to set the selection.
Turn the selector knob to select
‘‘Repeat One Track’’ or ‘‘Random All,’’
then press the selector knob to set
your selection.
Turn the selector to select Resume/
Pause mode, then press the selector
knob to set your selection. Repeat to
resume play.
286
Repeat One Track − This feature
continuously plays a file. Select
normal play to turn it off.
Random All − This feature plays
all available files in random order.
Select the normal play to turn off this
feature.
NOTE: The repeat or random play
function may not be available on
some phone devices.
11/08/01 09:05:35 31SZA630_294
Bluetooth Audio System (EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models without navigation system)
To switch to HFL mode
If you receive a call when the
Bluetooth Audio is playing, press the
PICK-UP button on the steering
wheel. The display switches to the
HFL mode (see page 442 ).
To take the system out of the
Bluetooth Audio mode, press one of
the other source buttons than the
USB/AUX or CD/AUX button.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the auxiliary input jack,
press the USB/AUX or CD/AUX
button to select it.
Switching to another mode pauses
the music playing from your phone.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
287
Features
After ending the call, press the
HANG-UP button to go back to the
Bluetooth Audio mode.
To turn off the Bluetooth Audio
mode
11/08/01 09:05:46 31SZA630_295
Wallpaper Setup
EX-L and Canadian EX models
Import Picture from USB
The wallpaper setup function can
change, store or delete the wallpaper
on the display. You can store up to
five pictures from USB flash
memory devices. Two default
wallpapers are already stored.
On vehicles with navigation system
Refer to the navigation system
manual for operation of the
wallpaper setup.
1. Connect the USB flash memory
device that includes pictures you
want to store. Press the SETUP
button to display the setup menu.
Turn the selector knob to
‘‘Wallpaper Setup’’ and press the
selector knob.
288
2. The display will change to the
wallpaper setup menu. Turn the
selector knob to ‘‘Import Picture
from USB,’’ then press the
selector knob.
If the USB flash memory device
does not have any picture, ‘‘No
Files’’ message will appear on the
display.
11/08/01 09:05:56 31SZA630_296
Wallpaper Setup
3. Turn the selector knob to select a
desired picture, then press the
knob to import the picture.
‘‘Loading Picture’’ message will
appear on the display.
NOTE:
If you choose an incompatible
picture, such as one that is too
large or in an unsupported format,
a message will appear and the
system will not be able to import
the picture.
4. The display will change to as
shown above. Select OK to import
the picture to the system. The
imported list number and the
confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the
import wallpaper list.
The max file size is 1024 × 768
pixels. Smaller images are
displayed with the extra area
appearing in black.
Larger images are reduced to a
displayable size without changing
the aspect ratio.
CONTINUED
289
Features
You can only import images from
the root directly. Images in the
folders cannot be imported.
11/08/01 09:06:05 31SZA630_297
Wallpaper Setup
Five uploaded images (in BMP or
JPEG format) can be saved.
If you attempt to upload an image
with the same name as an existing
image, a pop-up screen will appear,
asking if you want to overwrite the
existing image file.
You cannot import images while
driving.
Choose Wallpaper
Delete Wallpaper
On the wallpaper setup menu, select
‘‘Choose Wallpaper,’’ then press the
selector knob. The screen will
change to the wallpaper list. Select
desired wallpaper and press the
selector knob. Your selection will be
indicated by the filled in circle.
On the wallpaper setup menu, select
‘‘Delete Picture from mem’’ and
press the selector knob. The screen
will change to the Delete Wallpaper
list. Select the picture that you want
to delete, then press the selector
knob. The confirmation message will
appear. Select ‘‘Yes’’ to delete
completely.
You can also select ‘‘Default
Wallpaper’’ (Honda logo) or ‘‘Clock’’
(analog) on the list.
You can confirm the wallpaper which
you selected. Press the DISPLAY
button, and select Wallpaper by
turning and pressing the selector
knob.
290
11/08/01 09:06:18 31SZA630_298
Display Setup
EX-L models without navigation system
and Canadian EX models
To adjust the display, highlight
‘‘Display Setup’’ from the setup menu
with the selector knob. You can
adjust these display settings:
1. Press the SETUP button to display
the setup menu. Turn the selector
knob to ‘‘Display Setup’’ and press
the selector knob.
Features
Brightness
Contrast
Menu Color
2. On the display setup menu, select
adjustment menu and press the
selector knob to enter the setting.
Adjust the setting by turning the
selector knob.
3. If you want to adjust the Menu
Color, select it by turning the
selector knob and press the
selector knob.
4. The display will change to as
shown above. You can change the
color of the screen to blue, red,
amber, gray. Turn the selector
knob to the setting you want, then
press the selector knob.
Press and release the RETURN
button to go back to the setup
menu.
291
11/08/01 09:06:29 31SZA630_299
Display Setup
Display Button
Audio Display
Without rear entertainment system
SELECTOR
KNOB
DISPLAY
BUTTON
For information on instant fuel
economy, average fuel economy,
distance (trip meter) and range, see
page 82 .
With rear entertainment system
DISPLAY
BUTTON
SELECTOR
KNOB
You can select one of the four types
of screen by pressing the Display
button, then turning and pressing
the selector knob.
292
Trip Computer
When you select the trip computer,
the display shows the instant fuel
economy, average fuel economy,
distance (trip meter), average speed,
elapsed time, and range.
When you select ‘‘Audio Display,’’
the screen shows you the audio
information currently selected.
11/08/01 09:06:42 31SZA630_300
Display Setup
Trip Computer Reset
Wallpaper
When you select ‘‘Wallpaper,’’ the
display changes to your favorite
screen. The minimum display
information also appear on the upper
part of the screen. See page 288 for
how to set up the wallpaper.
Features
Average Speed
This shows the average speed you
are traveling in miles per hour (mph)
for U.S. models or kilometers per
hour (km/h) for Canadian models.
Elapsed Time
This shows the accumulated
traveling time since you last reset it.
You can reset the Trip Computer,
see next column.
You can reset all data on the Trip
Computer. To reset the trip
computer, press the SETUP button
to display the setup menu. Turn the
selector knob to Trip Computer
Reset, and press the selector knob.
Select Trip A or Trip B by turning
the selector knob, then press the
selector knob. A confirmation
message will appear. Select ‘‘Yes’’
and press the selector knob to
completely reset.
CONTINUED
293
11/08/01 09:06:53 31SZA630_301
Display Setup, Setting the Clock
Minimum Display
When you select ‘‘Minimum Display,’’
you will see only the compass, audio
status, and clock on the upper part of
the display.
On Vehicles without Navigation
System
Setting the Clock
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, you may
need to set the clock.
CLOCK BUTTON
On U.S. LX models
To set the time, press the CLOCK
button until you hear a beep. The
displayed time begins to blink.
HOUR
BUTTON
MINUTE
BUTTON
Change the hours by pressing the H
(hour) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change
the minutes by pressing the M
(minute) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time.
Press the CLOCK button again to
enter the set time.
294
11/08/01 09:07:04 31SZA630_302
Setting the Clock
1. To set the time, press and release
the CLOCK button. The display
will change to the clock adjust
screen.
EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
Canadian EX models
CLOCK
BUTTON
You can also set the time from the
setup menu.
Press the SETUP button to display
the setup menu. Turn the selector
knob to ‘‘CLOCK ADJUST’’ and
press the selector knob.
EX-L models with Rear
Entertainment System
EX-L models
CLOCK
BUTTON
CLOCK
BUTTON
CONTINUED
295
Features
CLOCK
BUTTON
11/08/01 09:07:13 31SZA630_303
Setting the Clock
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
2. Press the selector knob to select
the item which you want to adjust.
Each time you press the selector
knob, the selected item changes
between hours, minutes, SET and
EXIT. The selected item is
indicated with △ in the display.
296
3. Turn the selector knob to change
the setting between 12H and 24H,
and count the numbers up or down.
4. To enter the clock setting, press
the selector knob repeatedly to
select ‘‘SET’’ or ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press
the knob. The display will return
to the setup menu.
On vehicles with navigation system
The navigation system receives
signals from the global positioning
system (GPS), and the displayed
time is updated automatically by the
GPS. Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to adjust the time.
11/08/01 09:07:21 31SZA630_304
Setting the Language
EX-L models without navigation system
and Canadian LX models
Turn the selector knob to the
language you want, then press the
selector knob to change the display.
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
Press and release the RETURN
button to go back to the setup menu.
Features
EX-L and Canadian EX models
You can change the display language
to English, Spanish, or French. Press
the SETUP button to display the
setup menu. Turn the selector knob
to ‘‘Language’’ and press the selector
knob.
297
11/08/01 09:07:29 31SZA630_305
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Interface Dial
Most audio system functions can still
be controlled by standard buttons,
dials, and knobs, but some functions
can only be accessed using the
interface dial. The interface dial has
two parts, a dial and a selector.
ENTER
KNOB
SELECTOR
The dial turns left and right. Use it to
make selections or adjustments to a
list or menu on the screen.
The selector can be pushed left,
right, up, down, and in. Use the
selector to scroll through lists, to
select menus, and to highlight menu
items. When you make a selection,
press ENTER to go to that selection.
298
Voice Control System
The audio system, including the
music search feature Song By
VoiceTM, can be operated by voice
control. See the navigation system
manual for complete details.
11/08/01 09:07:36 31SZA630_306
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
AUDIO SCREEN
AM/FM
BUTTON
TITLE
BUTTON
With rear entertainment system
PRESET
BUTTONS
TUNE/SOUND
KNOB
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
Features
Without rear entertainment system
AM/FM
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
PRESET
BUTTONS
TUNE/SOUND
KNOB
SCAN
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
INTERFACE DIAL
299
11/08/01 09:07:47 31SZA630_307
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
To Play the FM/AM Radio
STEREO INDICATOR
BAND
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. Press the AUDIO button to
view the audio control display. Turn
the system on by pressing the
power/volume knob, the AM, or FM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the power/volume knob.
300
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are shown on
the display. To change bands, press
the AM/FM button. You can also
change bands by pushing the
interface selector up. Each time you
push it up, the band will change to
FM1, FM2 or AM. On the FM bands,
STEREO will be shown on the
navigation screen and ST on the
center display, if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, skip (seek), scan, the
preset buttons, and auto select.
TUNE
TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency. To tune with the
interface dial, push the selector
down, and turn the knob to TUNE.
Then press ENTER on the selector,
and turn the knob to the desired
frequency. To exit the TUNE mode,
press ENTER on the selector.
11/08/01 09:07:54 31SZA630_308
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
SKIP (SEEK) − The skip (seek)
function searches up and down from
the current frequency to find a
station with a strong signal. To
activate it, press either side (
or
) of the SKIP bar, then release
it.
To scan with the interface dial, push
the interface selector down, and turn
the interface dial to select Scan, then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
CONTINUED
301
Features
SCAN − The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds a
strong signal, it will stop and play
that station for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
11/08/01 09:08:07 31SZA630_309
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Preset − Each preset button or
preset icon can store one frequency
on AM and two frequencies on FM.
A.SEL on the screen and the system
goes into auto select mode for
several seconds.
A.SEL INDICATOR
The system stores the frequencies of
six AM and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons (icons).
To store a preset memory location:
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two sets of FM frequencies with
the preset buttons (on-screen
icons).
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Press the preset button, and hold
it until you hear a beep. You can
also store frequencies with the
interface dial. Select the preset
icon you want to store the
frequency on, then press ENTER
on the interface selector, and hold
it for more than 2 seconds.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
302
You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button (icon).
A.SEL
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling and can no longer receive
your preset stations, you can use the
auto select feature to find stations in
the local area.
Push the interface selector down to
display the AUDIO MENU. Turn the
interface dial to select A.SEL, then
press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface dial to
select ON, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will see
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons (icons) as previously
described.
To cancel auto select, select A.Sel on
the audio menu again and turn the
interface dial to select A.SEL OFF.
This restores the presets you
originally set.
11/08/01 09:08:16 31SZA630_310
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
For information on FM/AM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
389 .
Radio Data System (RDS)
On the FM band, you can select a
favorite station and display the
program service name provided by
the radio data system (RDS).
RDS INFO Display
Features
The RDS INFO display function
shows the name of the station you
are listening to. With the audio
system on and the FM band selected,
you can turn this function on or off.
RDS INFO MESSAGE
To switch the RDS INFO display
function on and off, press and
release the TITLE button. With the
system on, you will see the ‘‘RDS
INFO ON’’ message briefly on the
center display. If the station you are
listening to is an RDS station, the
displayed frequency switches to the
station name.
CONTINUED
303
11/08/01 09:08:32 31SZA630_311
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
If the station you are listening to is
not an RDS station, the audio screen
and the center display continue to
show the frequency.
Radio Data System (RDS) Category
When you turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button, the
center display shows ‘‘RDS INFO
OFF.’’
RDS SEARCH
On the FM band selected, you can
select the program type provided by
the RDS. Press the AUDIO button to
display the radio information on the
screen. Push down the interface
selector, then turn the interface dial
to select RDS search. Press ENTER
to set your selection. The principal
RDS categories are shown as
follows:
304
ALL: All RDS category stations
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music
COUNTRY: Country music
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
TOP 40: Top 40 hits
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
RELIGION: Programs concerned
with religion
CLASSIC: Classical music
JAZZ: Jazz
INFO: News, information, sports,
talk shows, foreign language,
personality, public, college, and
weather
TRAFFIC: Traffic information
11/08/01 09:08:39 31SZA630_312
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
RDS Category Search
Turn the interface dial to select an
RDS category. You can use the
search or scan function to find radio
stations on the selected RDS
category by pressing the interface
selector to the left or the right. Press
ENTER to set your selection.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ blinks for about five
seconds, then the system goes back
to the last selected station.
Features
RDS CATEGORY
This function searches up and down
for strong signal frequencies that
carry the selected RDS category
information. This can help you to
find a station in your favorite
category. To activate it, press and
release either side (
or
) of
the SKIP bar. You will also see the
selected RDS category name
blinking in the center display while
searching it. When the system finds
a station, the selected RDS category
name will be displayed again for
about 10 seconds, and the system
stops searching.
CONTINUED
305
11/08/01 09:08:49 31SZA630_313
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
SEEK/SCAN ICON (RDS Search mode)
Turn the interface dial to the desired
RDS category.
While the RDS category is selected,
move the interface selector to the
left or right to select SEEK up or
SEEK down in the upper right
corner of the screen. Press ENTER
to activate the RDS category search
(SEEK up/down).
RDS CATEGORY LIST
SEEK is selected.
To activate RDS category search
with the interface dial, push the
AUDIO button to display the FM
radio information on the screen.
Push the interface selector down,
and turn the interface dial to select
RDS search. Press ENTER on the
interface selector. The screen shows
you the RDS category list.
306
RDS Category SCAN
The scan function samples all
stations with strong signals on the
selected RDS category one by one.
You will also see the selected RDS
category name blinking in the
display while scanning it. When the
system finds one, it will stop and play
that station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ blinks for about 5
seconds on the navigation screen
and the display, and the system will
go back to the last selected station.
11/08/01 09:08:59 31SZA630_314
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
SEEK/SCAN ICON (RDS Search mode)
While the RDS category is selected,
move the interface selector to the
left or the right to select SCAN.
Then press ENTER to activate the
RDS SCAN.
Radio Text Display
This function displays the radio text
information of the selected RDS
station.
RDS CATEGORY LIST
SCAN is selected.
To activate RDS category scan with
the interface dial, push the AUDIO
button to display the FM radio
information on the screen. Push the
interface selector down, and turn the
interface dial to select RDS search
on the audio menu. Press ENTER on
the interface selector. The screen
shows you the RDS category list.
Turn the interface dial to the desired
RDS category.
CONTINUED
307
Features
If the selected RDS station has the
radio text information, you will see
the text indicator on the screen.
11/08/01 09:09:06 31SZA630_315
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
TEXT INDICATOR
READ RADIO TEXT
To activate radio text display, use
the interface dial. Push the interface
selector down, and turn the interface
dial to select Read Radio Text. Press
ENTER on the interface selector to
enter the setting.
308
The display shows up to 64
characters on the selected RDS
station.
11/08/01 09:09:15 31SZA630_316
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
These adjustments can be made with
the TUNE/SOUND knob or the
interface dial.
Features
Adjusting the Sound
BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and
FADER are each adjustable. You can
also adjust the strength of the sound
coming from the center and
subwoofer speakers. In addition, you
can set the Dolby PL (ProLogic) II
and Speed-sensitive volume
compensation (SVC).
SOUND SETUP
To adjust the sound, press the
AUDIO button, push the interface
selector down, and turn the interface
dial to Sound Setup. Then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Select the mode you want to adjust
by turning the interface dial then
press ENTER.
You can also adjust the sound by
turning the TUNE/SOUND knob.
Each mode is shown in the audio
display as it changes.
CONTINUED
309
11/08/01 09:09:23 31SZA630_317
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Turn the TUNE/SOUND knob or
interface knob to adjust the setting
to your liking. You can check the
level on the navigation screen or on
the center display. When the level
reaches the center, you will see ‘‘C’’
in the center display.
The system will return to the audio
playing mode in the center display
about 5 seconds after you stop
adjusting a mode.
If you do not make an adjustment
within 5 seconds, you will need to
select the mode again.
BASS/TREBLE − To adjust bass
and treble, select BASS or TREBLE,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. The current setting is
shown on the display. Turn the
interface knob to the desired level,
and enter your selection by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.
310
FADER/BALANCE − These
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
Fader adjusts the front-to-back
strength, while balance adjusts the
side-to-side strength. To adjust fader
and balance, select FADER or
BALANCE, then press ENTER on
the interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface knob to the desired
level, and enter your selection by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector. To equalize the fader or
balance, turn the interface knob until
the marks on the sound grid come to
the center of the adjustment bar.
CENTER/SUBWOOFER − To
adjust the strength of the sound
from the center or subwoofer
speaker, select it and press ENTER
on the interface selector. Turn the
interface knob to the desired level,
and enter your selection by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.
11/08/01 09:09:31 31SZA630_318
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
To set this feature on or off, select
Dolby PL II, and press ENTER on
the interface selector. Rotate the
interface dial to ON or OFF, and
press ENTER.
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro
Logic, and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
NOTE: In some audio playing modes
(XM, AUX), when DPLII is on, the
music coming from the rear
speakers may sound distorted. This
is due to compression of the music,
and it does not indicate a problem
with the setting.
Features
Dolby PL (ProLogic) II − Dolby
PL (ProLogic) II signal processing
creates multi-channel surround
sound from 2 channel stereo audio
sources. Dolby ProLogic II can only
be activated when listening to DISC
(CD-DA, MP3/WMA), XM Radio,
and AUX. When ProLogic II is active,
‘‘PL II’’ is shown in the audio display.
The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. To change the SVC mode,
select SVC, then press ENTER on
the interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface knob to the desired
level, and enter your selection by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector. If you feel the sound is too
loud, choose low. If you feel the
sound is too quiet, choose high.
311
11/08/01 09:09:39 31SZA630_319
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
AUDIO SCREEN
Without rear entertainment system
With rear entertainment system
XM
BUTTON
XM
BUTTON
TITLE
BUTTON
PRESET
BUTTONS
TITLE
BUTTON
PRESET
BUTTONS
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
TUNE KNOB
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
TUNE/SOUND
KNOB
CATEGORY
BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
CATEGORY
BAR
AUDIO
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
312
SCAN
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
11/08/01 09:09:49 31SZA630_320
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
XM Radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, highquality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM Radio
also allows you to view channel and
category selections in the audio
display.
Operating the XM Radio
Each time you push the interface
selector up, the band will change to
XM1 or XM2. Push the AUDIO
button to display XM information on
the screen. You can operate the XM
radio system with the interface dial.
Features
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM Radio anywhere in the United
States and Canada, except Hawaii,
Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM is a
registered trademark of Sirius XM
Radio , Inc. and XM CANADA is a
registered business name of
Canadian Satellite Radio Inc.
To listen to XM Radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position. Push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system, and press the
button. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
Adjust the volume by turning the
power/volume knob.
CONTINUED
313
11/08/01 09:09:58 31SZA630_321
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
MODE − To switch between the
category mode and channel mode,
push the interface selector down to
display AUDIO MENU, then turn
the interface dial to select Mode, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Turn the interface dial to select CH
or CAT, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. Move the
interface selector up to go back.
You can also switch the mode by
pressing the TITLE button for 3
seconds.
In the category mode, such as Jazz,
Rock, Classical, etc., you can
navigate through all of the channels
within that category. In the channel
mode, you can select all of the
available channels.
314
Each time you press and release the
TITLE button, the center display
changes in the following sequence:
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
TITLE (music title), and CHANNEL
NAME (channel name).
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
TUNE − Turn the TUNE knob to
change channel selections. Turn the
knob right for higher numbered
channels and left for lower
numbered channels. You can also
change channels with the interface
selector, push down the interface
selector to choose TUNE and press
ENTER on the selector. Turn the
interface knob to the same directions.
In the category mode, you can only
select channels within that category.
CHANNEL LIST − Push down the
interface selector to select AUDIO
MENU, then turn the interface dial
to select Channel List and press
ENTER on the selector. Turn the
interface dial to select a channel,
then press ENTER to set your
selection.
CATEGORY (− or +) − Press
either side of the bar to select
another category.
11/08/01 09:10:09 31SZA630_322
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
SCAN − The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button. The
system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, press the
button again.
Features
CHANNEL SCAN − This function
samples all channels. Push down the
interface selector to select AUDIO
MENU, then turn the interface dial
to select Channel Scan and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
XM BAND
CATEGORY SCAN − This
function samples the stations in the
selected category. Push down the
interface selector to select AUDIO
MENU, then turn the interface dial
to select Category Scan and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Preset − You can store up to 12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.
To store a channel:
button. Either
1. Press the
XM1 or XM2 will be shown on the
display.
CONTINUED
315
11/08/01 09:10:23 31SZA630_323
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
2. Use the tune, list, or scan function
to tune to a desired channel.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be
selected. In channel mode, all
channels can be selected.
3. Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the preset button until you hear a
beep. You can also pick the
number with the interface dial.
Select your desired number and
press and hold ENTER on the
interface selector.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
button or scroll
5. Press the
up again. The other XM band will
be shown. Store the next six
channels using steps 2 and 3.
316
Once a channel is stored, press
and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the
audio or program information.
‘‘UNAUTHORIZED’’ − The
encryption code is being updated.
Wait until the encryption code is
fully updated. Channels 0 and 1
should still work normally.
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
‘‘NO INFO’’ − The selected
channel has no artist or title
information at this time.
‘‘CHECK ANTENNA’’ − There is
a problem with the XM antenna.
Please consult your dealer.
‘‘UNAVAILABLE’’ − The selected
channel number does not exist, is
not part of your subscription, or this
channel has no artist or title
information at this time.
11/08/01 09:10:35 31SZA630_324
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles
to the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
SATELLITE
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Features
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas. Satellite signals
are more likely to be blocked by tall
buildings and mountains the farther
north you travel from the equator.
GROUND REPEATER
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
When DPLII is turned on (see page
311 ), sound coming from the rear
speakers may be distorted due to the
compression of the music being
broadcast. Turn DPLII off if this
happens.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
CONTINUED
317
11/08/01 09:10:45 31SZA630_325
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
This Category II radiocommunication
device complies with Industry Canada
Standard RSS-310.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM Radio
reception.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
318
Receiving XM Radio Service
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Radio. With the ignition
switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or the
ON (II) position, push the power/
volume knob to turn on the audio
system, and press the
button.
A variety of music types and styles
will play.
If you decide to purchase XM Radio
service, contact XM Radio at
www.siriusxm.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact
XM Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or at
1-877-209-0079. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE
knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Your I.D. will appear in the displays.
After you have registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
XM Radio mode while you wait for
activation. This should take about 30
minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. XM Radio
will continue to send an activation
signal to your vehicle for at least 12
hours from the activation request. If
the service has not been activated
after 36 hours, contact XM Radio.
In Canada, contact XM CANADA .
11/08/01 09:10:54 31SZA630_326
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
AUDIO SCREEN
DISC
SLOT
With rear entertainment system
CD BUTTON
TITLE
BUTTON
EJECT
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
CATEGORY
BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
AUDIO
BUTTON
Features
Without rear entertainment system
CD
BUTTON
DISC SLOT
TITLE
BUTTON
EJECT
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
CATEGORY
BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
AUDIO
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
INTERFACE DIAL
CONTINUED
319
11/08/01 09:11:08 31SZA630_327
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
To load or play a disc, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
The disc player can play these disc
formats:
CD (CD-DA, CD-TEXT)
CD-R/RW
MP3/WMA
The disc packages or jackets should
have one of these marks.
The disc player can also play CD-Rs
and CD-RWs compressed in MP3,
WMA or AAC formats.
NOTE:
If a file on WMA or AAC disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio
system skips to the next file.
Video CDs and DVD discs will not
work in this unit.
Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed
discs are not playable.
320
11/08/01 09:11:15 31SZA630_328
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
332 .
Features
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
To Load a Disc
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
in the rest of the way to play it. You
operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio.
The number of the current track is
shown in the display. When playing a
disc in MP3, WMA or AAC, the
numbers of the current folder and
file are shown. The system will
continuously play a disc until you
change modes.
321
11/08/01 09:11:21 31SZA630_329
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
To Play a Disc
Select the disc player by pressing the
CD button. The system will begin
playing the last selected track in the
disc. You will see the current track
position highlighted.
322
Title information will be displayed in
a list when the information is found
in the Gracenote Album Info
(Gracenote Media Database) on the
built-in hard disk drive. When you
play a CD recorded with text data,
you will see the genre, artist name,
album and track name on the screen.
When you play MP3/WMA/AAC
discs, you will see the folder name,
artist name, album name and track
name on the screen. If the disc was
not recorded with this information, it
will not be displayed.
Each time you press the TITLE
button, the center display changes
from artist name to album name, to
track name and then to normal
display that shows the track number
and the elapsed time. When playing
a disc in MP3/WMA/AAC, the
display mode changes from folder
name, to file name, to artist tag, to
album tag, to track tag, and then to
normal display.
11/08/01 09:11:33 31SZA630_330
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
To Change Tracks
Each time you press and release the
side of the skip bar, the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next track. Press and release the
side of the skip bar to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press the
side
again to skip to the previous track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold either side of the skip bar.
To Choose a Track
When you insert a CD for the first
time, the system automatically starts
recording to the hard disc. For
information on recording from music
CDs, see page 337 .
TRACK LIST
TRACK REPEAT INDICATOR
Features
When you insert a CD for the first
time, a Gracenote notification
appears. For more information, see
page 360 .
Track Repeat
You can also choose a track directly
from a track list. If there are no track
names, you will see ‘‘No Title’’
displayed. Turn the interface dial to
select the desired track, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
REPEAT OFF ICON
TRACK REPEAT ICON
To replay the current track
continuously, push the interface
selector down while playing a disc.
Turn the interface dial to select
Repeat on the AUDIO MENU, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface dial to
select Repeat icon, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
CONTINUED
323
11/08/01 09:11:42 31SZA630_331
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Random Play
TRACK RANDOM INDICATOR
Turn the interface dial to select the
track random icon, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector.
TRACK RANDOM ICON
This feature plays the tracks within a
disc in random order. When playing
MP3, WMA or AAC format discs, all
the tracks within the disc are played
in random order, regardless of the
configuration of the folder.
Push the interface selector down
while playing a disc. Turn the
interface dial to select Random on
the AUDIO MENU, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
324
11/08/01 09:11:52 31SZA630_332
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Turn the interface dial to select the
Scan icon, and press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will hear a 10second sampling of each track on the
disc. When you return to disc mode,
the disc will begin playing from
where it left off.
Track Scan
You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
change modes.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or the ignition
switch, play will continue at the same
point when you turn it back on.
The scan function samples all tracks
on the disc in the order they are
recorded on the disc.
To activate scan, press the SCAN
button, or push the interface selector
down while playing a disc. Turn the
interface dial to select Scan on the
AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER
on the interface selector.
325
Features
SCAN ICON
To turn this feature off, press the
SCAN button again, or turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. The system begins to play
the last track sampled.
To Stop Playing a Disc
To take the system out of the disc
mode, press one of the other source
buttons than the CD button.
11/08/01 09:12:01 31SZA630_333
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Playing an MP3/WMA/AAC Disc
The CD player can play CD-Rs and
CD-RWs compressed in MP3, WMA
or AAC formats. When playing a disc
in MP3, WMA or AAC, you will see
‘‘MP3,’’ ‘‘WMA’’ or ‘‘AAC’’ on the
center display and screen (if
selected). A disc can support more
than 99 folders, and each folder can
hold up to 255 playable files.
NOTE:
Combining a low sampling frequency
with a low bitrate may result in
extremely degraded sound quality.
To play an MP3/WMA/AAC disc,
use the disc controls previously
described, along with the following
information.
Depending on the software the files
were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or display
some text data.
326
Changing the Folders
Each time you press either side of
the bar, the folder title and its first
file’s information appear on the
center display. On the navigation
display, each time you press either
side of the bar, the system skips to
the previous or next folder on the
disc and displays a list of the
selected folder’s contents.
11/08/01 09:12:15 31SZA630_334
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Folder Repeat
Changing and Selecting the Folders/
Files
FOLDER REPEAT INDICATOR
REPEAT OFF ICON
Features
FOLDER REPEAT ICON
FOLDER LIST
FILE LIST
Using the interface selector, you can
see the list of all the folders within a
disc. While playing an MP3/WMA/
AAC disc, push the interface selector
up. The folder list in the currently
playing disc will appear on the screen.
Select a desired folder by turning the
interface dial, then press ENTER.
The screen will change to the file list.
Select a desired file and press
ENTER. The selected file begins to
play.
If the root folder has some additional
folders in the lower layer, they will
be listed on the screen.
To change a file, turn the interface
dial to select a desired file, then
press ENTER.
This feature, when activated, replays
all files on the selected folder in the
order they are compressed. To
activate folder repeat play, push the
interface selector down while playing
a disc. Turn the interface dial to
select Repeat on the AUDIO MENU,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface dial to
select the folder repeat icon, and
press ENTER on the interface
CONTINUED
selector.
327
11/08/01 09:12:23 31SZA630_335
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Folder Random
FOLDER RANDOM INDICATOR
FOLDER RANDOM ICON
This feature, when activated, plays
all files in the current folder in
random order. To activate folder
random play, push the interface
selector down while playing a disc.
Turn the interface dial to select
Random on the AUDIO MENU, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface dial to
select the folder random icon, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
328
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select OFF icon, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
11/08/01 09:12:33 31SZA630_336
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
the remaining files.
File Scan
SCAN OFF ICON
This feature samples all files in the
selected folder in the order they are
stored. To activate this feature, press
the SCAN button. You can also
select the SCAN icon with the
interface dial. Push the selector
down, turn the dial to select Scan on
the AUDIO MENU, then press
ENTER. Turn the dial to select the
scan icon, then press ENTER. The
system begins to play a file for about
10 seconds, and continues to sample
CONTINUED
329
Features
FILE SCAN ICON
FOLDER SCAN ICON
To turn this feature off, press and
hold the SCAN button for more than
2 seconds, or turn the interface dial
to select the OFF icon, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Folder Scan
This feature, when activated,
samples the first file of each folder
for 10 seconds. To scan a folder,
press the SCAN button repeatedly.
Or, push the interface selector down
while playing a disc. Turn the
interface dial to select Scan on the
AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER
on the interface selector. Turn the
interface dial to select the folder
scan icon, and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
11/08/01 09:12:42 31SZA630_337
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
The system plays the first file in the
first folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
play the first files in the next folders
for 10 seconds. After playing the first
file in the last folder, the system
plays normally.
To turn this feature off, press the
SCAN button again, or turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. The system begins to play
the last track sampled.
NOTE:
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan to folder scan, then to
normal play.
330
Removing a Disc from the Player
To remove the disc, press the eject
(
) button.
If you do not remove the disc from
the slot, the system will reload the
disc after 10 seconds. The disc starts
playing automatically.
Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect discs, see page 332 .
11/08/01 09:12:51 31SZA630_338
Disc Player Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
center display while playing a disc.
Error Message
HEAT ERROR
For additional information on
damaged discs, see page 333 .
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
UNSUPPORTED
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL
High Temperature
Track/File format not
supported
Mechanical Error
Servo Error
Solution
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 333). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
331
Features
If you see an error message in the
center display while playing a disc,
press the eject button. After ejecting
the disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
Cause
11/08/01 09:13:04 31SZA630_339
Protecting Your Discs
General Information
When using CD-R discs, use only
high quality discs labeled for audio
use.
When recording a CD-R, the
recording must be closed for it to
be used.
CD-RW discs will not work in this
unit.
Play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the
drive or cause other problems.
Handle your discs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
Protecting Discs
When a disc is not being played,
store it in its case to protect it from
dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
A new disc may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the
recording surface of the disc,
causing skipping or other problems.
Remove these pieces by rubbing the
inner and outer edges with the side
of a pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc player.
332
Handle a disc by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
These, along with contamination
from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
pens, can cause the disc to not play
properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
11/08/01 09:13:18 31SZA630_340
Protecting Your Discs
Examples of these discs are shown
to the right:
1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
With Label/
Sticker
2. Damaged discs
Chipped/
Cracked
Using Printer
Label Kit
Sealed
With Plastic
Ring
3. Poor quality discs
Warped
Burrs
CONTINUED
333
Features
Additional Information on
Recommended Discs
The in-dash disc player has a
sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
may become stuck inside and
damage the audio unit.
11/08/01 09:13:32 31SZA630_341
Protecting Your Discs
4. Small, irregular shaped discs
3-inch (8-cm) CD
5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs
Triangle Shape
Fingerprints, scratches, etc.
Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
Audio unit may not play the
following formats.
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due
to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the
discs may cause the sound to skip.
This audio unit cannot play a Dualdisc .
Can Shape
334
Arrow Shape
11/08/01 09:13:42 31SZA630_342
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
AUDIO SCREEN
DISC
SLOT
TITLE
BUTTON
With rear entertainment system
HDD
BUTTON
EJECT
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
CATEGORY
BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
CANCEL
BUTTON
INFO
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
Features
Without rear entertainment system
HDD
BUTTON
TITLE
BUTTON
EJECT
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
DISC SLOT
CATEGORY
BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
CANCEL
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
INFO
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
CONTINUED
335
11/08/01 09:13:53 31SZA630_343
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
The Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
function can record tracks from
music CDs to the navigation system’s
hard disc. This function also allows
for various playing methods, such as
playing recorded tracks on an artistby-artist or genre-by-genre basis. For
example, you can play the tracks that
you want to listen to in any order
that you like for each playlist.
NOTE:
Only recordings from a standard
CD-DA (44.1 kHz, 16 bit stereo
PCM digital sound data) to HDD
are supported.
Digital music files, such as MP3,
WMA, AAC etc., in CD-R, DVD-R
and USB flash memory devices
cannot be copied to HDD.
Likewise, digital music files
recorded to HDD cannot be copied
to CD-R, DVD-R and USB devices.
336
Music data recorded on HDD can
only be used for personal
enjoyment.
Data is recorded using ultraefficient compression technology,
therefore, sound quality may vary
slightly from the original.
Title information will be displayed
when the information is found in
the Gracenote Album Info
(Gracenote Media Database) on
the built-in hard disk drive. See
page 360 .
Recording function from following
media is not supported.
−CD-DA which prohibits the
copying by SCMS
−CD-DA with copy control
−SACD (Super Audio CD)
−DTS-CD
−DVD-A
−CD-R/RW
−DVD-R/RW
−Copy controlled CDs (Playback
cannot be guaranteed)
−DTS-CDs (Only enabled for
playback)
If the HDD is ever replaced, all data
will be lost and stored music will not
be recovered.
11/08/01 09:14:09 31SZA630_344
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Playlists
Playlists are track lists in a certain
playback group.
User Playlist
The HDD has six playlist folders for
user customizing. Each playlist can
be edited by the user, and will store
up to 999 songs. For more
information on how to edit the user
playlist, see page 349 .
There are six categories:
Album record date: Album titles are
arranged by date of recording.
Album: Album names are arranged
in alphabetical order.
Artist: Artist names are arranged in
alphabetical order.
Genre: Songs are arranged by genre.
Playlist: Any of six playlists that are
arranged by the user.
Track: Track titles are arranged in
alphabetical order.
For more information on how to
search for music on the HDD, see
page 344 .
Recording a Music CD to HDD
Audio
If you play a music CD that has not
yet been recorded on the HDD, the
system will automatically begin
recording to the HDD once the disc
is loaded. To turn this feature off,
see page 339 .
CONTINUED
337
Features
Original Playlist
This playlist is automatically
generated when the music CD is
recorded. The maximum number
of original playlists that can be
stored to the HDD is 999, with 99
songs on each playlist. Each album
name on the music CD is counted
as a playlist.
Track Search Methods
Songs that have been recorded on
the HDD are categorized in groups
for easy searching.
11/08/01 09:14:22 31SZA630_345
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
REC DONE ICON
NOTE:
Please note that there will be no
compensation offered in the case
of unsuccessful recording of audio
data or the loss of audio data due
to any cause whatsoever.
During recording, operation of this
product may be slower.
REC READY ICON
REC ICON
The icons show the recording
conditions for each track:
Rec icon: Now recording
Rec ready icon: Next to be recorded
Rec done icon: Recording finished
If you stop the engine or the
power system is turned off while
recording a CD, there may be
pauses between songs when you
play back from the HDD.
Tracks from music CDs are
recorded at four times the
playback speed. You can listen to
tracks as they are being recorded.
Forward/rewind, repeat, random
and scan functions are not
available during recording.
338
You can listen to tracks from other
playlists that have already been
recorded while recording. Press
the HDD button and switch over
to HDD Audio.
With the factory settings, all of the
songs on a music CD are
automatically recorded.
Recording settings cannot be
changed during recording.
If the number of songs in the
playlist exceeds 999, the oldest
song will be overwritten each time
you add a new song.
11/08/01 09:14:34 31SZA630_346
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
To Cancel Recording a Music CD
to HDD
In order to suspend recording, push
the interface selector down, select
Cancel CD Recording, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Changing the Recording Settings
Recording a Track on a Music CD
Manually
Features
HDD SETUP
To change the setting to manual
mode, push the interface selector
down on the HDD screen. Turn the
interface dial to select HDD Setup
and press ENTER.
CD Recording
Turn the dial to select CD Recording
and press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Turn the interface dial to select
MANUAL and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
Push down the interface selector to
go back to the audio screen.
CONTINUED
339
11/08/01 09:14:45 31SZA630_347
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
To Record a Track Manually
Recording All of the Tracks on a
Music CD Automatically
To change the setting to
automatically record all of the tracks
on a music CD, move the interface
selector down on the HDD Audio
screen. Turn the interface dial to
select HDD Setup, and press ENTER
on the interface selector.
Record CD
Select a track to record from the
music CD, push the CD button, then
push the interface selector down to
display the audio menu. Turn the
interface dial to select Record CD,
and then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
340
Turn the dial to select CD Recording
and press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Turn the interface dial to select
AUTO, and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
Playing Tracks on HDD
To play tracks on HDD, push the
HDD button until the HDD Audio
screen appears. Playback will start
automatically with the track
previously selected.
11/08/01 09:15:00 31SZA630_348
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Changing a Track/Tracklist
To change a track or tracklist*, press
on the Category bar or the Skip bar.
Category Bar
−
* : The tracklist has six search
mode categories: album, artist,
track, playlist, genre, and album
record date. Within the selected
category, the tracklist will be
changed with the category bar.
Repeat Playback
Returns to the beginning of the
song that is being played.
Otherwise, the previous track is
selected. If you press this bar
during the first song, the last song
is selected.
The next song is selected. If you
press this bar during the last song,
the first song is selected.
Fast Forwarding and Rewinding
To fast forward, press and hold the
side of the SKIP bar. To
rewind, press and hold the
side
of the SKIP bar.
REPEAT OFF ICON
Features
+
The next tracklist is selected.
If you press + during the last
tracklist, the first tracklist is
selected.
The previous tracklist is selected.
If you press − during the first
tracklist, the last tracklist is
selected.
Skip Bar
REPEAT ICON
To replay the current track
continuously, push the interface
selector down during track playback.
Turn the interface dial to select
Repeat on the HDD AUDIO MENU,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface dial to
select the repeat icon, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
CONTINUED
341
11/08/01 09:15:08 31SZA630_349
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon,
then press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Random Playback
RANDOM OFF ICON
Turn the interface dial to select the
track random icon, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon,
then press ENTER on the interface
selector.
RANDOM ICON
This function plays tracks in the
current search mode in random
order. To activate random play, push
the interface selector down during
track playback. Turn the interface
dial to select Random on the HDD
AUDIO MENU. Press ENTER on
the interface selector.
342
11/08/01 09:15:19 31SZA630_350
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Turn the interface dial to select the
scan icon. Press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will hear a 10second sampling of each track in the
current search mode.
Scan Playback
SCAN OFF ICON
SCAN ICON
This function samples the tracks in
the current search mode in the order
that they were recorded.
To turn this feature off, press the
SCAN button again, or turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. The system begins to play
the last track sampled.
To activate scan, push the interface
selector down during track playback.
Turn the interface dial to select Scan
on the HDD AUDIO MENU, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
CONTINUED
343
Features
You can also select the scan feature
with the SCAN button on the control
panel. Press and release the SCAN
button.
Making a User Playlist
The HDD has two types of the
playlists: original playlist and user
playlist. On the original playlist, the
music CD is recorded automatically
when it is played. In addition, you
can create up to six user playlists on
the HDD. In each playlist, you can
store a desired music data from the
original playlists or music CDs.
11/08/01 09:15:30 31SZA630_351
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Searching the Music
While playing music in the HDD
playback screen, push the interface
selector up to select MUSIC
SEARCH. You can search a track by
album, artist, track, playlist, genre,
or album record date, or you can
shuffle all tracks.
Adding a Track to an Original/User
Playlist
The audio system, including the
music search feature Song By
VoiceTM, can be operated by voice
control. See the navigation system
manual for complete details.
While a track is playing on an
Original Playlist or User Playlist
Playback screen, push the interface
selector down. Turn the interface
dial and select Add to Playlist, then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
On the Playlist screen, turn the
interface dial and select the Playlist
to which the song is to be added,
then press ENTER on the interface
selector. You will be returned to the
Playback screen.
After storing music data, you can
customize the original and user
playlists (see page 349 ).
344
11/08/01 09:15:42 31SZA630_352
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Searching Music by Album
ALPHABET TAG
Turn the interface dial to select the
album you want to listen to, then
press ENTER on the selector.
The first track on the selected album
begins to play.
Features
Push the selector down.
RANDOM ALL TRACKS
Shuffles the playback of all tracks
that have been recorded on HDD.
To shuffle all tracks, push the
interface selector up to display the
‘‘Search music by’’ screen, and then
push the interface selector down.
Shuffled playback begins.
Push the interface selector up to
display the ‘‘Search music by’’ screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
‘‘Albums.’’ Press ENTER on the
selector, and the album list will be
displayed in alphabetical order.
If you push the interface selector
right or left, you can change the
alphabet tag.
345
11/08/01 09:15:51 31SZA630_353
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Searching Music by Artist
If you push the interface selector
right or left, you can change the
alphabet tag.
Searching Music by Track
Turn the interface dial to select the
artist you want to listen to, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
The first track on the selected artist
begins to play.
Push the interface selector up to
display the Search music by screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
‘‘Artists.’’ Press ENTER on the
interface selector, and the artist list
will be displayed in alphabetical
order.
346
Push the interface selector up to
display the Search music by screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
‘‘Tracks.’’ Press ENTER on the
interface selector, and the track list
will be displayed in alphabetical
order.
11/08/01 09:16:00 31SZA630_354
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
If you push the interface selector
right or left, you can change the
alphabet tag.
Searching Music by Playlists
Turn the interface dial to select a
track you want to listen to, then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Turn the interface dial to select the
playlist you want to listen to, then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
The first track on the selected
playlist begins to play.
Features
The selected track begins to play.
Push the interface selector up to
display the Search music by screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
‘‘Playlists.’’ Press ENTER on the
interface selector then the playlist
will be displayed.
347
11/08/01 09:16:09 31SZA630_355
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Searching Music by Genre
The first track on the selected genre
begins to play.
Searching Music by Album
Record Date
RECORDED DATE
Push the interface selector up to
display the Search music by screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
‘‘Genres.’’ Press ENTER on the
interface selector, and the genre list
will be displayed.
Turn the interface dial to select the
genre you want to listen to, and then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
348
Push the interface selector up to
display the Search music by screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
Album Record Date. Press ENTER
on the interface selector. The album
list will be displayed.
Turn the interface dial to select the
album you want to listen to, then
press ENTER on the selector.
11/08/01 09:16:19 31SZA630_356
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
The first track on the selected album
begins to play.
You cannot change the artist name,
original play list name (album name),
track name, and music genre unless
you change them on the original play
list.
Changing the Order of Tracks of the
Original Playlist or User Playlist
1. On the HDD audio screen, push
up the interface selector to select
MUSIC SEARCH. Select Albums
or Playlists by turning the
interface dial, then press ENTER.
2. Turn the interface dial to select
the album list or the playlist, then
press ENTER.
3. Push the interface selector down
to display the AUDIO MENU for
the playlist.
CONTINUED
349
Features
Customizing Original/User
Playlist
After storing the data, you can
change some items: name of an artist,
play list name, track title, music
genre, order of the tracks on the
original/user playlist. You can also
delete the track or the album from
the playlist.
11/08/01 09:16:29 31SZA630_357
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
7. Turn the interface dial to select
where the track is to be moved,
then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
8. Push the interface selector down
to return to the Edit Music Info.
screen.
9. Push the CANCEL button or the
AUDIO button. The screen
returns to the playlist.
4. Turn the interface dial and select
‘‘Edit Music Info.,’’ then press
ENTER.
5. Turn the interface dial to select
Edit Track Order, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
6. Turn the interface dial to select
the track to be moved, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
350
11/08/01 09:16:40 31SZA630_358
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Changing the Artist Name of the
Original Playlist
1. While a track is playing on an
‘‘Original Playlist Playback’’ screen,
push the interface selector down.
Features
2. Turn the interface dial and select
‘‘Edit Music Info.,’’ then press
ENTER.
3. Turn the interface dial to select
Edit Artist Name, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
4. On the ‘‘Edit an artist name’’
screen, input the new artist name.
Select a letter by turning the
interface dial, then press ENTER.
5. After inputting the name, push the
interface selector down to select
OK.
CONTINUED
351
11/08/01 09:16:49 31SZA630_359
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
7. You will be returned to the ‘‘Edit
music Info.’’ screen.
8. Push the CANCEL button or the
AUDIO button. The screen
returns to the playlist.
6. The ‘‘Select an edit option’’ screen
is displayed. Choose if you would
like to apply the new name to both
the album artist and/or the track
artist. Select your edit option by
turning the dial, then press
ENTER.
352
Changing the Name of the Original
Playlist or User Playlist
1. Select a desired playlist to change
the user playlist name, or a desired
album to change the original
playlist name (album name). Refer
to the Music Search function on
page 344 for how to select a
playlist or an album. Push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU for a selected
playlist or album.
2. Turn the interface dial and select
‘‘Edit Music Info.,’’ then press
ENTER.
11/08/01 09:17:02 31SZA630_360
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Changing the Track Name of the
Original Playlist
1. While a track is playing on an
‘‘Original Playlist Playback’’ screen,
push the interface selector down.
3. On the ‘‘Edit music Info.’’ screen,
turn the interface dial to select
Edit Album Name (or Edit Playlist
Name to edit user playlist), then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
4. On the ‘‘Edit an album name’’
screen, input the new Original
Playlist name or User Playlist
name.
5. After inputting the name, push the
interface selector down to select
OK.
6. You will be returned to the ‘‘Edit
music Info.’’ screen.
7. Push the CANCEL button or the
AUDIO button. The screen
returns to the playlist.
CONTINUED
353
Features
2. Turn the interface dial and select
‘‘Edit Music Info.,’’ then press
ENTER.
11/08/01 09:17:13 31SZA630_361
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Changing the Musical Genre
1. While a track is playing on an
‘‘Original Playlist Playback’’ screen,
push the interface selector down.
2. Turn the interface dial and select
‘‘Edit Music Info.,’’ then press
ENTER.
3. On the ‘‘Edit music Info.’’ screen,
turn the interface dial to select
Edit Track Name, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
4. On the ‘‘Edit a track name’’ screen,
input the new track name.
5. After inputting the name, push the
interface selector down to select
OK.
6. You will be returned to the ‘‘Edit
music Info.’’ screen.
7. Push the CANCEL button or the
AUDIO button. The screen
returns to the playlist.
354
11/08/01 09:17:22 31SZA630_362
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
5. Turn the interface dial on the
‘‘Select a genre’’ screen to select
the Original Playlist that you want
to change the genre and then
press ENTER on the interface
selector. You will be returned to
the ‘‘Edit music Info.’’ screen.
3. Turn the interface dial to select
Edit Genre, then press ENTER on
the interface selector in ‘‘Select a
genre’’ screen.
4. On the ‘‘Select a genre’’ screen,
turn the interface dial and select
genre, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
355
Features
6. Push the CANCEL button or the
AUDIO button. The screen
returns to the playlist.
11/08/01 09:17:31 31SZA630_363
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Deleting an Album or Playlist
1. On the HDD playback screen of
the album in which you want to
delete, push the interface selector
down to display the AUDIO
MENU.
NOTE:
When you delete the Original
Playlist, any tracks stored in a
User Playlist are also deleted.
Even if all the tracks are deleted
from the User Playlist, the data
folder for that playlist cannot be
deleted, and their names (playlist
and artist) are left. You can store
tracks again on that playlist.
2. Turn the interface dial and select
‘‘Edit Music Info.,’’ then press
ENTER.
3. On the ‘‘Edit music Info.’’ screen,
turn the interface dial and select
Delete Album (or Delete Playlist),
then press ENTER.
4. The Confirmation is displayed.
Select OK and then press ENTER.
You will be returned to the
playback screen for the Original
Playlist or User Playlist.
356
11/08/01 09:17:40 31SZA630_364
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Deleting a Track
1. Select the track with the interface
dial from the playback screen
while it is playing. Push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
NOTE:
When you delete a track from the
Original Playlist, the track is also
deleted from the User Playlist in
which the deleted track was
stored.
Even if all the tracks are deleted
from the User Playlist, the data
folder for that playlist cannot be
deleted, and their names (playlist
and artist) are left. You can store
tracks again on that playlist.
3. The ‘‘Edit music Info.’’ screen is
displayed. Select Delete Track and
press ENTER.
4. Select OK to confirm you want to
delete the track. You will be
returned to the Playback screen
for the Original Playlist or User
Playlist.
357
Features
2. Turn the interface dial and select
‘‘Edit Music Info.,’’ then press
ENTER.
11/08/01 09:17:54 31SZA630_365
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Acquiring Title Information
1. Push the interface selector down
to display the AUDIO MENU.
Checking HDD Audio Capacity
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
REMAINING CAPACITY
2. Turn the interface dial and select
Get Music Info., then press
ENTER.
3. On the ‘‘Select an Album’’ screen,
turn the interface dial and select
the title information for the
Original Playlist, then press
ENTER. You will be returned to
the ‘‘Audio Menu’’ screen.
NOTE:
Consult your dealer, or visit
www.honda.com (in U.S.), or
www.honda.ca (in Canada), to acquire
updated files.
VERSION
You can check the HDD Audio
capacity and remaining space as well
as the Gracenote Music Recognition
Service (CDDB) version included
with the navigation system on the
HDD Setup screen.
To check the HDD audio capacity,
push the interface selector down to
display the AUDIO MENU. Turn the
interface dial to select HDD Setup,
then press ENTER.
358
Updating Gracenote Album Info
(Gracenote Media Database)
You can update the Gracenote
Album Info (Gracenote Media
Database) that is included with the
navigation system.
1. Insert the update disc into the disc
slot, or connect the USB flash
memory device that includes the
update.
11/08/01 09:18:11 31SZA630_366
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
4. Turn the interface dial and select
Gracenote Info. Update, then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
6. Turn the dial to select Yes on the
confirmation screen, and the
update will start.
2. Push the interface selector down
to select AUDIO MENU in the
HDD playback screen or CD
playback screen.
3. Turn the interface dial to select
HDD Setup, then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
1. Press the INFO button, rotate the
interface dial to select ‘‘Set up,’’
and press ENTER.
2. Move the interface selector to the
right to navigate to the ‘‘Set up
(Other)’’ screen.
7. Turn the interface dial to select
OK on the confirmation screen.
3. On the ‘‘Set up (Other)’’ screen,
rotate the interface dial to select
‘‘Clear Personal Data,’’ and press
ENTER.
8. After updating is complete, press
ENTER on the confirmation
screen.
4. Select the item you wish to delete.
NOTE:
Once you perform an update, any
information you edited before will be
overwritten.
CONTINUED
359
Features
5. Turn the dial to select USB or
DISC on the Update Gracenote by
screen, then press ENTER on the
selector.
Clearing the HDD
Any music, data, calendar entries,
etc. that have been stored on the
HDD can be deleted.
11/08/01 09:18:21 31SZA630_367
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
5. A pop-up screen verifying whether
the deletion is to be continued or
not will be displayed. Select Yes to
delete, or No to cancel.
6. A second confirmation will appear.
Select Yes to delete, or No to
cancel.
7. When you are finished deleting
the data, press the interface
selector down to select ‘‘Done.’’
NOTE: If you select ‘‘Music on HDD,’’
the system will automatically restart
after deletion.
360
Gracenote Music Recognition
Service (CDDB)
Music recognition technology and
related data are provided by
Gracenote . Gracenote is the
industry standard in music
recognition technology and related
content delivery. For more
information visit www.gracenote.
com.
When music is recorded to the HDD
from a CD, information such as the
recording artist and track name are
retrieved from the Gracenote
Database and displayed (when
available). Gracenote may not
contain information for all albums.
Gracenote is an internet-based music
recognition service that allows artist,
album, and track information from
CDs to display on the HDD. More
information about Gracenote is
available at www.honda.com (in U.S.)
or www.honda.ca (in Canada).
11/08/01 09:18:30 31SZA630_368
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Gracenote End User License
Agreement
This application or device contains
software from Gracenote, Inc. of
Emeryville, California (‘‘Gracenote’’).
The software from Gracenote (the
‘‘Gracenote Software’’) enables this
application to perform disc and/or
file identification and obtain musicrelated information, including name,
artist, track, and title information
(‘‘Gracenote Data’’) from online
servers or embedded databases
(collectively, ‘‘Gracenote Servers’’)
and to perform other functions. You
may use Gracenote Data only by
means of the intended End-User
functions of this application or device.
You agree that you will use
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers for
your own personal non-commercial
use only.
You agree not to assign, copy,
transfer or transmit the Gracenote
Software or any Gracenote Data to
any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA,
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE,
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive
license to use the Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if
you violate these restrictions. If your
license terminates, you agree to
cease any and all use of the
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers.
CONTINUED
361
Features
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright 2000 to
present Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright 2000 to present
Gracenote. One or more patents
owned by Gracenote apply to this
product and service. See the
Gracenote website for a nonexhaustive list of applicable
Gracenote patents. Gracenote,
CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the
Gracenote logo and logotype, and
the ‘‘Powered by Gracenote’’ logo are
either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Gracenote in the
United States and/or other countries.
11/08/01 09:18:38 31SZA630_369
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Gracenote reserves all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers,
including all ownership rights. Under
no circumstances will Gracenote
become liable for any payment to
you for any information that you
provide. You agree that Gracenote,
Inc. may enforce its rights under this
Agreement against you directly in its
own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for
statistical purposes. The purpose of a
randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote
service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are.
For more information, see the web
page for the Gracenote Privacy
Policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each
item of Gracenote Data are licensed
to you ‘‘AS IS.’’
362
Gracenote makes no representations
or warranties, express or implied,
regarding the accuracy of any
Gracenote Data from in the
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote
reserves the right to delete data
from the Gracenote Servers or to
change data categories for any cause
that Gracenote deems sufficient. No
warranty is made that the Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers are
error-free or that functioning of
Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Servers will be uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide
you with new enhanced or additional
data types or categories that
Gracenote may provide in the future
and is free to discontinue its services
at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE
DOES NOT WARRANT THE
RESULTS THAT WILL BE
OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER.
IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE
BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
REVENUES.
Copyright 2000 to present
Gracenote
11/08/01 09:18:47 31SZA630_370
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
ALBUM ART
AUDIO SCREEN
With rear entertainment system
USB/AUX
BUTTON
USB/AUX
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
SKIP BAR
SKIP BAR
CANCEL
BUTTON
CANCEL
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
Features
Without rear entertainment system
INTERFACE DIAL
363
11/08/01 09:18:57 31SZA630_371
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
To Play an iPod
This audio system can select and
play the audio files on the iPod with
the same controls used for the indash disc player. To play an iPod,
connect it to the USB adapter cable
in the console compartment by using
your dock connector, then press the
USB/AUX button. The ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position. The iPod will
also be charged with the ignition
switch in these settings.
The audio system reads and plays
playable sound files on the iPod. The
system cannot operate an iPod as a
mass storage device. The system will
only play songs stored on the iPod
with iTunes.
iPod and iTunes are registered
trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
Voice Control System
You can select the AUX mode by
using the voice control buttons.
The audio system, including the
music search feature Song By
VoiceTM, can be operated by voice
control. See the navigation system
manual for complete details.
iPods compatible with your audio
system using the USB adapter cable
are:
364
Model
iPod 5th
generation
iPod classic
iPod nano
1st generation
iPod nano
2nd generation
iPod nano
3rd generation
iPod nano
4th generation
iPod touch
1st generation
iPod touch
2nd generation
iPhone
iPhone 3G
iPhone 3GS
Software
Ver. 1.3 or more
Ver. 1.1.2 or more
Ver. 1.3.1 or more
Ver. 1.1.3 or more
Ver. 1.1.3 or more
Ver. 1.0.4 or more
Ver. 1.1.1 or more
Ver. 2.2.1 or more
Ver. 2.1.0 or more
Ver. 2.1.0 or more
Ver. 5.12.1 or more
11/08/01 09:19:10 31SZA630_372
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
Use only compatible iPods with the
latest software. iPods that are not
compatible will not work in this audio
unit.
USB ADAPTER CABLE
DOCK CONNECTOR
Features
NOTE:
Do not connect your iPod using a
hub.
Do not keep the iPod and dock
connector cable in the vehicle.
Direct sunlight and high heat will
damage it.
Do not use an extension cable
between the USB adapter cable
equipped with your vehicle and
your dock connector.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing it.
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.
Connecting an iPod
USB CONNECTOR
1. Unclip the USB connector by
pivoting it, and pull out the USB
adapter cable in the console
compartment.
USB ADAPTER CABLE
2. Connect your dock connector to
the iPod correctly and securely.
3. Install the dock connector to the
USB adapter cable securely.
CONTINUED
365
11/08/01 09:19:21 31SZA630_373
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
If the iPod indicator does not appear
in the audio display, check the
connections, and try to reconnect the
iPod a few times.
If the audio system still does not
recognize the iPod, the iPod may
need to be reset. Follow the
instructions that came with your
iPod, or you can find reset
instructions online at www.apple.com/
The current file number and total of
the selected playable files are
displayed in the center display.
Pressing the AUDIO button displays
the artist, album and track (file)
names on the navigation screen.
If a file on your iPod has an album
art, it will be shown in the display.
366
To Change or Select Files
Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is
playing to select passages and
change files.
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the
side of the bar
to skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within playing track,
press and hold either side (
or
) of the SKIP bar.
You can also select a track from any
category on the list: Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Songs, Genres, Composers
and Podcasts by using the interface
dial.
Push the interface selector up to
display the Music Search screen.
Turn the interface dial to select a
desired search method.
11/08/01 09:19:31 31SZA630_374
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on the artists list,
the albums list is displayed.
Push the interface selector down to
‘‘PLAY ALL’’ on any list. All available
files on the selected list are played.
Press ENTER on the interface
selector to display the items on that
list, then turn the interface dial to
make a selection. Press ENTER to
set your selection.
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on the albums
list, all the tracks become available
for selection.
The track order that appears at this
time varies depending on the iPod
model and software.
CONTINUED
367
Features
Press the AUDIO button to go back
to the normal audio playing display.
Pressing the CANCEL button goes
back to the previous screen, and
pressing the MAP/GUIDE button
cancels the audio control display on
the screen.
11/08/01 09:19:42 31SZA630_375
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
REPEAT
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Repeat icon and press ENTER.
Playback of the track that is
currently being played will be
repeated.
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Repeat
OFF icon, and then press ENTER.
SHUFFLE ICON
REPEAT − This feature
continuously plays a file.
1. Press the AUDIO button to display
the audio control screen, then
push the interface selector down
to display the AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial, select
Repeat, and press ENTER.
368
SHUFFLE − This feature shuffles
playback of tracks contained within
the iPod. This function can be
established at the same time that
Repeat Playback is set up.
1. On the iPod screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
11/08/01 09:19:54 31SZA630_376
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
2. Turn the interface dial, select
Shuffle and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Shuffle icon and press ENTER on
the interface selector.
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Album Shuffle icon and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Shuffle playback of the album will
begin.
Shuffle playback will begin. To
cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Shuffle
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
ALBUM SHUFFLE ICON
ALBUM SHUFFLE − Shuffles
playback of all available albums,
which are selected by the desired
list: playlists, artists, albums or songs.
This function can be selected at the
same time that Repeat Playback is
setup.
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Shuffle
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
NOTE:
Available operating functions vary on
models or versions. Some functions
may not be available on the vehicle’s
audio system.
1. On the iPod screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
369
Features
2. Turn the interface dial, select
Shuffle and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
11/08/01 09:20:04 31SZA630_377
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
To Stop Playing Your iPod
To take the system out of the iPod
mode, press one of the other source
buttons than the USB/AUX button.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the auxiliary input jack,
press the USB/AUX button to select
it.
* : The displayed message may
vary on models or versions. On
some models, there is no
message to disconnect.
You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
change modes.
If you reconnect the same iPod, the
system may begin playing where it
left off, depending on what mode the
iPod is in when it is reconnected.
Disconnecting an iPod
You can disconnect the iPod at any
time when you see the ‘‘OK to
disconnect’’ message* in the iPod
display. Always make sure you see
the ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in
the iPod display before you
disconnect it. Make sure to follow
the iPod’s instructions on how to
disconnect the dock connector from
the USB adapter cable.
370
When you disconnect the iPod while
it is playing, the audio screen (if
selected) shows NO DATA.
When you connect your iPod to the
navigation system, the most recent
settings (Shuf f le, Repeat, etc.) will be
carried over.
11/08/01 09:20:09 31SZA630_378
iPod Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
If you see an error message in the
center display while playing an iPod,
find the solution in the chart to the
right. If you cannot clear the error
message, take your vehicle to your
dealer.
Error Message
UNSUPPORTED
CONNECT RETRY
iPod NO SONG
Solution
Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.
Appears when the iPod cannot be authenticated.
Appears when there are no files in the iPod.
Features
371
11/08/01 09:20:18 31SZA630_379
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
AUDIO SCREEN
Without rear entertainment system
With rear entertainment system
USB/AUX
BUTTON
USB/AUX
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
CATEGORY
BAR
SKIP BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
CATEGORY
BAR
SKIP BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
372
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
INTERFACE DIAL
11/08/01 09:20:29 31SZA630_380
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
The audio system reads and plays
the audio files on the USB flash
memory device in MP3, WMA or
AAC* formats.
* : Only AAC format files recorded
with iTunes are playable on this
audio unit.
The recommended USB flash
memory devices are 256 MB or
higher, and formatted with the FAT
file system. Some digital audio
players may be compatible as well.
Some USB flash memory devices
(such as devices with security lockout features, etc.) will not work in
this audio unit.
NOTE:
Do not use a device such as a card
reader or hard drive as it or your
files may be damaged.
Do not connect your USB flash
memory device using a hub.
Do not use an extension cable to
the USB adapter cable equipped
with your vehicle.
CONTINUED
373
Features
To Play a USB Flash Memory
Device
This audio system can select and
play the audio files from a USB flash
memory device with the same
controls used for the in-dash disc
player. To play a USB flash memory
device, connect it to the USB adapter
cable in the console compartment,
then press the USB/AUX button.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
11/08/01 09:20:40 31SZA630_381
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
Do not keep a USB flash memory
device in the vehicle. Direct
sunlight and high heat will damage
it.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing a USB flash
memory device.
Depending on the type and
number of files, it may take some
time before they begin to play.
Depending on the software the
files were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or
display some text data.
Depending on the type of
encoding and writing software
used, there may be cases where
character information does not
display properly.
374
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.
The order of files in USB playback
may be different from the order of
files displayed in PC or other
devices etc. Files are played in the
order stored in USB flash memory
device.
Voice Control System
You can select the AUX mode by
using the voice control buttons, but
cannot operate the play mode
functions.
Some versions of MP3, WMA, or
AAC format may not be supported. If
an unsupported file is found, the
audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,
then skips to the next file.
11/08/01 09:20:49 31SZA630_382
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
In WMA or AAC format, DRM
(digital rights management) files
cannot be played. If the system finds
a DRM file, the audio unit displays
UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips
to the next file.
Connecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
USB ADAPTER CABLE
Features
Combining a low sampling f requency
with a low bitrate may result in
extremely degraded sound quality.
USB CONNECTOR
1. Unclip the USB connector by
pivoting it, and pull out the USB
adapter cable in the console
compartment.
USB ADAPTER CABLE
2. Connect the USB flash memory
device to the USB adapter cable
correctly and securely.
CONTINUED
375
11/08/01 09:20:58 31SZA630_383
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
When the USB device is connected
and the USB mode is selected on the
audio system, the USB indicator is
shown in the center display. It also
shows the folder and file numbers.
Pressing the AUDIO button displays
the USB indicator, the folder and file
names, and the elapsed time in the
navigation screen.
To Change or Select Files
Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash
memory device is playing to select
passages and change files.
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next file. Press and
release the
side of the bar, to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current file. Press it twice to skip
to the beginning of the previous file.
To move rapidly within a file, press
and hold either side (
or
)
of the SKIP bar.
Folder Selection − To select a
different folder, press and release
either side of the CATEGORY bar.
Press the + side to skip to the next
folder, and press the − side to skip
to the beginning of the previous
folder.
376
To Select a File from Folder and File
Lists
You can also select a folder or file
from the list by using the interface
dial. Press the AUDIO button to
show the audio display on the
navigation screen. Use the interface
dial to highlight the file, then press
ENTER to set your selection.
11/08/01 09:21:13 31SZA630_384
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
To go back to the normal playing
display, press the AUDIO button.
Pressing the CANCEL button goes
back to the previous screen and
pressing the MAP button cancels the
audio mode display.
TRACK REPEAT
REPEAT OFF ICON
Features
To Select Repeat, Random or Scan
Mode:
Push the interface selector down to
display the AUDIO MENU.
You can select any type of repeat,
random or scan mode on the audio
menu screen.
Push the selector up to display the
‘‘Select a folder’’ screen. Then turn
the interface dial to select a folder,
and press ENTER.
If you have more than one layer of
folders (folders within folders), you
can also see each folder on the
screen.
Move the interface selector up to
select BACK to show the USB
screen, or press the CANCEL button
to return to the previous screen.
TRACK REPEAT ICON
This function repeats playback of the
track.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial to select
Repeat and press ENTER.
CONTINUED
377
11/08/01 09:21:25 31SZA630_385
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Track Repeat icon and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Playback of the track that is
currently being played will be
repeated.
FOLDER REPEAT
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Repeat
OFF icon, and then press ENTER.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
also cancels this function.
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Repeat
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
FOLDER REPEAT ICON
This function replays all the tracks in
a folder in the order that they were
stored.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial to select
Repeat and press ENTER.
378
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Folder Repeat icon and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Playback of the folder that is
currently being played will be
repeated.
11/08/01 09:21:40 31SZA630_386
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
TRACK RANDOM
RANDOM OFF ICON
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Track Random icon and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
The tracks are played in random
order.
FOLDER RANDOM
TRACK RANDOM ICON
This function plays all the tracks on
the USB flash memory device in
random order.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial, select
Random and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
Features
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Random
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
FOLDER RANDOM ICON
This function plays all of the tracks
in the current folder in random order.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial, select
Random and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
CONTINUED
379
11/08/01 09:21:53 31SZA630_387
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Folder Random icon and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
The files are played in random
order.
TRACK SCAN
SCAN OFF ICON
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Random
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
When you want to use this function
to another folder (not the folder that
is currently played), you can select
the folder to be played in random
order as following:
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector up to display the
folder list screen.
Turn the interface dial and
highlight the folder you want to
change to.
380
TRACK SCAN ICON
2. Push the interface selector down
to ‘‘RANDOM ALL TRACKS’’ on
the folder list screen. All available
files in the selected folder are
played in random order.
This function samples all the tracks
in the current folder in the order that
they were recorded.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial, select the
Scan icon and press ENTER on
the interface selector.
11/08/01 09:22:05 31SZA630_388
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
3. Turn the interface dial, select
Track Scan icon and press ENTER
on the interface selector. Each
track or file is sampled for 10
seconds. When all the tracks in
the folder have been scanned,
regular playback is resumed.
The first file of the first folder is
sampled for 10 seconds. If no other
operations are carried out, the first
files of the remaining folders are
played for 10 seconds. After the first
file of the last folder is played back,
regular playback is resumed.
FOLDER SCAN ICON
This function samples the first file in
each folder within the USB flash
memory device.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Scan
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
You can also select the scan feature
with the SCAN button on the control
panel. Press and release the SCAN
button.
2. Turn the interface dial, select the
Scan icon and press ENTER on
the interface selector.
381
Features
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Scan
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector to play the last
track sampled.
3. Turn the interface dial, select
Folder Scan icon and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
FOLDER SCAN
11/08/01 09:22:13 31SZA630_389
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
To Stop Playing a USB Flash
Memory Device
To take the system out of the USB
mode, press one of the other source
buttons than the USB/AUX button.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the auxiliary input jack,
press the USB/AUX button to select
it.
You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
change modes.
If you reconnect the same USB flash
memory device, the system will
begin playing where it left off.
382
Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
You can disconnect the USB flash
memory device at any time even if
the USB mode is selected on the
audio system. Always follow the USB
flash memory device’s instructions
when you remove it.
When you disconnect the USB flash
memory device while it is playing,
the center display and the audio
screen (if selected) show NO DATA.
11/08/01 09:22:18 31SZA630_390
USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
If you see an error message in the
center display while playing a USB
flash memory device, find the
solution in the chart to the right. If
you cannot clear the error message,
take your vehicle to your dealer.
Solution
UNSUPPORTED
UNPLAYABLE FILE
USB NO SONG
Appears when an unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.
Appears when the file is copyright protected, such as DRM.
Appears when there are no playable files in the USB flash memory
device.
Appears when the overcurrent protection feature of the system stops
supplying power to USB because an incompatible device is connected.
Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio system off, and turn it on
again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
BAD USB DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S MANUAL
383
Features
Error Message
11/08/01 09:22:27 31SZA630_391
Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
AUDIO SCREEN
Without rear entertainment system
With rear entertainment system
USB/AUX
BUTTON
USB/AUX
BUTTON
TITLE
BUTTON
TITLE
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
SKIP BAR
AUDIO
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
384
INTERFACE DIAL
11/08/01 09:22:38 31SZA630_392
Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones
with streaming audio capabilities are
compatible with the system. You can
find an approved phone by visiting
handsfreelink.honda.com or call 888528-7876. In Canada, visit www.
handsfreelink.ca, or call (888) 5287876.
NOTE: In some states, provinces,
and territories, it may be illegal to
perform some data device functions
while driving.
To Play Bluetooth Audio Files
Make sure that your phone is paired
and linked to HFL.
To begin to play the audio files, you
may need to operate your phone. If
so, follow the phone maker’s
operating instructions.
Press the USB/AUX button*. When
the phone is recognized, you will see
the Bluetooth Audio message on the
center display and the screen (if
selected), and the system begins to
play.
*: If an iPod or USB flash memory
device or audio unit connected
to the auxiliary input jack was
selected at the last mode, you
will see iPod, USB or AUX in the
center display and the audio
control display on the navigation
screen (if selected). Push the
USB/AUX button again to play
audio files from your Bluetooth
Audio phone.
CONTINUED
385
Features
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Bluetooth Audio system, which
allows you to listen to streaming
audio from your Bluetooth Audio
compatible phone. This function is
only available on phones that are
paired and linked to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)
system (see page 468 ).
11/08/01 09:22:51 31SZA630_393
Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Once a device is linked, the name of
the device will appear on the screen.
Pressing the TITLE button switches
the center display between the
Bluetooth Audio and the device
name.
In the following conditions, the
display shows ‘‘NO CONNECT’’
message after pressing the TITLE
button.
Voice Control System
You can select the AUX mode by
using the voice control buttons, but
cannot operate the play mode
functions.
The phone is not linked to HFL.
To skip a file
If more than one phone is paired to
the HFL system, there will be a
delay before the system begins to
play.
NOTE: The text display function
may not be available on some phone
devices.
The phone is not turned on.
The phone is not in the vehicle.
Another HFL compatible phone,
which is not compatible for
Bluetooth Audio, is already
connected.
If your Bluetooth Audio compatible
phone does not operate as described,
make sure it is a Honda approved
phone. To find out if your phone is
approved, go to handsfreelink.honda.
com (in Canada, www.handsfreelink.
ca), or call the HandsFreeLink
consumer support at 888-528-7876.
386
Press the
side of the SKIP bar
to skip forward to the next file, and
press the
side to skip backward
to the beginning of the current file.
Push the
side again to skip to
the previous file.
NOTE: The skip function may not be
available on some phone devices.
11/08/01 09:23:01 31SZA630_394
Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
To pause or resume a file
To change sound settings
Features
Turn the interface dial to switch the
setting between the resume/pause
mode and the sound setup mode.
Select Resume/Pause, then press
ENTER to set your selection. Each
time you press ENTER, the system
switches between the resume mode
and pause mode.
NOTE: The pause function may not
be available on some phone devices.
The resume/pause mode can stop
playing a file temporarily.
Press the AUDIO button to display
the audio control display. Turn the
dial to switch the setting between
the resume/pause mode and the
sound setup mode. Select Sound
Setup, then press ENTER to set your
selection.
CONTINUED
387
11/08/01 09:23:12 31SZA630_395
Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Turn the dial to select a sound setup
mode, then press ENTER to set your
selection. See page 309 for more
sound setting information.
To switch to HFL mode
If you receive a call when the
Bluetooth Audio is playing, press the
PICK-UP button on the steering
wheel. The screen and the center
display switch to the HFL mode (see
page 463 ).
After ending the call, press the
HANG-UP button to go back to the
Bluetooth Audio mode.
388
To turn off the Bluetooth Audio
mode
To take the system out of the
Bluetooth Audio mode, press one of
the other source buttons than the
USB/AUX button. When a
compatible audio unit is connected to
the auxiliary input jack, press the
USB/AUX button to select it.
Switching to another mode pauses
the music playing from your phone.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
11/08/01 09:23:25 31SZA630_396
FM/AM Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequencies:
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
station drifting in and out. If you are
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Features
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations, or hear only the station you
are close to.
CONTINUED
389
11/08/01 09:23:32 31SZA630_397
FM/AM Radio Reception
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
390
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
11/08/01 09:23:40 31SZA630_398
Auxiliary Input Jack
On vehicles with rear entertainment
system
Features
Touring model is shown.
The auxiliary input jack is inside the
front console compartment. The
system will accept auxiliary input
from standard audio accessories.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the jack, press the AUX
or CD/AUX button to select it.
Auxiliary input jacks and headphone
connectors for the rear
entertainment system are on the
back of the center console
compartment.
For more information, see page 428 .
391
11/08/01 09:23:51 31SZA630_399
Remote Audio Controls
The MODE button changes the
mode.
Except U.S. LX models
MODE BUTTON
On vehicles with navigation system
Pressing the MODE button
repeatedly cycles through all
possible media sources whether they
are present or not.
On vehicles without navigation system
VOL BUTTON
CH BUTTON
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
The VOL button adjusts the volume
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top
or bottom of the button, hold it until
the desired volume is reached, then
release it.
392
Pressing the MODE button
repeatedly cycles through all present,
connected media sources. Media
sources that are not present or
connected will not appear when
cycling with the MODE button.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top (+) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
(−) to go back to the previous
station.
To search up and down from the
current frequency and find a station
with a strong signal, press the top
(+) or bottom (−) of the button for
1 second.
If you are playing a disc, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track each time you press the top
(+) of the CH button. Press the
bottom (−) to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
it again to return to the previous
track. You will see the disc and track
numbers in the upper display.
11/08/01 09:23:57 31SZA630_400
Remote Audio Controls
On vehicles with rear entertainment
system
If you are playing a DVD video, use
the channel button to change
chapters. Each time you press the
top (+) of the button, the system
goes to the next chapter. Press the
bottom (−) to return to the
beginning of the current chapter.
Press it again to return to the
previous chapter.
Except LX and U.S. EX models
If you are playing a USB flash
memory device or iPod with the USB
adapter cable, press and release the
top (+) of the CH button to skip
forward to the beginning of the next
file. Press the bottom (−) to skip
backward to the beginning to the
current file. Press it twice to return
to the previous file.
393
Features
If you are listening to XM Radio, use
the CH button to change channels.
Each time you press the top (+) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset channel. Press the
bottom (−) to go back to the
previous preset channel.
To go to the next channel of the
category you are listening to, press
the top (+) of the button for 1
second. Press the bottom (−) for 1
second to go back to the previous
channel.
11/08/01 09:24:05 31SZA630_401
Radio Theft Protection
On all models except LX
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
radio fuse is removed, the audio
system will disabled itself. If this
happens, there are two methods to
make it work again. Turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, press
the power/volume knob once. The
enter code screen will appear.
Vehicle Specific Method − Press
and hold the power/volume knob for
a few seconds, the audio unit will
check the VIN information stored in
the vehicle. The audio system will
start activating if the VIN
information stored in the audio
system and the vehicle match.
Security Code Method − The enter
code screen will appear. Use the
preset buttons to enter the five-digit
code. The code is on the radio code
card included in your owner’s
manual kit. When it is entered
correctly, the radio will start playing.
You should have received a card that
lists your audio system code number
and serial number. It is best to store
this card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have ten tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
must then leave the system on for
one hour before trying again.
If you cannot activate the audio
system, and lose the card, take the
vehicle to your dealer.
394
11/08/01 09:24:11 31SZA630_402
Radio Theft Protection
The system will retain your AM and
FM presets even if power is
disconnected.
U.S. owners
Models with navigation system
You need to enter the same code for
the navigation system to reactivate.
Read the navigation system manual
for details.
Features
We recommend that you register the
security code at Owner Link (owners.
honda.com.) If you lose the Antitheft Identification Card before
registering the code at Owner Link,
you must obtain the code from your
dealer or https://radio-navicode.honda.
com/. To do this, you will need the
audio system’s serial number. If you
do not have the serial number with
you, ask your dealer or go to https://
radio-navicode.honda.com/ for
information on how to retrieve it.
Canadian owners
If you lose the Anti-theft
Identification Card, you must obtain
the code from your dealer. To do this,
you will need the audio system’s
serial number. If you do not have the
serial number with you, ask your
dealer how to retrieve it.
395
11/08/01 09:24:22 31SZA630_403
Rear Entertainment System
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear
entertainment system that includes a
DVD player for the enjoyment of the
rear passengers.
With this system, the rear
passengers can enjoy a different
entertainment source (radio, disc,
CD Library, HDD, USB, iPod , DVD
player or XM Radio) than the front
seat occupants. The audio is
broadcast through the supplied
wireless headphones.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position to operate the rear
entertainment system.
396
This vehicle’s overhead mounted video
display, if so equipped, includes
mercury-containing components. Upon
removal, please reuse, recycle, or
dispose of as hazardous waste.
To Turn On the System
Press the REAR POWER button.
The indicator on the REAR POWER
button will come on. The rear seat
passengers can then operate the rear
system from the control panel in the
ceiling. The rear control panel can
also be detached and used as a
remote control, by pushing the
release button, and pulling the
remote toward you.
To turn off the rear control
You can disable the rear control
panel from the front control panel.
On vehicles without navigation system
Press the SETUP button and turn
the selector knob to ‘‘Rear Setup,’’
then press the selector knob. Select
the ‘‘Rear Remote On.’’ Each time
you press and release the selector
knob, this feature turn on and off.
11/08/01 09:24:30 31SZA630_404
Rear Entertainment System
On vehicles with navigation system
Rear Speakers
When you turn on the system, the
rear speakers are automatically
turned off if the rear system selects
a different entertainment source
than the front system. You will see
the Rear Speakers Off icon in the
audio display. The sound for the rear
system is sent to the headphones.
If you want to turn the rear speakers
on again, press and hold the REAR
POWER button until the Rear
Speakers Off icon goes off.
NOTE: The rear speakers are
connected to the front system, so
they will always play the source that
the front system is set to.
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector.
397
Features
Press and release the REAR
SOURCE button. The indicator on
the REAR SOURCE button will come
on. The front screen shows the same
screen as the rear screen does. Push
the interface selector down. The
screen changes to the rear menu.
Turn the interface dial to the ‘‘Rear
Setup,’’ then press ENTER on the
interface dial. Turn the interface dial
to select the ‘‘Rear Control,’’ and
press ENTER.
11/08/01 09:24:39 31SZA630_405
Rear Entertainment System
On vehicles without navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
CD SLOT
CD SLOT
DVD/CD SLOT
DVD/CD SLOT
REAR POWER
BUTTON
REAR SOURCE
BUTTON
REAR POWER
BUTTON
OVERHEAD SCREEN UNIT
398
REAR SOURCE
BUTTON
11/08/01 09:24:52 31SZA630_406
Rear Entertainment System
When REAR SOURCE is selected,
the front entertainment system
audio controls can also be used to
operate the rear entertainment
system in all modes.
The media that the rear passengers
are listening to will then be heard
from the front speakers.
If you do not operate the rear
entertainment system from the front
panel within 20 seconds, the
indicator in the REAR SOURCE
button will go off and the display will
return to the front entertainment
system automatically.
To play the radio, the buttons for the
front entertainment system have the
same functions.
REAR CONTROL PANEL
If an audio CD is loaded into the
upper slot, select the CD/CDL or
CD button. If a DVD or CD is loaded
into the lower slot, select the DVD
button.
OPEN BUTTON
Operating the DVD Player from
the Front Control Panel
The DVD player in your rear
entertainment system can play DVD
video discs, audio CDs, MP3/WMA
discs and DTS CDs.
OVERHEAD SCREEN
Open the overhead screen by
pushing the OPEN button. The
screen will swing down part-way.
Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
If you pivot the screen too far
forward, past the second detent, the
display will turn off. Pivot the screen
back to the second or first detent to
turn the display back on. To close
the screen, pivot it up until it latches.
CONTINUED
399
Features
To Select Rear Entertainment
from the Front Control Panel
To operate the rear entertainment
system from the front panel, press
the REAR SOURCE button. You will
hear two beeps and the indicator in
the button comes on to show that the
control panel is enabled.
11/08/01 09:25:05 31SZA630_407
Rear Entertainment System
On vehicles without navigation system
CD SLOT
EJECT BUTTON
On vehicles with navigation system
CD SLOT
EJECT BUTTON
Insert a DVD into the lower DVD/
CD slot in the audio unit.
Push the DVD in halfway, the drive
will pull it in the rest of the way.
When you insert a DVD, the system
automatically starts to play. To turn
this feature off, see pages 402 and
405 .
PLAY − Press the
button if
the DVD does not start playing
automatically.
PAUSE − Press the
button to
pause the DVD. Press the button
again or press PLAY to resume.
Pause works only with the DVD
player.
DVD/CD SLOT
DVD/CD SLOT
SKIP BAR
SKIP BAR
PLAY/PAUSE BUTTON
PLAY/PAUSE BUTTON
400
11/08/01 09:25:14 31SZA630_408
Rear Entertainment System
SEEK/SKIP − Press and hold the
side of the SKIP bar to move
forward. Press and hold the
side of the SKIP bar to move
backward. Release the bar when the
system reaches the point you want.
DVD Setup
On vehicles without navigation system
Features
Each time you press the
side of
the SKIP bar and release it, the
system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track or
chapter. Press and release the
side of the SKIP bar to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press and release it
again to skip to the beginning of the
previous track or chapter.
EJECT − Press the eject button to
remove the DVD from the drive.
Press the REAR SOURCE button of
the front panel while the DVD is
playing on the overhead screen. The
front screen shows ‘‘REAR MENU.’’
Turn the selector knob to ‘‘DVD
Setup,’’ then press the selector knob.
You can choose DVD setup from
these selections:
Audio
Subtitle
Auto Play On
CONTINUED
Search
401
11/08/01 09:25:24 31SZA630_409
Rear Entertainment System
Audio
Subtitle
Auto Play ON
CHECK BOX
Turn the selector knob to ‘‘Audio,’’
then press the selector knob. Turn
the selector knob to select the
language you want for DVD audio,
then press the selector knob. The
languages that appear on the screen
are limited to the language choices
available on the DVD.
402
Turn the selector knob to ‘‘Subtitle,’’
then press the selector knob. Turn
the selector knob to select the
language you want for subtitles, then
press the selector knob. The
languages that appear on the screen
are limited to the language choices
available on the DVD.
Turn the selector knob to ‘‘Auto Play
ON,’’ then press the selector knob.
When the check mark disappears
from the check box, the auto play
function also turns off.
Each time you press and release the
selector knob, this feature turns ON
and OFF.
11/08/01 09:25:35 31SZA630_410
Rear Entertainment System
On vehicles with navigation system
Title or Chapter Search
Turn the selector knob to ‘‘Title
Search,’’ or ‘‘Chapter Search,’’ then
press the selector knob. Turn the
selector knob to a title or chapter
number, then press the selector
knob. The DVD skips to the selected
title or chapter.
Press the REAR SOURCE button
while a DVD is playing. Turn the
interface dial to ‘‘DVD Setup,’’ then
press ENTER on the interface
selector. You can choose DVD setup
from these selections:
Title Search
Chapter Search
Audio
Subtitle
Repeat
Auto Play
Turn the interface dial to ‘‘Title
Search’’ or ‘‘Chapter Search,’’ then
press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the dial again to select
a title or chapter number, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
The DVD skips to the selected title
or chapter.
Features
Title or Chapter Search
CONTINUED
403
11/08/01 09:25:47 31SZA630_411
Rear Entertainment System
Audio
Subtitle
Repeat
Turn the interface dial to ‘‘Audio,’’
then press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the dial to select the
language you want for DVD audio,
then press ENTER on the interface
selector. The languages that appear
on the screen are limited to the
language choices available on the
DVD.
Turn the interface dial to ‘‘Subtitle,’’
then press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the dial to select the
language you want for subtitles, then
press ENTER on the interface
selector. The languages that appear
on the screen are limited to the
language choices available on the
DVD.
Turn the interface dial to ‘‘Repeat,’’
then press ENTER on the interface
selector. Select the icon in the center
(
) to repeat the current chapter,
the icon on the right (
) to
repeat the current title, or select
OFF to turn off repeat. If your DVD
does not support titles or chapters,
you cannot use this feature.
404
11/08/01 09:25:56 31SZA630_412
Rear Entertainment System
Auto Play
Using the Rear Control Panel
To turn on the rear entertainment
system from the rear control panel,
press the
(power) button. Use
the FM/AM button, XM button,
CD/CDL or CD/HDD button, or
DVD/AUX button to select the
entertainment source. The selected
source will be shown in the display.
Make sure the rear control operation
has not been disabled. When the
front audio system is off or the front
panel’s Rear Power is off, the rear
control panel cannot be turned on.
Turn the interface dial to ‘‘Auto Play,’’
then press ENTER on the interface
selector. Select ON to play the DVD
automatically, or select OFF to play
the DVD manually.
405
Features
To Return to Front Audio
Controls
To return front panel control to the
front audio system, press the REAR
SOURCE button. You will hear a
beep and the indicator in the button
goes off. The indicator also goes off
automatically when you do not
operate the rear entertainment
system for 20 seconds.
11/08/01 09:26:10 31SZA630_413
Rear Entertainment System
To Play the Radio from the Rear
Control Panel
Press the FM/AM button to listen to
the radio.
Use the
,
,
, or
button to highlight SEEK,
TUNE, AUTO SELECT, SCAN, or
one of the preset radio stations on
the overhead screen. You can enter
the highlighted function by pressing
the ENT button. These functions
have the same features as those of
the front audio system. You can also
use the
or
buttons to seek
up/down and
or
to tune
up/down.
406
REAR CONTROL PANEL
REAR CONTROL PANEL
On vehicles without navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
OPEN BUTTON
OVERHEAD SCREEN
To Play the XM Radio from the
Rear Control Panel
Press the XM button to listen to the
XM Radio. You can press either side
(
or
) of the TUNE/SKIP
bar to scroll up/down and select
channels within a category (in
CATEGORY mode), or to scroll up/
down and select from among all
available channels (in CH mode).
Press the MENU button to display
the audio menu on the overhead
screen. You can enter the
highlighted function by pressing the
ENTER button. These functions
have the same features as those of
the front audio system.
Pressing and holding the TITLE/
SCROLL button for 5 seconds
enables you to switch between
search modes.
11/08/01 09:26:27 31SZA630_414
Rear Entertainment System
When the TITLE/SCROLL button is
pressed, the title scrolls. When it is
pushed again, scrolling stops.
To Play a DVD from the Rear
Control Panel
The video screen is for use by rear
seat passengers only. The driver and
front seat passenger should not try
to view the screen while driving.
Open the overhead screen by
pushing the OPEN button. The
screen will swing down part-way.
Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
If you pivot the screen too far
forward, past the detent, the display
will turn off. Pivot the screen back to
the second or first detent to turn the
display back on. To close the screen,
pivot it up until it latches.
Press the
button when you
want to pause the DVD. Press this
button again to go back to PLAY.
Press the
button to skip to the
beginning of the next chapter. Press
the
button to return to the
beginning of the current chapter.
Press the
button again quickly
to go to the previous chapter.
To move rapidly within a chapter,
press and hold the
or
button. The system will
continue to move through the
chapter. Press the
button to
move forward, or the
button to
move backward. Release the button
when the system reaches the point
you want.
To select the menu on the DVD,
press the MENU button. Use the
,
,
, and
button to
move to the desired menu selection,
then press the ENT button to enter
your selection.
407
Features
To Play a Disc, CD Library, HDD,
USB, or iPod from the Rear
Control Panel
Use the
,
,
, or
button to highlight Repeat,
Random, or Scan on the screen. You
can enter the highlighted function by
pressing the ENT button. These
functions have the same features as
those of the front audio system.
11/08/01 09:26:40 31SZA630_415
Rear Entertainment System
TITLE/SCROLL Button
MENU Button
Top Menu
When you press the TITLE/
SCROLL button while a DVD is
playing, the current status of title,
chapter, elapsed time, angle, subtitle,
audio, and sound characteristics are
displayed. To return to the DVD
video screen, press the TITLE/
SCROLL button again.
When you press the MENU button
while a DVD is playing, the DVD
Menu appears. The menu options
are TOP MENU, MENU, PLAY
MODE, SEARCH, NumInput and
REPEAT.
When you select ‘‘TOP MENU,’’ the
screen changes to the DVD’s title
menu. This menu also appears when
you press the MENU button while a
DVD is not playing. To go back to
play, press the MENU or CANCEL
button.
408
To go to your selected menu, use the
or
button to highlight the
icon and press the ENT button. To
return to the DVD video screen,
select RETURN.
11/08/01 09:26:51 31SZA630_416
Rear Entertainment System
Play Mode
‘‘Audio’’
When you select ‘‘MENU’’ with the
or
button, the screen
changes to the DVD’s title menu.
When you select ‘‘PLAY MODE’’
with the
or
button, you
can change the DVD’s Audio,
Subtitle or Angle setting.
To change the Audio setting,
highlight ‘‘Audio’’ from the play
mode menu with the ▼ or
▲ button. A submenu of dubbed
languages appears. You can select
another language by pressing the
or
button. The sound
characteristics (Dolby Digital,
LPCM, MPEG Audio, dts) recorded
with the selected language is also
displayed next to the language.
Features
Menu
CONTINUED
409
11/08/01 09:26:59 31SZA630_417
Rear Entertainment System
The selectable languages vary from
DVD to DVD, and this feature may
not be available on some DVDs.
‘‘Subtitle’’
To go back to play, press the MENU
or CANCEL button.
To change the DVD’s subtitle,
highlight ‘‘Subtitle’’ from the play
mode menu with the ▼ or
▲ button. You can see the
available subtitles with the
or
button.
410
To go back to play, press the MENU
or CANCEL button.
11/08/01 09:27:09 31SZA630_418
Rear Entertainment System
‘‘Angle’’
If there are no multiple angles
available on the DVD, you cannot
change from ‘‘Angle 1.’’
Search
To go back to play, press the MENU
or CANCEL button.
Features
To change the view angle, highlight
‘‘Angle’’ from the play mode menu
with the ▼ or ▲ button. You
can see the available angle options
with the
or
button.
When you highlight ‘‘Search’’ with
the
or
button, the ‘‘Jump
to chapter and title number input’’
message appears. To select
‘‘Chapter’’ or ‘‘Title’’ search, press
the ENT button.
CONTINUED
411
11/08/01 09:27:20 31SZA630_419
Rear Entertainment System
‘‘Title/Chapter Search’’
Num Input
With ‘‘Title’’ highlighted, use the
or
button to jump to your
desired title and press the ENT
button. When ‘‘Chapter’’ is
highlighted, follow the same
procedure for the chapter search.
A numerical command can be issued
to a DVD by inputting a two digit
number, and a button number can be
selected on the screen.
412
When you highlight, ‘‘NumInput’’
with the
or
button, the
‘‘Jump to keypad’’ message appears.
Press the ENT button to go to the
NumInput selection screen.
Select the first digit number using
the ▼ , ▲ ,
, or
button, and enter it by pressing
the ENT button. If you want to
change the number, select ‘‘DEL,’’
and press the ENT button, then
select and enter the new number.
11/08/01 09:27:29 31SZA630_420
Rear Entertainment System
The cursor will automatically move
to the ‘‘ENT’’ icon when you finish
inputting the number. Press the ENT
button to enter the number
command. The display goes back to
the DVD screen.
SETUP Button
With ‘‘Repeat’’ highlighted, each
time you press and release the ENT
button, the repeat mode changes
from chapter repeat to title repeat,
and to repeat off.
When you press the SETUP button
while a DVD is playing, the setup
menu appears. The menu options are
Disp Adjust, Aspect Ratio,
PERSONAL SURROUND, and
Language.
To change a setup, use the
or
button to highlight your
selection and press the ENT button.
To return to the DVD video screen,
press the SETUP or CANCEL button.
Features
Repeat
CONTINUED
413
11/08/01 09:27:38 31SZA630_421
Rear Entertainment System
Disp Adjust
To adjust the display, highlight ‘‘Disp
Adjust’’ from the setup menu with
the ▼ or ▲ button and press
the ENT button. You can adjust
these display settings:
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Tint
Color
Select the quality you want to adjust
by pressing the ▼ or ▲ button.
Adjust the setting by pressing the
or
button. When you are
finished with your adjustment,
cursor back to the top of the setup
menu, or press the CANCEL button
to exit.
414
If you want to set the display to the
default setting, select ‘‘Reset’’ by
pressing the ▼ or ▲ button, then
press the ENT button.
11/08/01 09:27:50 31SZA630_422
Rear Entertainment System
Aspect Ratio
You can set the screen mode to
these settings:
Normal
Wide
Zoom
Full
Features
The display changes as shown above.
Select ‘‘Yes,’’ and press the ENT
button. You will see the message
‘‘Default display settings applied’’ on
the display for 5 seconds.
Select the ‘‘Aspect Ratio’’ by pressing
the
or
button, then press
the ENT button.
The selectable setting menu is
displayed, and the current setting is
highlighted in blue.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the
or
button,
then press the ENT button.
CONTINUED
415
11/08/01 09:28:00 31SZA630_423
Rear Entertainment System
Personal Surround
Select ‘‘Cinema,’’ ‘‘Music,’’ or ‘‘Voice’’
by pressing the
or
button,
and enter your selection by pressing
the ENT button.
Language
If you select ‘‘Off,’’ the logo
disappears, and there will be no
special sound effect.
To change the Personal Surround
setting, highlight ‘‘PERSONAL
SURROUND’’ from the setup menu
with the ▼ or ▲ button and
press the ENT button. The effect
selection appears.
416
You can change the display language
to English, French, or Spanish. Use
the
or
button to select the
setting you want, then press the
ENT button.
11/08/01 09:28:13 31SZA630_424
Rear Entertainment System
INITIAL SETTINGS (Language)
Menu Language
When you press the SETUP button
on the rear control panel when a
DVD is not playing, the ‘‘INITIAL
SETTINGS’’ menu is displayed.
When you select ‘‘Language’’ with
the
or
button, the menu
shown above appears.
To select the language used in the
DISC menus, select ‘‘Menu
Language’’ by pressing the ▼ or ▲
button.
Features
INITIAL SETTINGS Menu
There are two selectable menus:
‘‘Language’’ and ‘‘Others.’’
To return to the stop or previous
screen, press the CANCEL button.
Because the priority language is
determined by each disc you insert,
you might not be able to set a
selected item.
CONTINUED
417
11/08/01 09:28:21 31SZA630_425
Rear Entertainment System
Select the desired language by
pressing the
or
button.
The selectable languages are,
English, French, Spanish, Arabic,
German, Italian, Dutch, Chinese,
Korean, Thai, Japanese or others.
418
If you want another language than
those listed, you need to enter the
code number of the desired language.
Select ‘‘other,’’ and press the ENT
button. The display changes as
shown in the next column.
If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press the
ENT button, the display returns to
the initial screen of the ‘‘Language’’
menu.
11/08/01 09:28:34 31SZA630_426
Rear Entertainment System
Audio Language
Features
If you select ‘‘Yes,’’ the display
changes to the language code input
mode. Select the first number digit
using the
,
,
, or
button, and press the ENT
button to enter it. Repeat this until all
four digits are filled. When the
fourth digit is entered, the cursor
automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel to enter the new
language code.
If you made a mistake entering a
number digit, select ‘‘DEL’’ on the
display with the
,
,
,
or
button, and press the ENT
button on the control panel. Then
select and enter the correct number
digit as described. The display
returns to the initial ‘‘Language’’
menu screen.
You can select the dubbed language
before playing DVDs.
Select ‘‘Audio Language’’ by pressing
the ▼ or ▲ button. You will see the
submenu next to ‘‘Audio Language.’’
Follow the same instructions you
used to set the menu language.
CONTINUED
419
11/08/01 09:28:44 31SZA630_427
Rear Entertainment System
Subtitle Language
INITIAL SETTINGS (Others)
You can select the subtitle language
before playing DVDs.
Select ‘‘Subtitle Language’’ by
pressing the ▼ or ▲ button. You will
see the submenu next to the
‘‘Subtitle Language.’’
When you select ‘‘Others’’ at the top
of the ‘‘INITIAL SETTINGS’’ screen,
the above menu appears on the
screen.
Follow the same instructions you
used to set the menu language.
420
Dynamic Range
‘‘Dynamic Range’’ reduces the
differences between the loud and
quiet sound levels throughout the
disc. When this is on, the louder
sounds are lowered, and quieter
sounds are increased.
11/08/01 09:28:53 31SZA630_428
Rear Entertainment System
Angle Mark
ANGLE MARK
Features
When you select the ‘‘Dynamic
Range’’ by pressing the ▼ or ▲
button, you will see the submenu
next to the ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ as
shown above.
To turn ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ on or off,
select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressing
the
or
button.
When you switch to another angle
while playing a DVD, the angle mark
is displayed in the upper right corner
of the screen.
Select ‘‘Angle Mark’’ by pressing the
▼ or ▲ button. The above submenu
appears. If you want the angle mark
to be displayed, select ‘‘ON’’ with the
or
button.
You can set the system to display or
not display this angle mark.
421
11/08/01 09:29:03 31SZA630_429
Rear Entertainment System
Playable DVDs
The DVD player can also play discs
recorded in MP3/WMA/AAC
formats and DTS CDs.
Those packages or jackets should
also bear the designation of ‘‘1’’ or
‘‘ALL’’ region. DVD-ROMs cannot be
played in this system.
There are various types of DVDs
available. Some of them are not
compatible with your system.
The DVD player in your rear
entertainment system can play
DVDs and CDs bearing the above
marks on their packages or jackets.
422
This product incorporates copyright
protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights.
This item incorporates copy
protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights of Rovi
Corporation. Reverse engineering
and disassembly are prohibited.
11/08/01 09:29:10 31SZA630_430
Rear Entertainment System
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro
Logic, and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Protecting DVDs
The tips on how to handle and
protect DVDs are basically the same
as those for compact discs. Refer to
‘‘Protecting Your CDs’’ on page 332 .
Features
Manufactured under license under
U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 &
other U.S. and worldwide patents
issued & pending. DTS and the
Symbol are registered trademarks &
DTS Digital Surround and the DTS
logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Reverse engineering or disassembly
is prohibited.
423
11/08/01 09:29:20 31SZA630_431
Rear Entertainment System
DVD Player Error Messages
On vehicles without navigation system
Error Message
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
CHECK DISC
FOCUS Error
PUSH EJECT
Mechanical Error
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
424
CHECK REGION
UNSUPPORTED
FILE
Cause
Invalid region code
DVD format not
supported
Solution
Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc.
Check for an error indication. Insert the disc
again. If the code does not disappear or the disc
cannot be removed, consult your dealer.
The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject the
disc, and insert a disc compatible with this
system.
11/08/01 09:29:29 31SZA630_432
Rear Entertainment System
Remote Control
Replacing the Remote Control
Batteries
COVER
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Features
RELEASE BUTTON
The rear control panel can be
detached from the ceiling unit and
used as a remote control. To remove
it from the ceiling unit, press the
release button. The control panel will
swing down partway. Pivot it down
further past the detent until it
detaches from the hinge. To reinstall
it, reverse the procedure.
If it takes several pushes on the
button to operate the rear
entertainment system, have your
dealer replace the batteries as soon
as possible.
Battery type: BR3032
CONTINUED
425
11/08/01 09:29:38 31SZA630_433
Rear Entertainment System
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
426
Wireless Headphones
VOLUME DIAL
Some state and local government
agencies prohibit the use of
headphones by the driver of a motor
vehicle. Always obey applicable laws
and regulations.
The audio for the rear entertainment
system is sent to the wireless
headphones that come with the
system. When using the headphones,
make sure you wear them correctly:
L (left) and R (right) are marked on
the sides of the frame. Wearing the
headphones backwards may affect
audio reception, limiting the sound
quality and range.
11/08/01 09:29:47 31SZA630_434
Rear Entertainment System
Replacing Batteries
COVER
Features
To use the headphones, pivot the
earpieces outward. This turns them
on. To adjust the volume, turn the
dial on the bottom of the right
earpiece. When you remove the
headphones, the earpieces
automatically pivot inward, and the
headphones turn off. When not in
use, store the headphones in the
pocket of either front seat, or the
rear door lining pockets.
COIN
Each headphone uses one AAA
battery. The battery is under the
cover on the left earpiece. To
remove the cover, insert a coin in the
slot and twist it slightly to pry the
cover away from the earpiece. Pull
the cover outward, and pivot it out of
the way.
BATTERY
Remove the battery. Install the new
battery in the earpiece as shown in
the diagram next to the battery slot.
Slide the cover back into place on the
earpiece, then press down on the
back edge to lock it in place.
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
427
11/08/01 09:29:57 31SZA630_435
Rear Entertainment System
Auxiliary Input Jacks
VOLUME DIALS
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
Auxiliary input jacks and headphone
connectors for the rear
entertainment system are on the
back of the center console
compartment.
The system will accept auxiliary
inputs from standard video games
and video equipment.
Some video game power supplies
may cause poor picture quality.
V = Video jack
L = Left audio jack
R = Right audio jack
428
HEADPHONE CONNECTORS
There are three headphone
connectors for the third seat
passengers. Each connector has its
own volume control.
11/08/01 09:30:04 31SZA630_436
Security System
The security system does not set if
the hood, the tailgate, the glass
hatch, or any door is not fully closed.
If the system will not set, check that
the doors, the tailgate and the hood
are fully closed.
Except LX models
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
is setting itself.
Once the security system sets,
opening any door, the tailgate, the
glass hatch, or the hood without
using the key or the remote
transmitter will cause the alarm to
activate. It also activates if the radio
is removed from the dashboard or
the wiring is cut.
429
Features
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights and taillights flashes if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the audio unit.
This alarm continues for two
minutes, then the system resets. To
deactivate the system before the two
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or the
remote transmitter.
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, the hood, the tailgate, and the
glass hatch. For the system to
activate, you must lock the doors,
the tailgate and the glass hatch from
the outside with the key, or use
driver’s lock tab, door lock master
switch, or remote transmitter. The
security system indicator on the
instrument panel starts blinking
immediately to show you the system
11/08/01 09:30:14 31SZA630_437
Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
Using Cruise Control
CRUISE BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
RES/ACCEL
BUTTON
SET/DECEL
BUTTON
1. Push in the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
The cruise control system can be
left on, even when it is not in use.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
430
3. Press and release the SET/
DECEL button on the steering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
11/08/01 09:30:26 31SZA630_438
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
To increase the speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
NOTE: If you need to decrease your
speed quickly, use the brakes as you
normally would.
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
CONTINUED
431
Features
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your vehicle speed
increases going down a hill, use the
brakes to slow down. This will cancel
the cruise control. To resume the set
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
on the instrument panel will come
back on.
11/08/01 09:30:36 31SZA630_439
Cruise Control
Even with cruise control turned on,
you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Canceling Cruise Control
CRUISE BUTTON
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
causes cruise control to cancel.
CANCEL BUTTON
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.
432
Resuming the Set Speed
When you push the CANCEL button
or tap the brake pedal, the system
remembers the previously set speed.
To return to that speed, accelerate to
above 25 mph (40 km/h), then press
and release the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
comes on. The vehicle accelerates to
the same speed as before.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system completely off and erases
the previous cruising speed.
11/08/01 09:30:50 31SZA630_440
Compass
On EX, EX-L, and Canadian LX models
without navigation system
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the compass is
self-calibrating, then the compass
display is shown in the display.
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
The compass may need to be
manually calibrated after exposure to
a strong magnetic field. If the
compass seems to be continually
showing the wrong direction and is
not self-calibrating, or the compass
display is blinking with the CAL
indicator on, do the following
procedure.
Features
Compass Operation
Compass operation can be affected
by driving near power lines or
stations, across bridges, through
tunnels, over railroad crossings, past
large vehicles, or driving near large
objects that can cause a magnetic
disturbance. It can also be affected
by accessories such as antennas and
roof racks that are mounted by
magnets.
Compass Calibration
NOTE: Do this procedure in an open
area, away from buildings, power
lines, and other vehicles.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Press and hold the SETUP button
for about 5 seconds. The display
shows you the compass setting
menu items.
CONTINUED
433
11/08/01 09:31:03 31SZA630_441
Compass
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
5. Press the selector knob. The
compass display is blinking and
the CAL indicator is shown.
6. Drive the vehicle slowly in two
complete circles.
EX-L and Canadian EX models
3. Turn the selector knob to select
‘‘Calibration.’’
EX-L and Canadian EX models
4. Press the selector knob to enter
your selection. The display shows
you ‘‘Start Calibration.’’
While setting the compass, press
the RETURN button to go back to
the previous display. Pressing the
SETUP button will cancel the
compass setting mode.
434
When the calibration is successfully
completed, the CAL indicator goes
off and the compass display will stop
blinking and show an actual heading.
The audio system is not related to
the compass system. Even if the
compass system is calibrating, the
display returns to the normal display
which you last selected.
11/08/01 09:31:17 31SZA630_442
Compass
Compass Zone Selection
In most areas, there is a variation
between magnetic north and true
north. Zone selection is required so
the compass can compensate for this
variation. To check and select the
zone, do this:
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
Features
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Press and hold the SETUP button
for about 5 seconds. The display
shows you the compass setting
menu items.
3. Turn the selector knob to select
‘‘ZONE’’ or ‘‘Zone Adjust.’’ Press
the selector knob to enter your
selection. The display shows you
the currently selected zone
number.
4. Find the zone for your area on the
map (see page 436 ). If the correct
zone is not shown, turn the
selector knob to cycle the zone
lists up or down.
5. Once the correct zone is displayed,
press the selector knob. The
display then returns to normal.
If necessary, press the RETURN
button to return to the previous
display. Pressing the SETUP
button will cancel the compass
setting mode.
CONTINUED
435
11/08/01 09:31:22 31SZA630_443
Compass
The audio system is not related to
the compass system. Even if the
compass system is in the zone
setting mode, the display returns to
the normal display which you last
selected.
436
Zone Map
11/08/01 09:31:28 31SZA630_444
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Except LX models
General Safety Information
Before programming your
HomeLink to operate a garage door
opener, confirm that the opener has
an external entrapment protection
system, such as an ‘‘electronic eye,’’
or other safety and reverse stop
features.
Do not use HomeLink with any
garage door opener that lacks safety
stop and reverse features.
Features
The HomeLink Universal
Transceiver built into your vehicle
can be programmed to operate up to
three remote controlled devices
around your home, such as garage
doors, lighting, or home security
systems.
If your garage door was
manufactured before April 1, 1982,
you may not be able to program
HomeLink to operate it. These units
do not have safety features that
cause the motor to stop and reverse
it if an obstacle is detected during
closing, increasing the risk of injury.
CONTINUED
437
11/08/01 09:31:38 31SZA630_445
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Units manufactured between April 1,
1982 and January 1, 1993 may be
equipped with safety stop and
reverse features. If your unit does
not have an external entrapment
protection system, an easy test to
confirm the function and
performance of the safety stop and
reverse feature is to lay a 2 × 4
under the closing door. The door
should stop and reverse upon
contacting the piece of wood.
As an additional safety feature,
garage door openers manufactured
after January 1, 1993 are required to
have external entrapment protection
systems, such as an electronic eye,
which detect an object obstructing
the door.
438
Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety information that
came with your garage door opener
to test that the safety features are
functioning properly. If you do not
have this information, contact the
manufacturer of the equipment.
Before programming HomeLink to a
garage door or gate opener, make
sure that people and objects are out
of the way of the device to prevent
potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door
opener, park just outside the garage.
Training HomeLink
Before you begin − If you just
received your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button.
To do this, press and hold the two
outside buttons on the HomeLink
transceiver for about 20 seconds,
until the red indicator flashes.
Release the buttons, then proceed to
step 1.
11/08/01 09:31:56 31SZA630_446
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
If you are training the second or third buttons, go directly to step 1.
Features
CONTINUED
439
11/08/01 09:32:01 31SZA630_447
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
HomeLink is a registered
trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
440
11/08/01 09:32:16 31SZA630_448
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)
allows you to place and receive
phone calls using voice commands,
without handling your cell phone.
In the U.S., visit handsfreelink.honda.
com or call (888) 528-7876.
In Canada, visit www.handsfreelink.ca,
or call (888) 528-7876.
Selector Knob
Without rear entertainment system
PHONE BUTTON
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
SELECTOR
KNOB
RETURN BUTTON
With rear entertainment system
PHONE BUTTON
RETURN
BUTTON
Features
To use HFL, you need a Bluetoothcompatible cell phone. For a list of
compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature
capabilities:
Using HFL
EX-L and Canadian EX models
SELECTOR
KNOB
Use the selector knob to make menu
or list selections.
Press the PHONE button or PICKUP button to go to the Phone screen.
To select an item on the screen, turn
the selector knob left or right to
highlight it, and then push the
selector knob.
Press the RETURN button to go
back to the previous screen.
CONTINUED
441
11/08/01 09:32:29 31SZA630_449
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
HFL Buttons
TALK BUTTON
Voice Control Tips
PICK-UP BUTTON
Try to reduce all background
noise. If the microphone picks up
voices other than yours,
commands may be misinterpreted.
To change the volume level of
HFL, use the audio system volume
knob or the steering wheel volume
controls.
MICROPHONE
BACK BUTTON
HANG-UP BUTTON
PICK-UP Button − Press and
release to answer a call, or press to
go directly to the Phone screen.
HANG-UP Button − Press and
release to end or decline a call.
TALK Button − Press and release
to call a number with a stored voice
tag.
BACK Button − Press and release
to cancel a command.
442
EX-L model shown.
Air or wind noise from the
dashboard and side vents and all
windows may interfere with the
microphone. Adjust or close them
as necessary.
Press and release the Talk button
when you want to call a number
using a stored voice tag. After the
beep, speak in a clear, natural tone.
Language Selection
You can change the system language
to English, French, or Spanish (see
page 297 ).
11/08/01 09:32:40 31SZA630_450
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Display
When you receive an incoming call,
you will see the following displays
and notifications.
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
BATTERY LEVEL STATUS
SIGNAL STRENGTH
ROAM STATUS
EX-L and Canadian EX models
Some phones may send battery,
signal strength, and roaming status
information to the screen.
BLUETOOTH
INDICATOR
EX-L and Canadian EX models
BLUETOOTH INDICATOR
ROAM STATUS
SIGNAL STRENGTH
BATTERY LEVEL STATUS
CALL NAME PHONE DIALING
443
Features
CALL NAME
PHONE DIALING
11/08/01 09:32:45 31SZA630_451
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
How to Use HFL
The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Speed Dial
Display a list of all 20 speed dial entries.
All Calls
Display the last 20 incoming, outgoing, or missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
Received Calls
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
Dialed Calls
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
Missed
Calls
Display the last 20 missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
Alphabet
Search
Display the menu for an alphabetical search in the paired phone’s
phonebook.
Call History
Phone
Phonebook
All Listings
Dial
Redial
444
Display the paired phone’s previously imported phonebook
(or import a new one).
Enter a phone number to dial.
Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
11/08/01 09:32:50 31SZA630_452
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Add New Phone
Connect
Connection
Disconnect
Delete
Bluetooth PIN
Phone
Setup
Edit
Speed Dial
Connect a previously paired phone to the system.
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Features
Phone
Pair a new phone to the system.
Delete a previously paired phone.
Create a Bluetooth PIN (or pairing code on some models)
number for a paired phone.
Store
Speed Dial
Select a number from the Call History, Phonebook, or manual
entry to store as a speed dial number.
Delete
Speed Dial
Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
Store Voice Tag
Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Delete Voice Tag
Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.
CONTINUED
445
11/08/01 09:32:54 31SZA630_453
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Phone
Phone
Setup
446
Security Code
Create a security code (or security PIN on some models) number for a paired phone.
Auto Answer*
Set incoming calls to be automatically answered.
*: EX-L and Canadian EX models only
Auto Transfer
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
System Clear
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, speed dials, and security codes.
11/08/01 09:33:07 31SZA630_454
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To use HFL, you need to pair your
Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to
the system.
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
Phone Setup
You can set up your phone and other
system options with this menu.
EX-L and Canadian EX models
A brief explanation of each option is
displayed on the left side of the
screen.
On EX-L and Canadian EX models
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
Press the PHONE button or PICKUP button to go to the Phone screen.
EX-L and Canadian EX models
CONTINUED
447
Features
HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which
means, the maximum range between
your phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10
meters).
Phone Screen
11/08/01 09:33:19 31SZA630_455
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Setup Bluetooth Phone
To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system):
Press the PHONE button or PICKUP button. The system starts pairing
when there is no phone paired to the
system.
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
Example
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
1. Press the PHONE button or PICKUP button. The system prompts
you to pair a phone. Select ‘‘Yes’’
on the confirmation screen.
448
2. Make sure your phone is set to
discoverable or visibility is on, and
select ‘‘Continue.’’ HFL begins to
search for your phone.
11/08/01 09:33:35 31SZA630_456
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
3. If your phone is found, it is
displayed on the screen. Select it
and press ENTER.
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
To pair a cell phone (when there are one
or more phones paired to the system):
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
Features
4. If your phone doesn’t appear on
the list, select ‘‘Phone not found?’’
and search for Bluetooth devices
using your phone. From your
phone, select ‘‘HandsFreeLink.’’
EX-L and Canadian EX models
5. HFL gives you a 4-digit pass-key
that you will need to input on your
phone.
6. When your phone prompts you,
input the 4-digit pass-key.
7. You will receive a notification on
the screen and your phone if
pairing is successful.
1. Select ‘‘Phone Setup’’ from the
Phone screen.
2. Select ‘‘Connection’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
3. Select ‘‘Add New Phone.’’
4. Follow steps 2 through 7 from the
previous page.
CONTINUED
449
11/08/01 09:33:47 31SZA630_457
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Phone pairing tips
You cannot pair your phone while
the vehicle is moving.
To change the Pairing code or Bluetooth
PIN setting:
NOTE: The default Pairing code or
Bluetooth PIN ‘‘0000’’ is used until
you change the setting.
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
Up to six phones can be paired.
For a randomly generated Pairing
code or Bluetooth PIN each time you
pair a phone, select ‘‘Random’’ or
‘‘Random PIN.’’
Your phone’s battery may drain
faster when it is paired to HFL.
EX-L and Canadian EX models
1. Select ‘‘Connection’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Pairing Code’’ or
‘‘Bluetooth PIN.’’
450
11/08/01 09:34:06 31SZA630_458
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To delete a paired phone:
Edit Security Code
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
Example
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
Features
EX-L and Canadian EX models
You can set each security code on all
six cell phones. Each can be security
code protected, and have its own
phonebook, speed dial, and call
history.
EX-L and Canadian EX models
Push the
SELECT to
delete
To create your own Pairing code or
Bluetooth PIN, select ‘‘Fixed’’ or
‘‘Fixed PIN’’ and follow steps 3 and 4.
3. Delete the current Pairing code or
Bluetooth PIN.
4. Enter a new Pairing code or
Bluetooth PIN.
BLUETOOTH
ICON
1. Select ‘‘Connection’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Delete.’’
3. Select the phone you want to
delete. The Bluetooth icon shows
you the currently linked phone.
EX-L and Canadian EX models
SPEED DIAL LIST
WHEN SECURITY
CODE-PROTECTED
If the phone name you selected is
security code protected the speed
dial list becomes ‘‘*******.’’
4. Select ‘‘Yes’’ from the
confirmation screen.
CONTINUED
451
11/08/01 09:34:19 31SZA630_459
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To create a security code for each
phone:
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
When you set a security code for a
phone, you will be asked to enter the
security code every time you select
the phone on the Phone screen.
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
1. Select ‘‘Security PIN’’ or ‘‘Security
Code’’ from the Phone Setup
screen.
2. Select the phone you want to add a
security code to.
452
EX-L and Canadian EX models
3. Enter a 4-digit security code, reenter it.
If the phone is already security code
protected, you need to enter the
current security code before clearing
the code or creating a new one.
11/08/01 09:34:38 31SZA630_460
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you
are on the phone, the call can be
automatically transferred to HFL
with the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Automatic Answering
EX-L and Canadian EX models
You can choose when the HFL
system automatically answers
incoming calls.
To clear the system
This operation clears the security
codes, paired phones, all stored voice
tags, all speed dial entries, and all
imported phonebook data.
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
Features
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
1. Select ‘‘Auto Transfer’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Push the selector knob to turn it
on or off. The default setting is On.
1. Select ‘‘Auto Answer’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
1. Select ‘‘System Clear’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Off,’’ ‘‘2 seconds,’’ ‘‘5
seconds,’’ or ‘‘10 seconds.’’ The
default setting is Off.
2. Select ‘‘Yes’’ from the
confirmation screen.
CONTINUED
453
11/08/01 09:34:51 31SZA630_461
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Automatic Import Cellular
Phonebook and Call History
(available on some phones)
When your phone is paired, the
contents of its phonebook and call
history are automatically imported to
HFL.
Up to three category icons appear
next to the phonebook entries*.
Edit Speed Dial
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
Preference
Fax
Home
Car
EX-L and Canadian EX models
Mobile
Voice
Work
Other
Pager
Message
These indicate how many numbers
are stored for the name. If a name
has more than three category icons,
‘‘…’’ is displayed.
* : Available on some phones
454
The first six speed
dial entries
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be
stored per phone.
The first six speed dials are linked to
the audio preset buttons while in the
Phone screen.
11/08/01 09:35:09 31SZA630_462
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To store a speed dial number:
1. Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
2. Select ‘‘Store Speed dial.’’
You can also select speed dial
directly from the Phone screen.
Select a ‘‘No Entry’’ field, and
continue following step 4.
NOTE: You can also store a speed
dial number through the ‘‘Speed
Dial’’ option on the Phone screen.
EX-L and Canadian EX models
When a voice tag is stored for the
entry, you can dial the entry by voice.
Press the TALK button and say
‘‘Call’’ and the stored name.
To store a speed dial number during a
call:
1. Press and hold the desired audio
preset button during a call.
4. Choose a number:
By Phonebook − the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook
2. The contact information for the
active call will be stored for the
preset button.
By Call History − the last 20
numbers
By Manual Entry − manual
number input
5. When the speed dial number is
successfully stored, you are asked
CONTINUED
455
Features
3. Select a number on the speed dial
list where you want to store the
number.
to store a voice tag for the number
using the TALK button. Follow
the prompts.
11/08/01 09:35:23 31SZA630_463
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial
number:
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
1. Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
To delete a voice tag:
1. Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Delete Voice Tag.’’
2. Select ‘‘Store Voice Tag.’’
3. Select the number you want to
store a voice tag for.
EX-L and Canadian EX models
4. Follow the prompts to complete
the voice tag.
NOTE:
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a
longer name. For example, use
‘‘John Smith’’ instead of ‘‘John.’’
456
3. Select the number you want to
delete the voice tag for.
11/08/01 09:35:40 31SZA630_464
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To delete a speed dial number:
1. Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Delete Speed Dial.’’
To make a call using a name in the
Phonebook:
When your phone is paired, the
contents of its phonebook are
automatically imported to HFL.
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
Features
3. Select the number you want to
delete.
Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any
phone number, using the imported
phonebook, using the call history, or
with speed dial entries, or by redial.
1. Select ‘‘Phonebook’’ from the
Phone screen.
2. Select a name from the list.
CONTINUED
457
11/08/01 09:35:55 31SZA630_465
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
3. Push the selector knob to list the
number or numbers stored for the
selected name.
To make a call using a phone number:
To make a call using Call History:
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
4. Select a number and push the
selector knob to begin automatic
dialing.
1. Select ‘‘Dial’’ from the Phone
screen.
1. Select ‘‘Call History’’ from the
Phone screen.
2. Enter the phone number, and
select
.
2. Call History is sorted by ‘‘All Calls,’’
‘‘Received Calls,’’ ‘‘Dialed Calls,’’
and ‘‘Missed Calls.’’ Selecting a
number begins automatic dialing.
NOTE: Some phones do not support
‘‘All Calls.’’
458
11/08/01 09:36:05 31SZA630_466
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
EX-L and Canadian EX models
NOTE: Any voice-tagged speed dial
entry can be dialed by voice from
any screen.
To make a call using Redial:
Select ‘‘Redial’’ from the Phone
screen or press and hold the PICKUP button to redial the last number
dialed in your phone’s history.
Features
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
2. A list of up to 20 stored speed dial
entries is shown. Select the entry
you want to call, and push
SELECT to begin automatic
dialing.
To make a call using Speed Dial:
PRESET BUTTONS
The first six speed dial entries are
linked to the audio preset buttons
while in the Phone screen. Press the
corresponding button to begin
automatic dialing.
1. Select ‘‘Speed Dial’’ on the Phone
screen.
459
11/08/01 09:36:18 31SZA630_467
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Receiving a Call
When you receive a call, a
notification appears on the screen
(see page 443 ).
During a Call
Example
U.S. EX and Canadian LX models
To answer the call, press the
PICK-UP button on the steering
wheel.
numbers or names during a call. This
is useful when you call a menudriven phone system.
* : Available on some phones.
Touch Tones on U.S. EX and
Canadian LX models.
EX-L and Canadian EX models
To end or decline the call, press the
HANG-UP button.
The following options are available
during a call:
Transfer − Allows you to transfer a
call from HFL to your phone, or
from your phone to HFL.
Mute − Allows you to mute your
voice.
460
Dial Tones* − Allows you to send
11/08/01 09:36:29 31SZA630_468
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Call Waiting
If your phone has Call Waiting, a
beep sounds for an incoming call.
Press and release the PICK-UP
button to put the original call on hold
and answer the incoming call.
Bluetooth Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth name and logos are
registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
461
Features
To return to the original call, press
the PICK-UP button again. If you
don’t want to answer the incoming
call, disregard it and continue with
your original call. If you want to hang
up the original call and answer the
new call, press the HANG-UP button.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will
interrupt Bluetooth Audio when it is
playing. Audio will resume when the
call is ended.
11/08/01 09:36:43 31SZA630_469
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)
allows you to place and receive
phone calls using either the
navigation system controls or voice
commands without the distraction of
handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
Interface Dial
CANCEL BUTTON
PHONE BUTTON
To use HFL, you need a Bluetoothcompatible cell phone. For a list of
compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature
capabilities:
In the U.S., visit handsfreelink.honda.
com or call (888) 528-7876.
In Canada, visit www.handsfreelink.ca,
or call (888) 528-7876.
DIAL
ENTER
Use the Interface Dial to make menu
or list selections.
Press the PHONE button or PICKUP button to go to the Phone screen.
To select an item on the screen, turn
the interface dial left or right to
highlight it, and then press ENTER.
Press the CANCEL button to go
back to the previous screen.
To select an item that comes with
,
,
, or
icons,
push the interface selector up, down,
left, or right.
462
U.S. model is shown.
11/08/01 09:36:59 31SZA630_470
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
HFL Buttons
TALK BUTTON
Voice Control Tips
PICK-UP BUTTON
Try to reduce all background
noise. If the microphone picks up
voices other than yours,
commands may be misinterpreted.
Help Feature
BACK BUTTON
HANG-UP BUTTON
PICK-UP Button − Press and
release to answer a call, or press to
go directly to the Phone screen.
HANG-UP Button − Press and
release to end or decline a call.
TALK Button − Press and release
to give a command.
BACK Button − Press and release
to go back to the previous command,
or cancel the command.
MICROPHONE
Air or wind noise from the
dashboard and side vents and all
windows may interfere with the
microphone. Adjust or close them
as necessary.
For help at any time, including a list
of available options, say ‘‘Help.’’
Language Selection
Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to change the
system’s language between English,
French, and Spanish.
Press and release the Talk button
each time you want to make a
command. After the beep, speak in
a clear, natural tone.
CONTINUED
463
Features
To change the volume level of
HFL, use the audio system volume
knob or the steering wheel volume
controls.
11/08/01 09:37:08 31SZA630_471
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Display
On the navigation screen:
When you receive an incoming call,
you will see the following displays
and notifications.
On the Phone screen:
SIGNAL STRENGTH
ROAM STATUS
BLUETOOTH INDICATOR
You will see ‘‘HANDSFREELINK’’
on the audio display while HFL is in
use.
U.S. model is shown.
BATTERY LEVEL STATUS
CALL NAME PHONE DIALING
Some phones may send battery,
signal strength, and roaming status
information to the screen.
464
11/08/01 09:37:16 31SZA630_472
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
How to Use HFL
The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Display the last 20 incoming, outgoing, or missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
Dial
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
Receive
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
Missed
Display the last 20 missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
Features
All
Call History
Phone
Phonebook
Dial
More
Speed Dial
Display the paired phone’s previously imported phonebook (or import a new one).
Enter a phone number to dial.
Displays a list of all 20 speed dial entries. The first 4 speed dial numbers are shown on the
Phone screen.
Voice commands can be used for all above options. Voice commands for the HFL system can only be used from the PHONE
screen. To quickly access the PHONE screen, press the Pick-Up button on the steering wheel. Press and release the Talk
button each time you give a command. From any other screen, you can press the Talk button and say ‘‘Dial by voice tag’’ or
‘‘Dial by number.’’ The system will guide you through the process.
CONTINUED
465
11/08/01 09:37:23 31SZA630_473
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Add New Phone
Connect
Connection
Disconnect
Pair a new phone to the system.
Connect a previously paired phone to the system.
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Phone
Delete
Pass-key
Phone
Setup
Edit
Speed Dial
Delete a previously paired phone.
Create a Pass-key number for a paired phone.
Store
Speed Dial
Select a number from the Call History, Phonebook, or manual entry
to store as a speed dial number.
Delete
Speed Dial
Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
Store Voice Tag
Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Delete Voice Tag
Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Voice commands can be used for all above options. Voice commands for the HFL system can only be used from the PHONE
screen. To quickly access the PHONE screen, press the Pick-Up button on the steering wheel. Press and release the Talk
button each time you give a command. From any other screen, you can press the Talk button and say ‘‘Dial by voice tag’’ or
‘‘Dial by number.’’ The system will guide you through the process.
466
11/08/01 09:37:30 31SZA630_474
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Phone
Phone
Setup
Create a phone name/PIN number for a paired phone.
Auto Transfer
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
Auto Answer
Set incoming calls to be automatically answered.
Clear Phone
Information
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, speed dials, and pass-keys.
Features
Phone Name/
PIN
Voice commands can be used for all above options. Voice commands for the HFL system can only be used from the PHONE
screen. To quickly access the PHONE screen, press the Pick-Up button on the steering wheel. Press and release the Talk
button each time you give a command. From any other screen, you can press the Talk button and say ‘‘Dial by voice tag’’ or
‘‘Dial by number.’’ The system will guide you through the process.
CONTINUED
467
11/08/01 09:37:39 31SZA630_475
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To use HFL, you need to pair your
Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to
the system.
Phone Screen
HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which
means, the maximum range between
your phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10
meters).
Push the selector down for
PHONE SETUP.
Press the PHONE button or PICKUP button to go to the Phone screen.
468
Phone Setup
You can set up your phone and other
system options with this menu.
11/08/01 09:37:48 31SZA630_476
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Setup Bluetooth Phone
To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system):
Press the PHONE button or PICKUP button. The system starts pairing
when there is no phone paired to the
system.
Features
1. Press the PHONE button or PICKUP button. The system prompts
you to pair a phone. Select ‘‘Yes’’
on the confirmation screen.
2. Make sure your phone is set to
discoverable or visibility is ON,
and select ‘‘OK.’’ HFL begins to
search for your phone.
CONTINUED
469
11/08/01 09:38:02 31SZA630_477
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To pair a cell phone (when there are one
or more phones paired to the system):
U.S. model is shown.
3. If your phone is found, it is
displayed on the screen. Select it
and press ENTER.
5. HFL gives you a 4-digit pass-key
that you will need to input on your
phone.
4. If your phone doesn’t appear on
the list, select ‘‘Phone not found?’’
and search for Bluetooth devices
using your phone. From your
phone, select ‘‘HandsFreeLink.’’
6. When your phone prompts you,
input the 4-digit pass-key.
470
7. You will receive a notification on
the screen and your phone if
pairing is successful.
1. Select ‘‘Phone Setup’’ from the
Phone screen.
2. Select ‘‘Connection’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
3. Select ‘‘Add New Phone.’’
11/08/01 09:38:16 31SZA630_478
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Phone pairing tips
To change the pass-key setting:
You cannot pair your phone while
the vehicle is moving.
Up to six phones can be paired.
4. Select one of the six entries on the
list. Make sure your phone is set
to discoverable or visibility is ON.
5. Follow steps 2 through 7 from the
previous page.
Features
Your phone’s battery may drain
faster when it is paired to HFL.
1. Select ‘‘Connection’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Pass-key.’’
NOTE: The default pass-key ‘‘0000’’
is used until you change the setting.
For a randomly generated pass-key
each time you pair a phone, select
‘‘Random.’’
CONTINUED
471
11/08/01 09:38:27 31SZA630_479
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To delete a paired phone:
Example
Push the selector to left to delete.
TRASH ICON
BLUETOOTH ICON
To create your own pass-key, select
‘‘Fixed’’ and follow steps 3 and 4.
1. Select ‘‘Connection’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
3. Delete the current pass-key.
2. Select ‘‘Delete.’’
4. Enter a new pass-key, and select
‘‘OK.’’
3. Select the phone you want to
delete. The Bluetooth icon shows
you the currently linked phone.
4. A trash icon appears next to the
selected phone. Select ‘‘OK’’ to
continue.
472
5. Select ‘‘Yes’’ from the
confirmation screen.
11/08/01 09:38:40 31SZA630_480
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To name a phone:
Phone Name/PIN
You can name up to six HFL phone
names. Each can be PIN protected,
and have its own phonebook, speed
dial, and call history.
Select a phone name.
Features
1. Select ‘‘Phone Name/PIN’’ from
the Phone Setup screen.
2. Select the phone name you want to
edit on the phone name/PIN
screen.
If the phone name you selected is
PIN-protected, the speed dial list
becomes ‘‘****.’’
1. Select ‘‘Phone Name/PIN’’ from
the Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Phone Name.’’
3. Enter a phone name, and select
‘‘OK’’ when complete.
CONTINUED
473
11/08/01 09:38:53 31SZA630_481
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To create a PIN for each phone:
When you set a PIN for a phone, you
will be asked to enter the PIN every
time you select the phone on the
Phone screen.
1. Select ‘‘Phone Name/PIN’’ from
the Phone Setup screen.
If you select ‘‘DO NOT USE PIN,’’
before entering any number, the
phone will not have a PIN.
If the phone is already PIN-protected,
you need to enter the current PIN
before creating a new one.
Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you
are on the phone, the call can be
automatically transferred to HFL
with the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
1. Select ‘‘Auto Transfer’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘PIN.’’
2. Select ‘‘OFF’’ or ‘‘ON.’’
3. Enter a 4-digit PIN, re-enter it, and
select ‘‘OK.’’
474
11/08/01 09:39:06 31SZA630_482
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Automatic Answering
To clear the phone information
You can choose when the HFL
system automatically answers
incoming calls.
Clearing a phone name will clear all
settings, such as call history and
phonebook.
Features
1. Select ‘‘Clear Phone Information’’
from the Phone Setup screen.
2. Select the phone you want to clear.
1. Select ‘‘Auto Answer’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Off,’’ ‘‘2sec,’’ ‘‘5sec,’’ or
‘‘10sec.’’
3. A trash icon appears next to the
selected phone. Select ‘‘OK’’ to
continue.
4. Select ‘‘Yes’’ from the
confirmation screen.
CONTINUED
475
11/08/01 09:39:19 31SZA630_483
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Automatic Import Cellular
Phonebook and Call History
(available on some phones)
When your phone is paired, the
contents of its phonebook and call
history are automatically imported to
HFL.
Up to three category icons appear
next to the phonebook entries*.
Preference
Fax
Home
Car
Mobile
Voice
Work
Other
Edit Speed Dial
The first four speed dial entries.
Pager
These indicate how many numbers
are stored for the name. If a name
has more than three category icons,
‘‘…’’ is displayed.
* : Available on some phones
476
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be
stored per phone name, and the first
four numbers are displayed on the
Phone screen.
Select a ‘‘No Entry’’ field to store a
speed dial entry, or use the following
procedure.
11/08/01 09:39:31 31SZA630_484
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
5. When the speed dial number is
successfully stored, you are asked
to store a voice tag for the number.
Follow the prompts.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Store Speed dial.’’
4. Choose a number from:
Phonebook − the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook
Call History − the last 20
numbers
Dial − manual number input
CONTINUED
477
Features
When a voice tag is stored for the
entry, you can dial the number by
saying ‘‘Call’’ and the voice tag name.
3. Select a number on the speed dial
list where you want to store the
number.
11/08/01 09:39:45 31SZA630_485
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial
number:
To delete a voice tag:
1. Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
1. Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Delete Voice Tag.’’
2. Select ‘‘Store Voice Tag.’’
3. Select the number you want to
delete the voice tag for.
3. Select the number you want to
store a voice tag for.
4. A trash icon appears next to the
selected numbers. Select ‘‘OK’’ to
continue.
4. Follow the prompts to complete
the voice tag.
NOTE:
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a
longer name. For example, use
‘‘John Smith’’ instead of ‘‘John.’’
478
11/08/01 09:39:58 31SZA630_486
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To delete a speed dial number:
1. Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Delete Speed Dial.’’
Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any
phone number, using the imported
phonebook, using the call history, or
with speed dial entries.
To make a call using a name in the
Phonebook:
When your phone is paired, the
contents of its phonebook are
automatically imported to HFL.
Features
3. Select the number you want to
delete, and push ENTER.
4. A trash icon appears next to the
selected numbers. Select ‘‘OK’’ to
continue.
NOTE: If you are not on the PHONE
screen, you can press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Dial by voice tag’’ or
‘‘Dial by number.’’ The system will
guide you through the process.
1. Select ‘‘Phonebook’’ from the
Phone screen.
2. Select a name from the list.
CONTINUED
479
11/08/01 09:40:11 31SZA630_487
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
3. Push ENTER to list the number or
numbers stored for the selected
name.
To make a call using a phone number:
To make a call using Call History:
HISTORY LIST
4. Select a number and push ENTER
to begin automatic dialing.
1. Select ‘‘Dial’’ from the Phone
screen.
1. Select ‘‘Call History’’ from the
Phone screen.
2. Enter the phone number, and
select ‘‘Dial.’’
2. Call History is sorted by ‘‘All,’’
‘‘Dial,’’ ‘‘Receive,’’ and ‘‘Missed.’’
Selecting a number begins
automatic dialing.
To enter the phone number by voice,
say it in a continuous string.
NOTE: Some phones do not support
‘‘All’’ in the Call History.
480
11/08/01 09:40:23 31SZA630_488
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To make a call using Speed Dial:
SPEED DIAL PHONE ICON
To make a call using More Speed Dial:
1. Select ‘‘More Speed Dial’’ on the
Phone screen.
NOTE: Any voice-tagged speed dial
entry can be dialed by voice from
any screen.
To answer the call, press the
PICK-UP button on the steering
wheel.
To end or decline the call, press the
HANG-UP button.
VOICE TAG ICON
To make a call using Redial:
Select one of the four entries on the
Phone screen, and push ENTER to
begin automatic dialing.
Press and hold the PICK-UP button
to redial the last number dialed in
your phone’s history. While the
display is showing Phone screen, you
can also redial by pressing and
holding ENTER.
481
Features
2. A list of 20 stored speed dial
entries is shown. Select the entry
you want to call, and push ENTER
to begin automatic dialing.
Receiving a Call
When you receive a call, a
notification appears on the screen
(see page 464 ).
11/08/01 09:40:33 31SZA630_489
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
During a Call
Example
Transfer − Allows you to transfer a
call from HFL to your phone, or
from your phone to HFL.
Mute − Allows you to mute your
Call Waiting
If your phone has Call Waiting, press
and release the PICK-UP button to
put the original call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
voice.
* : Available on some phones
The following options are available
during a call:
Dial Tones* − Allows you to send
numbers or names during a call. This
is useful when you call a menudriven phone system.
482
To return to the original call, press
the PICK-UP button again. If you
don’t want to answer the incoming
call, disregard it and continue with
your original call. If you want to hang
up the original call and answer the
new call, press the HANG-UP button.
11/08/01 09:40:41 31SZA630_490
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will
interrupt Bluetooth Audio when it is
playing. Audio will resume when the
call is ended.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
483
Features
Bluetooth Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth name and logos are
registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
11/08/01 09:40:49 31SZA630_491
Parking Sensor System
All obstacles may not always be
sensed. Even when the system is on,
you should look for obstacles near
your vehicle to make sure it is safe to
park.
On Touring models
Your vehicle has a parking sensor
system. The system lets you know
the approximate distance between
your vehicle and most obstacles
while you are parking. When the
system is on and your vehicle is
nearing an obstacle, you will hear a
beeper and see system messages on
the multi-information display.
The system has two front corner
sensors, two rear corner sensors,
and two rear center sensors.
PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM SWITCH
To activate the system, push the
switch on the dashboard with the
ignition in the ON (II) position. The
indicator in the switch comes on
when the system is on. To turn the
system off, push the switch again.
484
The rear center sensors work when
the shift lever is in reverse (R), and
the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
The corner sensors work only when
the shift lever is in any position other
than P and the vehicle speed is less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
11/08/01 09:40:57 31SZA630_492
Parking Sensor System
Indicators and Beeper Operation
on the Multi-Information
Display/Audio Screen
When the system senses an obstacle,
the appropriate indicator comes on,
and a beeper sounds as shown in the
following tables.
Features
Audio Screen
When you turn the system on, all
indicators will appear on the multiinformation display, and a beeper
sounds once.
The parking sensor indicators are
automatically displayed on the audio
screen when an obstacle is detected.
CONTINUED
485
11/08/01 09:41:06 31SZA630_493
Parking Sensor System
Corner Sensor Operation
Example shown: Obstacle is at the left front of the vehicle.
About 18-24 in
(45-60 cm)
About 14-18 in
(35-45 cm)
About 14 in
(35 cm) or less
Distance
Upper left indicator stays on.
Indicator blinks.
INDICATOR
Indicator
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
Beeper
Short beeps
Audio
Screen
Indicator
Color
Amber
486
Very short beeps
AUDIO SCREEN
Continuous
beeps
Red
11/08/01 09:41:16 31SZA630_494
Parking Sensor System
Rear Center Sensor Operation
About 28-43 in
(70-110 cm)
About 22-28 in
(55-70 cm)
About 18-22 in
(45-55 cm)
About 18 in
(45 cm) or less
Distance
Features
Bottom indicator stays on.
Indicator blinks.
Indicator
INDICATOR
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
Beeper
Long beeps
Short beeps
Audio
Screen
Indicator
Color
Yellow
Amber
AUDIO SCREEN
Very short beeps
Continuous
beeps
Red
CONTINUED
487
11/08/01 09:41:23 31SZA630_495
Parking Sensor System
If the system develops a problem,
you will see a ‘‘CHECK PARKING
SENSOR SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display.
If there is a problem with any of the
operational sensors, the indicators
for these sensors will appear
constantly in red.
Very often, a sensor covered with
mud, ice, snow, etc. is the cause of
this display. Check the sensors first.
If the indicators stay on or the
beeper does not stop, have the
system checked by your dealer.
488
11/08/01 09:41:38 31SZA630_496
Parking Sensor System
When the system is affected by
some electrical equipment or
devices generating an ultrasonic
wave.
When operating the vehicle in bad
weather.
The range of the corner sensors and
the rear center sensor are limited.
Each corner sensor is capable of
sensing an obstacle only when your
vehicle is 24 in (60 cm) or closer.
The rear center sensor senses an
obstacle that is behind your vehicle
43 in (1.1 m) or closer.
Do not put any accessories on or
around the sensors.
Within about 43 in (1.1 m)
The system may not function
properly under these conditions:
The sensors are covered with
snow, ice, mud, etc.
When the vehicle is on a rough
road, on grass, or on a hill.
After the vehicle has been sitting
out in hot or cold weather.
CONTINUED
489
Features
Within about 24 in (60 cm)
The system may not sense thin or
low objects, or sonic-absorptive
materials such as snow, cotton, or
sponge.
The system cannot sense objects
directly under the bumper.
11/08/01 09:41:49 31SZA630_497
Parking Sensor System
The parking sensor system must be
turned off before beginning this
procedure.
When you shift to reverse (R), the
LED indicator in the switch will blink
as a reminder that the rear sensors
are disabled.
1. Press and hold the parking sensor
system switch and then turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
To return to the original setting,
repeat the procedure. A beeper will
sound 3 times to confirm that the
rear sensors are now enabled.
To turn off all rear sensors
2. Keep pressing the switch for 10
seconds. The LED indicator in the
switch will flash.
3. Press the switch again and the
LED indicator will turn off. A
beeper will sound twice to confirm
that the rear sensors are now
disabled.
490
Canadian Owners:
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
This ISM device complies with Canadian
ICES-001.
11/08/01 09:41:59 31SZA630_498
Rearview Camera and Monitor
On Canadian EX and EX-L without
navigation system
The camera display has parking
guide lines that indicate distance
from your vehicle.
SCREEN DISPLAY
1st Line
To turn off the guidelines, press and
hold the RETURN button for about 3
seconds.
ACTUAL DISTANCE
Whenever you shift to reverse (R)
with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the rearview is shown
on the display.
1st Line
2nd Line
3rd Line
4th Line
CONTINUED
491
Features
2nd Line
3rd Line
4th Line
20 in (0.5 m)
Tailgate Open Range
39 in (1 m)
79 in (2 m)
118 in (3 m)
11/08/01 09:42:06 31SZA630_499
Rearview Camera and Monitor
NOTE:
For the best picture, always keep
the rearview camera clean, and do
not cover the camera lens. To
avoid scratching the lens when
you clean it, use a moist, soft cloth.
The rearview camera has a unique
lens that makes objects appear
closer than they actually are.
The rearview camera display has a
limited coverage, and the size and
position of objects may appear
different than they actually are.
Make sure to check the
surrounding area carefully.
492
On models with Navigation System
Refer to the navigation system
manual for operation of the rearview
camera.
11/08/01 09:42:10 31SZA630_500
Before Driving
Break-in Period .............................. 494
Fuel Recommendation .................. 495
Service Station Procedures .......... 497
Refueling..................................... 497
Tighten Fuel Cap Message ...... 498
Opening and Closing the
Hood ........................................ 499
Oil Check .................................... 500
Engine Coolant Check .............. 500
Fuel Economy ................................ 501
Accessories and Modifications .... 504
Carrying Cargo .............................. 506
493
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
11/08/01 09:42:18 31SZA630_501
Break-in Period
Break-in Period
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Avoid hard braking for the first
200 miles (300 km).
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
Do not tow a trailer.
494
You should also follow these
recommendations after the brakes
are replaced or if the vehicle
receives an overhauled or new
engine.
11/08/01 09:42:29 31SZA630_502
Fuel Recommendation
Fuel Recommendation
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy, metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol. Your
vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to
10% ethanol by volume. Do not use
gasoline containing methanol. If you
notice any undesirable operating
symptoms, try another service
station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.
If a non-FFV is inadvertently
ref ueled once with E85 f uel, have
the f uel tank drained at a dealer.
If this occurs over a prolonged
period, damage may occur.
To help prevent harmf ul f uel system
and engine deposits, use high quality
f uel containing detergent and additives.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain harmful
manganese-based fuel additives such
as MMT, if such gasoline is available.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your dealer for service.
CONTINUED
495
Before Driving
Premium fuel is recommended when
towing in certain conditions (see
page 549 ).
Do not use E85 f uel in a non-Flex Fuel
Vehicle (FFV).
Non-FFV models are not designed to
run on E85 f uel. Using E85 f uel can
damage the f uel system components.
11/08/01 09:42:33 31SZA630_503
Fuel Recommendation
Because the level of detergency and
additives in gasoline vary in the
market, Honda endorses the use of
‘‘TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline’’
where available to help maintain the
performance and reliability of your
vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline
standard jointly established by
leading automotive manufacturers to
meet the needs of today’s advanced
engines. Qualifying gasoline retailers
will, in most cases, identify their
gasoline as having met ‘‘TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline’’ standards at the
retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper
level of detergent additives and be
free of metallic additives. The proper
level of detergent additives, and
absence of harmful metallic additives
in gasoline, help avoid build-up of
deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
496
For further important fuel-related
information for your vehicle, or
information on gasoline that does not
contain MMT, visit Owner Link at
owners.honda.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional
information on gasoline. For more
information on top tier gasoline, visit
www.toptiergas.com.
11/08/01 09:42:45 31SZA630_504
Service Station Procedures
Refueling
FUEL FILL CAP
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE
TETHER
1. Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
2. Open the fuel fill door by pulling
on the handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank equalizes.
Place the cap in the holder on the
fuel fill door.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. This
leaves some room in the fuel tank
for the fuel to expand with
temperature changes.
Before Driving
HOLDER
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery system.
The system helps keep fuel vapor
from going into the atmosphere. Try
filling at another pump. If this does
not fix the problem, consult your
dealer.
Fuel is highly flammable and
explosive. You can be burned
or seriously injured when
handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
CONTINUED
497
11/08/01 09:42:54 31SZA630_505
Service Station Procedures
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once.
Tighten Fuel Cap Message
On Touring models
Except Touring models
If you do not properly tighten the
cap, you will see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display (see page 84 ).
On Touring models
If you do not properly tighten the
cap, you will see a ‘‘TIGHTEN
FUEL CAP’’ message on the multiinformation display.
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
498
Your vehicle’s on board diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the multi-information
display. Turn the engine off, and
confirm the fuel fill cap is installed. If
it is, loosen it, then retighten it until
it clicks at least once. The message
should go off after several days of
normal driving once you tighten or
replace the fuel fill cap. To scroll to
another message, press the INFO
button. The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’
message will appear each time you
restart the engine until the system
turns the message off.
If the system still detects a leak in
the vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page 626 .
11/08/01 09:43:05 31SZA630_506
Service Station Procedures
Opening and Closing the Hood
SUPPORT ROD
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
GRIP
1. Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
2. Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood near the center.
Slide your hand to your left until
you feel the hood latch handle.
Push this handle up until it
releases the hood. Lift up the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,
or if you can open the hood without
lifting the handle, the mechanism
should be cleaned and lubricated.
CLIP
3. Holding the grip, pull the support
rod out of its clip. Insert the end
into the designated hole in the
hood.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
499
Before Driving
LATCH
11/08/01 09:43:18 31SZA630_507
Service Station Procedures
Oil Check
Engine Coolant Check
DIPSTICK
RESERVE TANK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
MIN
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
4. Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see Adding Engine Oil on page 576 .
3. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into its hole.
500
MAX
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 579 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Refer to Owner’s Maintenance
Checks on page 571 for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
11/08/01 09:43:30 31SZA630_508
Fuel Economy
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel
Economy Estimates Comparison.
Fuel economy is not a fixed number.
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits, and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments.
City MPG − Represents urban
driving in light traffic. A range of
miles per gallon achieved is also
provided.
Highway MPG − Represents a
mixture of rural and interstate
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle,
typical of longer trips in free-flowing
traffic. A range of miles per gallon
Highway MPG
Combined Fuel
Economy
Estimated Annual
Fuel Cost
(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
achieved is also provided.
Combined Fuel Economy −
Represents a combination of city and
highway driving. The scale
represents the range of combined
fuel economy for other vehicles in
the class.
per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost
data) divided by the combined fuel
economy.
For more information on fuel
economy ratings and factors that
affect fuel economy, visit www.
fueleconomy.gov (Canada: Visit www.
vehicles.gc.ca)
Estimated Annual Fuel Cost −
Provides an estimated annual fuel
cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
km) per year multiplied by the cost
501
Before Driving
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shown in the example to the right
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA
estimates include:
City MPG
11/08/01 09:43:47 31SZA630_509
Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy Factors
The following factors can lower your
vehicle’s fuel economy:
Aggressive driving (hard
acceleration and braking)
Excessive idling, accelerating and
braking in stop-and-go traffic
Cold engine operation (engines
are more efficient when warmed
up)
Driving with a heavy load or the
air conditioner running
Improperly inflated tires
Improving Fuel Economy
Vehicle Maintenance
A properly maintained vehicle
maximizes fuel economy. Poor
maintenance can significantly reduce
fuel economy. Always maintain your
vehicle according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the
information display (see Owner’s
Maintenance Checks on page 571 ).
For example:
502
Use the recommended viscosity
motor oil, displaying the API
Certification Seal (see page
576).
Maintain proper tire inflation
− An underinflated tire increases
‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces
fuel economy.
Avoid carrying excess weight in
your vehicle − It puts a heavier
load on the engine, increasing fuel
consumption.
Keep your vehicle clean − In
particular, a build-up of snow or
mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
economy.
Drive Efficiently
Drive moderately − Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking increase fuel
consumption.
Observe the speed limit −
Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
on fuel economy at speeds above
45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
speed and you reduce the drag.
Trailers, car top carriers, roof
racks and bike racks are also big
contributors to increased drag.
Avoid excessive idling − Idling
results in 0 miles per gallon (0 kms
per liter).
11/08/01 09:43:59 31SZA630_510
Fuel Economy
Checking Your Fuel Economy
Miles driven
Gallons of
fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100
Liter
Kilometers
Before Driving
Minimize the use of the air
conditioning system − The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible.
Plan and combine trips −
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.
L per 100 km
Calculating Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking
fuel gauge readings are NOT
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles
(kilometers).
1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
2) Reset trip counter to zero.
3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
4) Follow one of the simple calculations above.
503
11/08/01 09:44:11 31SZA630_511
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
non-Honda accessories, may make it
unsafe. Before you make any
modifications or add any accessories,
be sure to read the following
information.
Accessories
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
504
Before installing any accessory:
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and
tire pressure monitoring system.
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page 629 ) or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. Accessories installed in
these areas may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
11/08/01 09:44:21 31SZA630_512
Accessories and Modifications
Non-Honda wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS).
Some examples are:
Lowering your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling, stability, and
reliability.
Before Driving
Modifying Your Vehicle
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with
non-Honda components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
505
11/08/01 09:44:32 31SZA630_513
Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
GLOVE BOX
DOOR POCKETS
Glove box
Door and seat-back pockets
Rear cargo area, including the
second and third row seats when
folded flat
Console compartment
Storage compartment
Roof-rack (if equipped)
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
SEAT-BACK POCKETS
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
506
CARGO AREA/UNDER
FLOOR STORAGE WELL
11/08/01 09:44:46 31SZA630_514
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 1,340 lbs (608 kg).
See Tire And Loading Information
label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
Label Example
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit −
(1)Locate the statement ‘‘The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s
placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(5)Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
CONTINUED
507
Before Driving
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if
you are towing a trailer.
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
(4)The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.
(1,400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
11/08/01 09:45:01 31SZA630_515
Carrying Cargo
Example 1
Max Load (1,340 lbs)
(608 kg)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
(1,040 lbs)
(472 kg)
Max Load (1,340 lbs)
(608 kg)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs)
(68 kg x 4 = 272 kg)
Cargo Weight
(740 lbs)
(336 kg)
Max Load (1,340 lbs)
(608 kg)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs)
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
(590 lbs)
(268 kg)
Example 2
Example 3
508
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
are on a label on the driver’s
doorjamb.
11/08/01 09:45:13 31SZA630_516
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Cargo in the Passenger
Compartment
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Keep all cargo below the bottom
of the windows. If it is higher, it
could interfere with the proper
operation of the side curtain
airbags.
If you fold down the second or
third row seats, tie down items
that could be thrown about the
vehicle during a crash or sudden
stop.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the
tailgate or the glass hatch, exhaust
gas can enter the passenger area.
To avoid the possibility of carbon
monoxide poisoning, follow the
instructions on page 60 .
If you carry any items on a roof
rack, be sure the total weight of
the rack and the items does not
exceed 165 lbs (75 kg).
If you use an accessory roof rack,
the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information
that came with your roof rack.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
509
Before Driving
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
underneath and interfere with the
proper operation of the seats, the
sensors under the seats, or the
driver’s ability to operate the
pedals.
Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
or on a Roof Rack
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the cargo area, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
11/08/01 09:45:22 31SZA630_517
Carrying Cargo
Optional Separation Net
The separation net can be used to
hold back soft, lightweight items
stored in the cargo area. Heavy
items should be tied down, as the net
may not prevent them from being
thrown about the vehicle in a crash
or a sudden stop.
Optional Cargo Cover
The cargo cover can be used to
cover the cargo area behind the third
row seats. When the third row seats
are folded down, the cargo cover can
be extended over the larger area. Do
not install the cover over the larger
area if the third row seats are not
folded down.
510
Cargo Hooks
GROCERY HOOK
CARGO HOOKS
The four hooks on the side panels
can be used to install a net for
securing items. Each hook is
designed to hold up to 56.2 lbs (25.5
kg) of weight.
Your vehicle also has grocery
hook(s) on the side panels and on
the back of the third row seats in the
cargo area.
They are designed to hold light
items. Heavy objects may damage
the hook.
11/08/01 09:45:26 31SZA630_518
Driving
Driving Guidelines ......................... 512
Preparing to Drive ......................... 512
Starting the Engine........................ 513
Check Starter System
Message .................................. 514
Automatic Transmission............... 515
VTM-4 System ............................. 520
Parking ............................................ 521
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ....................................... 522
Braking System.............................. 530
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 531
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),
aka Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), System ......... 533
Towing a Trailer ............................ 536
Off-Highway Driving
Guidelines ................................... 552
511
Driving
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmission. It also
includes important information on
parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the Variable Torque
Management 4-wheel drive
(VTM-4 ) system, the vehicle
stability assist (VSA ), aka
Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
system, the tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS), and facts you need
if you are planning to tow a trailer or
drive off-highway.
11/08/01 09:45:43 31SZA630_519
Driving Guidelines, Preparing to Drive
Driving Guidelines
Your vehicle has higher ground
clearance that allows you to travel
over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good
visibility so you can anticipate
problems earlier.
Do not modify your vehicle in any
way that would raise the center of
gravity.
Do not carry heavy cargo on the
roof.
4WD models only
Because your vehicle rides higher
off the ground, it has a high center
of gravity that can cause it to roll
over if you make abrupt turns. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher
roll over rate than other types of
vehicles.
Your vehicle is equipped with a fourwheel drive (4WD) system. When
the system senses a loss of frontwheel traction, it automatically
transfers some power to the rear
wheels. This gives you better
traction and mobility.
To prevent rollovers or loss of
control:
You still need to exercise the same
care when accelerating, steering, and
braking that you would in a twowheel drive vehicle.
Take corners at slower speeds
than you would with a passenger
vehicle.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers whenever possible.
512
See page 552 for off-highway driving
guidelines.
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
3. Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
4. Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
5. Check the seat adjustment (see
page 154 ).
11/08/01 09:45:59 31SZA630_520
Preparing to Drive, Starting the Engine
6. Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page 172 ).
7. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 132 ).
8. Make sure the doors, the tailgate,
and the glass hatch are securely
closed and locked.
Starting the Engine
Your vehicle’s starter system has an
auto control mode. When you turn
the ignition switch to the START
(III) position, this feature keeps the
engine’s starter motor running until
the engine starts. Follow these
instructions to start the engine:
starter motor runs for about 6 to 9
seconds until the engine starts.
If you hold the ignition switch in
the START (III) position for more
than 7 seconds, the starter motor,
depending on the outside
temperature, runs for about 10 to
25 seconds until the engine starts.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
10.When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel, and the
messages on the information
display or multi-information
display (depending on the model)
(see pages 65 , 66 , 80 , and
93 ).
3. Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, then
release the ignition switch. You do
not need to hold the ignition
switch in the START (III) position
to start the engine. Depending on
the outside temperature, the
If the engine does not start, wait at
least 10 seconds before trying
again.
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
more inf ormation, see page 134 .
CONTINUED
513
Driving
9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page 17 ).
11/08/01 09:46:07 31SZA630_521
Starting the Engine
Check Starter System Message
On Touring models
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
U.S.
Canada
If there is a problem with the starter
system, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
STARTER SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display when
the ignition switch is turned to the
ON (II) position. You will also see
this message when the auto control
mode of the starter system has a
problem.
514
If this message is on, the ignition
switch has to be held in the
START (III) position manually
until the engine starts. The
ignition switch can be held in that
position up to 15 seconds.
Even though you may be able to
start the engine manually without
the auto control mode of the starter
system, have your dealer inspect
your vehicle.
11/08/01 09:46:18 31SZA630_522
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
Shifting
On Touring models
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
To shift from any position, press
firmly on the brake pedal and the
release button on the side of the
shift lever. You cannot shift out of
Park when the ignition switch is in
the LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
position.
CONTINUED
515
Driving
U.S. model is shown.
When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a
possible problem with the
transmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
TRANSMISSION’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
94 ).
11/08/01 09:46:26 31SZA630_523
Automatic Transmission
To shift from:
P to R
R to P
N to R
D to 2
2 to 1
1 to 2
2 to D
D to N
N to D
R to N
D3 to D
D to D3
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and the
shift lever release button.
Press the shift lever release
button.
Move the shift lever.
Press the D3 button.
Park (P) − This position mechanically locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and the release button on the
shift lever. Make sure your foot is off
the accelerator pedal.
516
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on
page 518 .
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. The shift lever must be in
Park before you can remove the key
from the ignition switch.
Reverse (R) − Press the brake
pedal and the release button on the
front of the shift lever to shift from
Park to reverse. To shift from
reverse to neutral, come to a
complete stop, and then shift. Press
the release button before shifting
into reverse from neutral.
Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.
11/08/01 09:46:37 31SZA630_524
Automatic Transmission
Drive (D) − Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
speed and acceleration. You may
notice the transmission shifting up at
higher engine speeds when the
engine is cold. This helps the engine
warm up faster.
Drive (D3) − To use D3, press the
D3 button when the shift lever is in
the ‘‘D’’ position. This position is similar to D, except only the first three
gears are selected instead of all five.
Use D3 when towing a trailer in hilly
terrain, or to provide engine braking
when going down a steep hill. D3 can
also keep the transmission from
cycling between third and fourth
gears in stop-and-go driving.
Second (2) − This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop.
CONTINUED
517
Driving
Use second gear:
For more power when climbing.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
When driving downhill with a
trailer.
11/08/01 09:46:45 31SZA630_525
Automatic Transmission
First (1) − To shift from second to
first, press the release button on the
side of the shift lever. This position
locks the transmission in first gear.
By upshifting and downshifting
through 1, 2, D3, and D, you can
operate the transmission much like a
manual transmission without a
clutch pedal.
Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.
518
Shift Lock Release
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
11/08/01 09:46:55 31SZA630_526
Automatic Transmission
RELEASE BUTTON
COVER
3. Put a cloth on the edge of the shift
lock release slot cover to prevent
scratches. Use a small flat-tip
screwdriver or metal fingernail file
to carefully pry up the edge of the
cover and remove it from the slot.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Driving
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
6. Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then install the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the underside.
Insert the key back into the
ignition switch, press the brake
pedal, and restart the engine.
4. Insert the key in the shift lock
release slot.
5. Push down on the key while you
press the release button on the
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to neutral.
519
11/08/01 09:47:09 31SZA630_527
VTM-4 System
4WD models only
The variable torque management
4WD (VTM-4) system automatically
transfers varying amounts of engine
torque to the rear wheels under
lower traction conditions.
If more traction is needed when your
vehicle is stuck, or is likely to
become stuck, you can use the
VTM-4 LOCK button to increase
torque to the rear wheels.
To Engage the VTM-4 Lock
1. The vehicle must be stopped with
the engine running.
2. Move the shift lever to first (1),
second (2), or reverse (R) gear.
3. Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.
The indicator in the button comes
on.
To Disengage the VTM-4 Lock, do
any of the following:
Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.
To get unstuck, apply light pressure
to the accelerator pedal. Do not spin
the front tires for more than a few
seconds. Because of the amount of
torque applied to the rear tires, they
should not spin. This is normal. If
you are not able to move the vehicle,
stop and reverse direction.
The VTM-4 Lock will temporarily
disengage when the vehicle speed
exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). The
indicator in the button will remain on.
Do not use the VTM-4 LOCK button on
dry, paved roads. Driving on dry,
paved roads with VTM-4 Lock ON may
damage the rear dif f erential when
making a turn. Strange noise and
vibration can also result.
520
Move the shift lever to D or D3.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
Do not continuously spin the f ront tires
of your vehicle. Continuously spinning
the f ront tires can cause transmission
or rear dif f erential damage.
11/08/01 09:47:20 31SZA630_528
Parking
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
Parking Tips
Make sure the moonroof (if
equipped) and the windows are
closed.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
Turn off the lights.
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.
in the cargo area or take them
with you.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
Except LX models
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
521
Driving
Lock the doors and the tailgate.
Make sure the glass hatch is
closed securely.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb.
11/08/01 09:47:31 31SZA630_529
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Except Touring models
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor (not including the spare tire).
If the air pressure of a tire becomes
significantly low while driving, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure indicator to come on.
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
When the low tire pressure indicator
is on, one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. You
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure as indicated on
the vehicle’s tire information placard.
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly to the station, then
inflate the tire to the recommended
pressure.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 612 ).
If you cannot make the low tire
pressure indicator go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.
522
Driving on a significantly under
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Because tire pressure varies by
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure indicator may
come on unexpectedly.
11/08/01 09:47:44 31SZA630_530
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Refer to page 599 for tire inflation
guidelines.
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
the tire pressures monthly.
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when cold, and
set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified on the tire
information label and in the owner’s
manual (see page 600 ).
Tire Pressure Monitor
The appropriate tire indicator and
low tire pressure indicator comes on
if a tire becomes significantly
underinflated. See Low Tire
Pressure Indicator on page 72 .
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
This indicator comes on and stays on
if there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system.
If this happens, the system will shut
off and no longer monitor tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
system automatically turns on even if
the VSA system is turned off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
page 534 ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
When you restart the vehicle with
the compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator may also come on and stay
on after driving several miles
(kilometers).
523
Driving
For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure
indicator to come on. Or, if you
check and adjust your tire pressure
in cooler conditions, and drive into
extremely hot conditions, the tire
may become overinflated. However,
the low tire pressure indicator will
not come on if the tires are
overinflated.
11/08/01 09:47:54 31SZA630_531
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Changing a Tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure indicator will come on.
Replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 612 ).
Each wheel (except the compact
spare tire wheel) is equipped with a
tire pressure sensor. You must use
TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
qualified technician.
After you replace the flat tire with
the compact spare tire, the low tire
pressure indicator stays on. This is
normal; the system is not monitoring
the spare tire pressure. Manually
check the spare tire pressure to be
sure it is correct. After several miles
(kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low tire
pressure indicator goes off.
524
The low tire pressure indicator or
the TPMS indicator will go off, after
several miles (kilometers) driving,
when you replace the spare tire with
the specified regular tire equipped
with the tire pressure monitor sensor.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Have the flat tire repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
11/08/01 09:48:04 31SZA630_532
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
On Touring models
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly to the station, then
inflate the tire to the recommended
pressure.
It is possible that the pressures
shown on the multi-information
display and the pressures you
manually measure are slightly
different.
If the difference is significant or you
cannot make the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator and message on the
multi-information display go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 613 ).
Because tire pressure varies by
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator may come on unexpectedly.
CONTINUED
525
Driving
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
becomes significantly low, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator in the
instrument panel to come on. If this
happens, you will see which tire is
losing pressure on the multiinformation display along with a
‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’
message.
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
When the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator is on, one or more of your
tires is significantly underinflated.
You should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure as indicated
on the vehicle’s tire information
placard.
11/08/01 09:48:14 31SZA630_533
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator to come on. Or, if
you check and adjust your tire
pressure in cooler conditions, and
drive into extremely hot conditions,
the tire may become overinflated.
However, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator will not come on if
the tires are overinflated.
Refer to page 599 for tire inflation
guidelines.
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
this indicator begins to flash. It stops
flashing after approximately 1
minute, then stays on. You will also
see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page 94 ).
526
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
the tire pressures monthly.
Tire Pressure Monitor
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when the
vehicle is cold, and set to the
recommended inflation pressure as
specified on the vehicle placard and
in the owner’s manual (see page
600 ).
To select the tire pressure monitor,
press the INFO button several times
with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position.
You will see the above display on the
multi-information display when all
tire pressures are normal.
11/08/01 09:48:22 31SZA630_534
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
To see the inflation pressures of all
four tires, press the SEL/RESET
button. The display changes as
shown above.
Canadian models
Each tire pressure is shown in PSI
(U.S. models) or in kPa (Canadian
models).
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
becomes significantly low, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator in the
instrument panel to come on. If this
happens, you will see which tire is
losing pressure on the multiinformation display along with a
‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’
CONTINUED
message.
527
Driving
U.S. models
11/08/01 09:48:31 31SZA630_535
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
TPMS System Failure
If any of the tires has low pressure,
the tire pressure monitor also shows
the above message to warn you
about the low tire pressure when you
select the display by pressing the
INFO button several times.
Following this display, press the
SEL/RESET button to see each tire
pressure. When you continue driving
after installing the spare tire, you will
also see this message on the multiinformation display.
528
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
the tire pressure monitor shows a
‘‘SYSTEM FUNCTION ERROR’’
message and the tire pressure
readings are not displayed. If this
happens, you will first see a system
warning message ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ on the multi-information
display.
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
you will see the above message on
the multi-information display.
If you see this message, the system
is off and is not monitoring the tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
Also, the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator begins to flash, then stays
on (see page 525 ).
11/08/02 09:37:06 31SZA630_536
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on, or the multiinformation display shows a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message,
the VSA system automatically turns
on even when the VSA system is
turned off by pressing the VSA OFF
switch (see page 534 ). If this
happens, you cannot turn the VSA
system off by pressing the VSA OFF
switch again.
Changing a Tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure/TPMS and tire monitor
indicators will come on. Replace the
indicated flat tire with the compact
spare tire (see page 612 ).
This indicator and the warning
message on the multi-information
display will go off, after several miles
(kilometers) driving, when the spare
tire is replaced with the specified
regular tire equipped with the tire
pressure monitor sensor.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor. You must use
TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
a qualified technician.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Have the flat tire repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible.
Driving
When you restart the vehicle with
the compact spare tire, the TPMS
system message will also be
displayed on the multi-information
display after several miles
(kilometers) driving.
After the flat tire is replaced with the
spare tire, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator stays on while
driving. After several miles
(kilometers) driving, this indicator
begins to flash, then stays on again.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display. This is normal;
the system cannot monitor the spare
tire pressure. Manually check the
spare tire pressure to be sure it is
correct.
CONTINUED
529
11/08/01 09:48:49 31SZA630_537
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Braking System
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
530
Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The emergency
brake assist system increases the
stopping force when you depress the
brake pedal hard in an emergency
situation. The anti-lock brake system
(ABS) helps you retain steering
control when braking very hard.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, reduces their effectiveness and
reduces brake pad life. In addition,
fuel economy can be reduced. It also
keeps your brake lights on all the
time, confusing drivers behind you.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effectiveness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Check the brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious in your driving.
11/08/01 10:57:07 31SZA630_538
Braking System, Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Braking System Design
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
The electronic brake distribution
(EBD) system, which is part of the
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
braking distribution according to
vehicle loading.
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
may hear some noise. This is normal:
it is the ABS rapidly pumping the
brakes. On dry pavement, you will
need to press on the brake pedal
very hard before the ABS activates.
However, you may feel the ABS
activate immediately if you are trying
to stop on snow or ice.
Driving
Brake Wear Indicators
All four brakes have audible brake
wear indicators.
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helps prevent the wheels from
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
You should never pump the brake pedal.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
531
11/08/01 10:57:20 31SZA630_539
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
ABS Indicator
If this indicator comes on, the antilock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 93 ).
If the indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as instructed
on page 627 .
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the EBD system may also
be shut down.
Important Safety Reminders
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle. It only helps with steering
control during braking.
On Touring models
If this happens, you will also see the
‘‘CHECK ABS SYSTEM’’ and
‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’
messages on the multi-information
display.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page 627 . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without antilock.
532
11/08/01 10:57:33 31SZA630_540
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and
by selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA is off, the VSA OFF
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA activation indicator blink.
If this indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
NOTE: The main function of the
VSA system is generally known as
Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
The system also includes a traction
control function.
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
CONTINUED
533
Driving
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some noise from the VSA
hydraulic system. You will also see
the VSA system indicator blink.
VSA OFF Indicator
11/08/01 10:57:44 31SZA630_541
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Except Touring models
VSA OFF Switch
If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, see
page 523 .
On Touring models
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on, see page 525 .
Or, if the multi-information display
shows a ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ message with the
indicator flashing, see page 94 .
In this case, you cannot turn off the
VSA using the OFF switch again.
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
534
This switch is under the driver’s side
vent. To turn the VSA system on and
off, press and hold it until you hear a
beep.
When VSA is off, the VSA OFF
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Press and hold the switch again. It
turns the system back on.
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
also off. You should only attempt to
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.
Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.
11/08/01 10:57:51 31SZA630_542
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA and Tire Sizes
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page 605 ).
This feature starts operating a few
seconds after you are in any drive
gear position (when faced uphill) or
in reverse (when faced downhill).
This feature requires that the
vehicle has come to a complete stop
before it can work.
Driving
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.
Hill Start Assist
Your vehicle is equipped with a hill
start assist feature to help prevent
the vehicle from rolling on inclines
as you move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator.
Hill start assist may not hold a
heavily loaded vehicle, such as when
your vehicle is connected to a trailer,
or prevent your vehicle from rolling
downhill on a very steep or slippery
slope.
535
11/08/01 10:58:01 31SZA630_543
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can also use it to
tow a trailer if you carefully observe
the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the guidelines
in this section.
Break-In Period
Avoid towing a trailer during your
vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)
(see page 494 ).
Be sure to read the Off-Highway
Driving Guidelines section on page
552 if you plan to tow off paved
surfaces.
Load Limit
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
before starting to drive.
Total Trailer Weight
The maximum allowable weight of
the trailer and everything in or on it
depends on the number of occupants
in your vehicle and the type of trailer
being towed (see page 540 ).
Towing a trailer that is too heavy can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
536
11/08/01 10:58:13 31SZA630_544
Towing a Trailer
and cause it to sway.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all
accessories, all cargo, and the
tongue load is:
4WD models:
6,096 lbs (2,765 kg)
4WD models:
2,921 lbs (1,325 kg)
on the front axle
3,362 lbs (1,525 kg) *1
3,251 lbs (1,475 kg) *2
on the rear axle
Driving
2WD models:
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all
accessories, all cargo, and the
tongue load must not exceed:
5,952 lbs (2,700 kg)
Tongue Load
The weight that the tongue of a fully
loaded trailer puts on the hitch
should be 5 to 10 percent of the total
trailer weight for boat trailers, and 8
to 15 percent of total trailer weight
for all other trailers. (See page
540 for limits for your towing
situation). Too much tongue load
reduces front-tire traction and
steering control. Too little tongue
load can make the trailer unstable
*1 : Except LX models
*2 : LX models
2WD models:
2,921 lbs (1,325 kg)
on the front axle
3,196 lbs (1,450 kg)
on the rear axle
537
11/08/01 10:58:23 31SZA630_545
Towing a Trailer
Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR):
The maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle and trailer
with the proper hitch is:
4WD models:
9,579 lbs (4,345 kg)
Estimating Loads
The best way to confirm that all
loads are within limits is to check
them at a public scale. For public
scales in your area, check your local
phone book, or contact your trailer
dealer or rental agency for
assistance.
2WD models:
8,466 lbs (3,840 kg)
The GCWR must be reduced 2
percent for every 1,000 feet (305
meters) of elevation.
538
To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,
or if you cannot get to a public scale,
we recommend that you estimate
your total trailer weight and tongue
load as described next.
To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight
Add the weight of your trailer (as
quoted by the manufacturer) with
everything in or on the trailer. Then
check the tables on page 540 to
make sure you do not exceed the
limit for your conditions.
11/08/01 10:58:35 31SZA630_546
Towing a Trailer
To Estimate the Tongue Load
2WD models
4WD models
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Measure and record the distance
from the ground to the bottom of
the trailer hitch.
3. Connect the fully loaded trailer to
the hitch.
5. Subtract the second measurement
from the first measurement, then
refer to the following table.
Estimated
tongue load is:
If the
difference is:
Estimated
tongue load is:
5/8’’
1 1/4’’
1 3/4’’
150 lbs (68 kg)
250 lbs (114 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
5/8’’
1 1/4’’
1 3/4’’
2 1/4’’
150 lbs (68 kg)
250 lbs (114 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
If the difference is more than 1 ¾
inch, you have too much load on the
tongue. Redistribute the load or
remove cargo as needed.
If the difference is more than 2 ¼
inch, you have too much load on the
tongue. Redistribute the load or
remove cargo as needed.
CONTINUED
539
Driving
4. Measure again from the ground to
the same spot on the bottom of the
hitch.
If the
difference is:
11/08/01 10:58:46 31SZA630_547
Towing a Trailer
Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Limits:
2WD models
Maximum Tongue Load**
Number of
Occupants*
2
From 3 to 8
Maximum Total Trailer Weight
Number of
Occupants*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maximum Total Trailer Weight
Maximum Tongue Load**
3,500 lbs (1,588 kg)
3,300 lbs (1,497 kg)
3,100 lbs (1,406 kg)
3,000 lbs (1,361 kg)
2,800 lbs (1,270 kg)
2,000 lbs (905 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
230 lbs (104 kg)
200 lbs (90 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
2,000 lbs (905 kg)
200 lbs (90 kg)
Towing is Not Recommended
2WD models with optional ATF Cooler installed
*
Towing is Not Recommended
The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (68
kg), and each has 15 lbs (7 kg) of cargo in the cargo area. Any additional weight, including cargo or accessories, reduces the maximum
trailer weight and maximum tongue load. Never exceed the gross axle weight ratings (see page 537 ).
** Recommended tongue load should be 5−10% of the total trailer weight for boat trailers, and 8−15% of the total trailer weight for all other
trailers.
540
11/08/01 10:58:54 31SZA630_548
Towing a Trailer
4WD models
Number of
Occupants*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maximum Total Trailer Weight
Maximum Tongue Load**
4,500 lbs (2,041 kg)
4,300 lbs (1,950 kg)
4,100 lbs (1,860 kg)
4,000 lbs (1,814 kg)
3,800 lbs (1,724 kg)
2,000 lbs (905 kg)
450 lbs (204 kg)
400 lbs (181 kg)
330 lbs (150 kg)
270 lbs (122 kg)
190 lbs (86 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
Towing is Not Recommended
The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (68
kg), and each has 15 lbs (7 kg) of cargo in the cargo area. Any additional weight, including cargo or accessories, reduces the maximum
trailer weight and maximum tongue load. Never exceed the gross axle weight ratings (see page 537 ).
** Recommended tongue load should be 5−10% of the total trailer weight for boat trailers, and 8−15% of the total trailer weight for all other
trailers.
541
Driving
*
11/08/01 10:59:03 31SZA630_549
Towing a Trailer
4. If you cannot weigh the rear axle
directly, you can calculate the rear
gross axle weight by subtracting
the weight in step 1 from the
weight in step 2.
Limit (4WD models): 3,175 lbs
(1,440 kg)
Limit (2WD models): 3,031 lbs
(1,375 kg)
Checking Loads
To accurately check your loads at
the public scale, the vehicle and
trailer should be fully loaded, and all
occupants should stay in the vehicle
while the attendant watches the
scale.
2. Check the gross vehicle weight.
Limit (4WD models): 6,096 lbs
(2,765 kg)
Limit (2WD models): 5,952 lbs
(2,700 kg)
1. Check the front gross axle weight.
Limit: 2,921 lbs (1,325 kg)
542
3. Check the rear gross axle weight.
Limit (4WD models except LX):
3,362 lbs (1,525 kg)
Limit (4WD LX models): 3,252 lbs
(1,475 kg)
Limit (2WD models): 3,196 lbs
(1,450 kg)
11/08/01 10:59:13 31SZA630_550
Towing a Trailer
6. Check the weight of the hitched
trailer. Write this number down.
7. Check the weight of the unhitched
trailer. Limit: See page 540 .
8. Calculate the tongue load.
Subtract the weight in step 6 from
the weight in step 7.
Limit: See page 540 .
Recommended: see page 536 .
Range: 5-10% for boat trailers
8-15% for other trailers
543
Driving
5. Check the gross combined weight.
Limit (4WD models): 9,579 lbs
(4,345 kg)
Limit (2WD models): 8,466 lbs
(3,840 kg)
Remember, maximum gross
combined weight should be
decreased 2% for every 1,000 feet
(305 meters) of elevation.
11/08/01 10:59:27 31SZA630_551
Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Towing generally requires a variety
of supplemental equipment. To
ensure the best quality, we
recommend that you purchase
Honda equipment whenever possible.
Your dealer offers trailer packages
that include a ball mount, hitch plug,
and hitch pin. A wiring harness kit is
also available from your dealer.
Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in this section. Also make
sure that all equipment is properly
installed and maintained, and that it
meets federal, state, province,
territory, and local regulations.
Hitch
Read the trailer manufacturer’s
instructions, and select the
appropriate draw bar for the height
of the trailer you will be towing.
544
Weight Distributing Hitch
Trailer Brakes
A weight distributing hitch is not
recommended for use with your
vehicle, as an improperly adjusted
weight distributing hitch may reduce
handling, stability, and braking
performance.
Honda recommends that any trailer
with a total trailer weight of 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) or more has its own brakes.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Cooler (2WD models)
2WD models are not equipped with a
transmission fluid cooler, and have
reduced towing capacities. See the
Trailer Weight and Tongue Load
Limits table on page 540 for
maximum towing capacities. An
optional automatic transmission fluid
cooler kit is available if you plan to
tow weight above the limits. Contact
a dealer for additional information.
There are two common types of
trailer brakes: surge and electric.
Surge brakes are common for boat
trailers, since the brakes will get wet.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
See your trailer dealer or rental
agency for more information on
installing electric brakes.
11/08/01 10:59:38 31SZA630_552
Towing a Trailer
Have a qualified mechanic install
your trailer brake controller
following the trailer brake controller
manufacturer’s instructions. Failure
to properly install the trailer brake
controller may increase the distance
it takes for you to stop your vehicle
when towing a trailer.
Use this illustration to identify each
terminal in the trailer brake
controller connector.
ELECTRIC BRAKE
(BROWN/WHITE)
BRAKE
(20 A)
(PURPLE)
Safety Chains
Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.
Sway Control
GROUND
(BLACK)
STOP
(SKY BLUE)
This device is recommended if your
trailer tends to sway. Your trailer
dealer or rental agency can tell you
what kind of sway control you need
and how to install it.
Trailer Mirrors
Many states and provinces require
special exterior mirrors when towing
a trailer. Even if they don’t, you
should install special mirrors if you
cannot clearly see behind you, or if
the trailer creates a blind spot.
CONTINUED
545
Driving
A factory installed, 4-pin gray
connector is located under the
instrument panel near the top of the
parking brake pedal. This connector
has all of the circuits required to
install most electric trailer brake
controllers. A jumper harness to
adapt your electric trailer brake
controller to the vehicle is included
with the optional Genuine Honda
trailer hitch kit. To obtain a trailer
hitch kit, see your dealer.
11/08/01 10:59:49 31SZA630_553
Towing a Trailer
Spare Tires
When towing a trailer, we
recommend that you carry a full-size
spare wheel and tire for your vehicle
and trailer. When replacing the
compact spare with a full size spare,
remove the plastic spacer (see page
604 ). Store the plastic spacer and
compact spare together. Reinstall
the spacer before once again stowing
the compact spare.
See page 605 for proper tire size,
page 619 for how to store a full size
wheel and tire, and page 613 for
information on changing a flat tire.
Remember to unhitch the trailer
before changing a flat. Ask your
trailer sales or rental agency where
and how to store the trailer’s spare
tire.
546
Trailer Lights
LEFT TURN SIGNAL
AND BRAKE LIGHTS
(RED)
TAILLIGHTS
(GREEN)
+B CHARGE
(BLUE)
Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state, province/
territory, and local regulations.
Check trailer light requirements for
the areas where you plan to tow, and
use only equipment designed for
your vehicle.
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
AND BRAKE LIGHTS
(WHITE)
ELECTRIC BRAKE
(BROWN/WHITE)
BACK-UP LIGHTS
(YELLOW)
GROUND
(BLACK)
GROUND
(BLACK)
Your vehicle is equipped with a
connector to install an optional trailer
lighting connector that mates with
your vehicle. You can get this
optional connector from your dealer.
Refer to the above illustration for
wiring information.
11/08/01 11:00:00 31SZA630_554
Towing a Trailer
We recommend that you have your
dealer install a Honda wiring harness
and converter. This harness has
been designed for your vehicle.
Towing Equipment
7-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR
If you use a non-Honda trailer
lighting harness and converter, you
can get the connector and pins that
mate with the connector in your
vehicle from your dealer.
TRAILER HITCH
Your vehicle has a class 3 trailer
hitch as standard equipment.
Driving
Since lighting and wiring vary with
trailer type and brand, you should
also have a qualified mechanic install
a suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer.
KNOB
Remove the cover by turning the
knobs about one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
The jumper harness and trailer
brake fuse are stored in the glove
box.
Also see page 544 for trailer-related
information.
CONTINUED
547
11/08/01 11:00:10 31SZA630_555
Towing a Trailer
Connecting the Trailer Connectors
On Touring models
LID
RETAINING
TAB
SOCKET
RETAINING
TAB
7-PIN TRAILER
CONNECTOR
7-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR
The 7-pin trailer connector is needed
for the trailer lights. To connect the
connector:
1. Make sure the connector and the
socket are free of dirt, moisture,
or other foreign material.
2. Open the socket lid by pulling it up.
548
3. Insert the connector securely into
the socket.
Hook the retaining tab on the
inner side of the lid against the
retaining tab of the connector to
prevent disconnection during
operation.
Trailer Connector Sockets
On Touring models
+B
CHARGE
(BLUE)
SMALL
LIGHT
(GREEN)
RIGHT
TURN/
STOP
(WHITE)
LEFT
TURN/
STOP
(RED)
GROUND
(BLACK)
BACK LIGHT
(YELLOW)
7-PIN TRAILER SOCKET
ELECTRIC
BRAKE
(BROWN/
WHITE)
Refer to the above illustrations for
wiring information.
11/08/01 11:00:25 31SZA630_556
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Jumper Harness
On Touring models
ELECTRIC BRAKE
(BROWN/WHITE)
GROUND
(BLACK)
BRAKE LIGHTS
(SKY BLUE)
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the suspension and
the cooling system are in good
operating condition.
The trailer has been properly
serviced and is in good condition.
All weights and loads are within
limits.
The trailer jumper harness is used to
install the controller for the electric
trailer brakes. For more information,
see Trailer Brakes on page 544 .
The hitch, safety chains, and any
other attachments are secure.
Trailer Brake Fuse
All items on and in the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
Insert the trailer brake fuse into the
secondary under-hood fuse box (see
page 634 ).
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
Your vehicle tires and spare are in
good condition and properly
inflated.
Towing performance can be
affected by high altitude, high
temperature, or when climbing
steep grades. Therefore, premium
fuel (premium unleaded gasoline
with pump octane number of 91 or
higher) is recommended when
towing more than 3,500 lbs (1,590
kg).
The trailer tires and spare are in
good condition and inflated as
recommended by the trailer
maker.
549
Driving
BRAKE
(20A)
(BLUE)
Pre-Tow Checklist
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
11/08/01 11:00:35 31SZA630_557
Towing a Trailer
Driving Safely With a Trailer
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
For your safety and the safety of
others, take time to practice driving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
in this section.
550
Towing Speeds and Gears
Making Turns and Braking
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Use D position when towing a trailer
on level roads. D3 is the proper shift
lever position to use when towing a
trailer in hilly terrain. (See ‘‘ Driving
on Hills’’ on the next page for
additional gear information.)
Make turns more slowly and wider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
can hit or run over something the
vehicle misses.
When towing a fixed-sided trailer
(e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph
(88 km/h). At higher speeds, the
trailer may sway or affect vehicle
handling.
Allow more time and distance for
braking. Do not brake or turn
suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
11/08/01 11:00:49 31SZA630_558
Towing a Trailer
Driving on Hills
Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting
Retrieving a Boat
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause the trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.
If the vehicle’s tires slip when
retrieving a boat from the water,
shift to first gear, and turn on VTM-4
lock (see page 520 ). Disengage
VTM-4 lock as soon as the boat is
out of the water to prevent damage
to the VTM-4 system.
If the automatic transmission shifts
frequently while going up a hill, shift
to D3.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed and shift down to D3. Do
not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes. Remember, it
takes longer to slow down and
stop when towing a trailer.
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the bottom of the steering wheel,
then turn the wheel to the left to get
the trailer to move to the left. Turn
the wheel to the right to move the
trailer to the right.
Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be
towed behind a motor home. If your
vehicle needs to be towed in an
emergency, see page 636 .
Parking
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including putting the
transmission in Park and firmly
setting the parking brake. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.
551
Driving
If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
Backing Up
11/08/01 11:01:01 31SZA630_559
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
General Information
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily for use on pavement. But
its higher ground clearance allows
you to occasionally travel on unpaved
roads, such as campgrounds, picnic
sites, and similar locations. It is not
designed for trail-blazing, mountain
climbing, or other challenging offroad activities.
If you decide to drive on unpaved
roads, you will find that it requires
somewhat different driving skills.
Your vehicle will also handle
somewhat differently than it does on
pavement. Be sure to pay extra
attention to the precautions and tips
in this section, and get acquainted
with your vehicle before leaving the
pavement.
552
Improperly operating this
vehicle on or off-pavement can
cause a crash or rollover in
which you and your passengers
could be seriously injured or
killed.
Follow all instructions and
guidelines in this owner’s
manual.
Keep your speed low, and
don’t drive faster than
conditions permit.
Important Safety Precautions
To avoid loss of control or rollover,
be sure to follow all precautions and
recommendations.
Be sure to store cargo properly
and do not exceed your cargo load
limits (see page 507 and 536 ).
Whenever you drive, make sure
you and your passengers always
wear seat belts.
Keep your speed low, and never
go faster than the conditions allow.
It’s up to you to continually assess
the situation and drive within the
limits.
11/08/01 11:01:15 31SZA630_560
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Check Out Your Vehicle
Before you leave the pavement, be
sure to do all scheduled maintenance
and service, and inspect your vehicle
for any problems. Pay special
attention to the condition of the tires,
and check the tire pressures.
Remember
The route presents limits (too steep
or bumpy roads). You have limits
(driving skill and comfort). And your
vehicle has limits (traction, stability,
and power).
Keep in mind that you will usually
need more time and distance to
brake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.
Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’
the brakes; let the anti-lock braking
system pump them for you.
Avoiding Obstacles
Debris in the road can damage your
suspension or other components.
Because your vehicle has a high
center of gravity, driving over a large
obstacle, or allowing a wheel to drop
into a deep hole can cause your
vehicle to tip or roll over.
Driving on Slopes
If you can’t clearly see all conditions
or obstacles on a slope, walk the
slope before you drive on it. If you
have any doubt whether or not you
can safely drive on the slope, don’t
do it. Find another route.
If you are driving up a hill and find
that you cannot continue, do not try to
turn around. Your vehicle could roll
over. Slowly back down the hill,
following the same route you took up
the hill.
Driving off-highway can be
hazardous if you fail to recognize
limits and take the proper
precautions.
553
Driving
After you return to the pavement,
carefully inspect your vehicle to
make sure there is no damage that
could make driving it unsafe.
Recheck the condition of the tires
and the tire pressures.
Accelerating and Braking
For better traction on all surfaces,
accelerate slowly and gradually build
up speed. If you try to start too fast
on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you
might not have enough traction to
get underway, and you may dig
yourself a hole. Starting with the
shift lever in D position will help you
have a smoother start on snow or ice.
11/08/01 11:01:27 31SZA630_561
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Crossing a Stream
Before driving through water, stop,
get out if necessary, and make sure
that:
The banks and surface under the
water provide good traction. The
water may hide hazards such as
rocks, holes, or mud.
The water is not deep enough to
cover your wheel hubs, axles, or
exhaust pipe. You could stall and
not be able to restart your engine.
The water can also damage
important vehicle components.
If you decide it is safe to drive
through water, choose a suitable
speed and engage the VTM-4 Lock.
Proceed without shifting or changing
speeds, and do not stop the vehicle
or shut off the engine.
The banks are sloped so you can
drive out.
After driving through water, test
your brakes. If they got wet, gently
‘‘pump’’ them while driving slowly
until they operate normally.
The water is not flowing too fast.
Deep rushing water can sweep you
downstream. Even very shallow
rushing water can wash the
ground from under your tires and
cause you to lose traction and
possibly roll over.
554
If the water is deeper than the wheel
hubs, some additional service may
be required. This service is not
covered by your warranties.
If You Get Stuck
If you get stuck, engage the VTM-4
Lock (see page 520 ). Carefully try to
go in the direction (forward or
reverse) that you think will get you
unstuck. Do not spin the tires at high
speeds. It will not help you get out
and may cause damage to the
transmission or VTM-4 system.
If you are still unable to free yourself,
your vehicle is equipped with front
and rear tow hooks designed for this
purpose.
11/08/01 11:01:37 31SZA630_562
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Towing a Trailer Off-Road
You may be able to safely tow a
lightweight trailer (such as a
motorcycle or small tent trailer) offroad if you follow these guidelines.
Do not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
or a tongue weight of 100 lbs (45
kg).
You should never use a jack to try to
get unstuck. Your vehicle could
easily slip off the jack and hurt you
or someone else.
Stay on smooth, level dirt roads,
and avoid driving in hilly terrain.
Driving
Use a nylon strap to attach your
vehicle to the recovery vehicle, and
carefully take out the slack in the
strap. Once the strap is tight, the
recovery vehicle should apply force.
Remember that the recovery vehicle
needs good traction to avoid
becoming stuck, too.
Allow extra room for starting,
stopping, and turning.
Slow down if you encounter bumps
or other obstacles.
555
11/08/01 11:01:39 31SZA630_563
556
11/08/01 11:01:45 31SZA630_564
Maintenance
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
Maintenance Minder messages on
the information display or multiinformation display (depending on
the model), and instructions for
simple maintenance tasks you may
want to take care of yourself.
Maintenance Safety ....................... 558
Maintenance MinderTM.................. 559
Fluid Locations............................... 574
Engine Compartment Covers....... 575
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 576
Changing the Engine Oil and
Filter ............................................ 577
Engine Coolant ............................... 579
Windshield Washers ..................... 581
Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 582
Brake Fluid ..................................... 584
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 585
Timing Belt ..................................... 585
Lights .............................................. 586
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 593
Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 593
Floor Mats ...................................... 594
Wiper Blades .................................. 595
Tires ................................................ 599
Checking the Battery .................... 607
Vehicle Storage .............................. 608
Interior Care ................................... 609
557
Maintenance
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page 661 for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
U.S. Vehicles:
Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
11/08/01 11:01:58 31SZA630_565
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Important Safety Precautions
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust. Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Burns from hot parts. Let the
558
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
11/08/01 11:02:09 31SZA630_566
Maintenance MinderTM
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the information display or multiinformation display (depending on
the model) to show you when you
should have your dealer perform
engine oil replacement and indicated
maintenance services.
Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100%−91%
90%−81%
80%−71%
70%−61%
60%−51%
50%−41%
40%−31%
30%−21%
20%−16%
15%−11%
10%−6%
5%−1%
0%
Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100%
90%
80%
70%
60%
50%
40%
30%
20%
15%
10%
5%
0%
Engine Oil Life Display
Except Touring models
ENGINE OIL
LIFE DISPLAY
U.S. model is shown.
SELECT/
RESET KNOB
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and press the select/
reset knob repeatedly until the
engine oil life display appears (see
page 81 ).
CONTINUED
559
Maintenance
Based on the engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.
The remaining engine oil life is
shown on the display according to
this table:
11/08/01 11:02:18 31SZA630_567
Maintenance MinderTM
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)
‘‘SERVICE’’ MESSAGE
ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR
U.S. model is shown.
If the remaining engine oil life is 15
to 6 percent, you will see the engine
oil life indicator every time you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The Maintenance Minder
indicator will also come on, and the
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
near the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ message.
560
U.S. model is shown.
The 15 and 10 percent oil life
indicators remind you that your
vehicle will soon be due for
scheduled maintenance.
U.S. model is shown.
When the remaining engine oil life is
5 to 1 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the
same maintenance item code(s),
every time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
11/08/01 11:02:31 31SZA630_568
Maintenance MinderTM
The maintenance item code or codes
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page 562 ).
NEGATIVE DISTANCE TRAVELED
You can switch the information
display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer or the trip
meter. Press and release the select/
reset knob on the instrument panel.
When you see this message, have
the indicated maintenance
performed by your dealer as soon as
possible.
U.S. model is shown.
When the remaining engine oil life is
0 percent, the engine oil life indicator
will blink. The display comes on
every time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. The
Maintenance Minder indicator
(
) also comes on and remains
on in the instrument panel. When
you see this message, immediately
have the indicated maintenance done
by your dealer.
U.S. model is shown.
If you do not perform the indicated
maintenance, negative distance
traveled is displayed and begins to
blink after the vehicle has been
driven 10 miles (10 km) or more.
Negative distance traveled means
your vehicle has passed the
maintenance required point.
Immediately have the indicated
maintenance done by your dealer.
CONTINUED
561
Maintenance
When the engine oil life is 15 to 1
percent, the Maintenance Minder
indicator (
) comes on every
time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, then it goes out
if you switch the information display.
11/08/01 11:02:44 31SZA630_569
Maintenance MinderTM
To change the information display
from the engine oil life display to the
odometer or the trip meter, press
and release the select/reset knob.
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
Except Touring models
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S)
When the engine oil life is 0 percent
or negative distance traveled, the
Maintenance Minder indicator
(
) remains on even if you
change the information display.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described as follows.
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM
U.S. model is shown.
All maintenance items displayed on
the information display are in code.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page 573 .
562
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Except Touring models
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the Maintenance Minder as
follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Press the select/reset knob
repeatedly until the engine oil life
is displayed.
11/08/01 11:02:53 31SZA630_570
Maintenance MinderTM
On Touring models
SEL/RESET BUTTON
U.S. model is shown.
4. Press the select/reset knob for
another 5 seconds. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’
ENGINE OIL
INFO (▲/▼)
LIFE DISPLAY
BUTTON
U.S. model is shown.
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and push and release
the INFO (▲/▼) button on the
steering wheel repeatedly, until the
engine oil life is displayed (see page
86 ).
CONTINUED
563
Maintenance
3. Press the select/reset knob for
about 10 seconds. The engine oil
life and the maintenance item
code(s) will blink.
U.S. model is shown.
11/08/01 11:03:00 31SZA630_571
Maintenance MinderTM
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)
When the remaining engine oil life is
15 percent or less, the display shows
a ‘‘SERVICE DUE SOON’’ message
along with the maintenance item
code(s) for other scheduled
maintenance items needing service.
564
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR
The system message indicator on
the instrument panel will also come
on, and a beeper will sound.
U.S. model is shown.
To cancel the system message, press
and release the INFO (▲/▼) button
on the steering wheel. At this time,
the system message indicator will
also be turned off. Then the display
will change to the engine oil life
display. You will see the
maintenance item code(s) along with
the engine oil life on the multiinformation display.
11/08/01 11:03:07 31SZA630_572
Maintenance MinderTM
You will also see the system
message every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position until you have the indicated
maintenance performed by your
dealer.
The system message indicator on
the instrument panel will also come
on, and a beeper will sound.
The maintenance item code(s)
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page 569 ).
Maintenance
When the remaining engine oil life is
less than 5 percent, you will see the
above display. The display then
changes to ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW.’’
Have the indicated maintenance
done as soon as possible.
CONTINUED
565
11/08/01 11:03:13 31SZA630_573
Maintenance MinderTM
You will also see the system
message every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position until you have the indicated
maintenance performed by your
dealer.
U.S. model is shown.
To cancel the system message, press
and release the INFO (▲/▼) button
on the steering wheel. At this time,
the system message indicator will
also be turned off. Then the display
will change to the engine oil life
display. You will see a ‘‘SERVICE’’
message and along with the
maintenance item code(s) on the
multi-information display.
566
U.S. model is shown.
If the indicated maintenance service
is not done and the engine oil life
reaches 0 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message
along with the maintenance item
code(s) on the multi-information
display.
11/08/01 11:03:21 31SZA630_574
Maintenance MinderTM
The system message indicator on
the instrument panel will also come
on, and a beeper will sound.
The system message will appear
again by pressing the INFO (▲/▼)
button after canceling it.
When you see this message, have
the indicated maintenance done by
your dealer immediately.
You will also see the system
message every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position until you have the indicated
maintenance performed by your
dealer.
U.S. model is shown.
Maintenance
To cancel the system message, press
and release the INFO (▲/▼) button
on the steering wheel. At this time,
the system message indicator will
not be turned off. Then the display
will change to the engine oil life
display. You will see the engine oil
life blinking and a ‘‘SERVICE’’
message along with the maintenance
item code(s) on the multiinformation display.
CONTINUED
567
11/08/01 11:03:32 31SZA630_575
Maintenance MinderTM
The system message will appear
again by pressing the INFO (▲/▼)
button after canceling it.
U.S.
U.S.
Canada
Canada
If the indicated required service is
not done and the remaining engine
oil life becomes 0%, the multiinformation display will show a
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,
the total distance traveled after the
remaining oil life became 0%, and the
maintenance item code(s).
568
To cancel the system message, press
and release the INFO (▲/▼) button
on the steering wheel. At this time,
the system message indicator will
not be turned off. Then the display
will change to the engine oil life
display. You will see the negative
distance traveled blinking and a
‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the
maintenance item code(s) on the
multi-information display.
You will also see the system
message every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position until you have the indicated
maintenance performed by your
dealer.
Negative distance traveled means
your vehicle has passed the
maintenance required point.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on page 569 .
11/08/01 11:03:43 31SZA630_576
Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
On Touring models
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
On Touring models
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display the
next time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
MAINTENANCE
SUB ITEM(S)
All maintenance items displayed on
the information display are in code.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page 573 .
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Press the SEL/RESET button on
the steering wheel until you see
the engine oil life display.
3. Press and hold the SEL/RESET
button on the steering wheel for
more than 10 seconds. The
remaining engine oil life reset
mode will be shown on the multiinformation display.
CONTINUED
569
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM
U.S. model is shown.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the Maintenance Minder as
follows:
11/08/01 11:03:51 31SZA630_577
Maintenance MinderTM
Important Maintenance
Precautions
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
correct maintenance intervals. This
can lead to serious mechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
U.S. model is shown.
4. Select ‘‘RESET’’ by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then press
the SEL/RESET button to reset
the engine oil life display. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’ If you want to
cancel the oil life reset mode,
select ‘‘CANCEL.’’
570
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out your
Honda Service History or Canadian
Maintenance Log. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
11/08/01 11:04:01 31SZA630_578
Maintenance MinderTM
We recommend the use of Honda
parts and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same highquality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
U.S. Vehicles:
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the odometer/
trip meter display or the multiinformation display.
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
You should check the following
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page 500 .
Automatic transmission − Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
582 .
CONTINUED
571
Maintenance
Engine coolant level − Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page 500 .
11/08/01 11:04:06 31SZA630_579
Maintenance MinderTM
Brakes − Check the fluid level
monthly. See page 584 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
600 .
Lights − Check the operation of
all the lights monthly. See page
586 .
572
11/08/01 11:04:16 31SZA630_580
Maintenance MinderTM
Symbol
A
B
Symbol
1
2
3
4
*1 : If the message, ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the
display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
#: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page 569 .
NOTE :
Independent of the Maintenance Minder information, replace the brake
fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
5
6
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from
diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km).
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission and transfer*2 fluid
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures
(under−20°F, −29°C), or towing a trailer, replace every
60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada).
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluid*2
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of
mechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requires
differential fluid changes more frequently than
recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you
regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,
have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles
(12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*2 : 4WD models only
573
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
11/08/01 11:04:22 31SZA630_581
Fluid Locations
BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
POWER STEERING FLUID
(Red cap)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
574
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
11/08/01 11:04:28 31SZA630_582
Engine Compartment Covers
The component parts in the engine
compartment are protected by the
cover. You may need to remove the
cover and the air intake cover when
you perform some simple
maintenance work.
AIR INTAKE COVER
HOLDING CLIP
FRONT BULKHEAD COVER
Covers are secured by holding clips.
To remove the front bulkhead cover
and the air intake cover, remove the
holding clips with a flat-tip
screwdriver.
Maintenance
575
11/08/01 11:04:38 31SZA630_583
Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spills immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level on
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could
damage the engine.
576
Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 0W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda motor oil in your vehicle.
Make sure the API Certification Seal
says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
0W-20 oil is formulated for yearround protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
Ambient Temperature
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
11/08/01 11:04:49 31SZA630_584
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Changing the Engine Oil and
Filter
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the information
display or multi-information display
(depending on the model). The oil
and filter collect contaminants that
can damage your engine if they are
not removed regularly.
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service stationtype hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
WASHER
DRAIN BOLT
2. Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
1. Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
CONTINUED
577
Maintenance
Synthetic Oil
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the odometer/
trip meter display or on the multiinformation display.
11/08/01 11:05:02 31SZA630_585
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER
4. Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the contacting surface
of a new oil filter.
5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
3. Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is
not stuck to the contacting surface
of the engine. If it is, remove it
before installing a new oil filter.
578
6. Refill the engine with the recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
7. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
8. Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
9. Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container, and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
11/08/01 11:05:11 31SZA630_586
Engine Coolant
Always use Honda Long-life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent distilled
water. Never add straight antifreeze
or plain water.
Adding Engine Coolant
MIN
MAX
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Maintenance
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
CONTINUED
579
11/08/01 11:05:22 31SZA630_587
Engine Coolant
RADIATOR CAP
3. Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
MAX
4. The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pour the coolant slowly and
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
1. Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pressing down.
580
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
RESERVE TANK
MIN
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
11/08/01 11:05:32 31SZA630_588
Windshield Washers
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
U.S. 2WD models
Check the fluid level by removing
the cap and looking at the level
gauge.
If equipped
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
The washer level indicator will come
on when the level is low (see page
78 ).
Maintenance
On Touring 4WD models
If the washer fluid is low, a ‘‘LOW
WASHER FLUID’’ message appears
on the multi-information display.
581
11/08/01 11:05:42 31SZA630_589
Automatic Transmission Fluid
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid when this
service is shown on the information
display or multi-information display
(depending on the model).
DIPSTICK
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2.
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
DIPSTICK
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
4. Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
582
11/08/01 11:05:50 31SZA630_590
Automatic Transmission Fluid
5. If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
hole to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
Use only Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic
transmission f luid). Do not mix with
other transmission f luids.
Using transmission f luid other than
Honda ATF DW-1 may cause
deterioration in transmission operation
and durability, and could result in
damage to the transmission.
Damage resulting f rom the use of
transmission f luid other than Honda
ATF DW-1 is not covered by the Honda
new vehicle warranty.
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Make sure the rubber cap on the
dipstick fits in the dipstick guide
and that you push the dipstick in
all the way.
583
Maintenance
Always use Honda ATF DW-1
(automatic transmission fluid).
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid when this
service is indicated by a maintenance
message on the multi-information
display.
11/08/01 11:05:59 31SZA630_591
Brake Fluid
Replace the brake fluid when this
service is indicated on a maintenance
message on the information display
or multi-information display
(depending on the model).
Check the fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir monthly.
Independent of the Maintenance
Minder information, replace the
brake fluid every 3 years.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
584
MIN
MAX
The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
11/08/01 11:06:10 31SZA630_592
Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
Power Steering Fluid
UPPER LEVEL
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
LOWER LEVEL
If you are not sure how to add
fluid, contact your dealer.
Replace the timing belt every 60,000
miles (100,000 km) if you regularly
drive your vehicle in any of the
following conditions:
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under −20°F, −29°C).
Frequently towing a trailer.
Maintenance
Check the level on the side of the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark.
Timing Belt
The timing belt should be replaced
at the intervals shown in the
Maintenance MinderTM schedule.
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spills immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
585
11/08/01 11:06:21 31SZA630_593
Lights
Headlight Aiming
The headlights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area or pull a trailer,
readjustment may be required.
Adjustments should be done by your
dealer or another qualified
technician.
Replacing a Headlight/Daytime
Running Light Bulb
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHT/
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT
BULB
CONNECTOR
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
The high beam headlight/daytime
running light bulb and the low beam
headlight bulb are replaced the same
way.
1. Open the hood.
If you need to change the
headlight bulb on the driver’s side,
remove the front end of the air
intake duct by pulling it out.
586
11/08/01 11:06:34 31SZA630_594
Lights
LOW BEAM HEADLIGHT
BULB
4. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb.
Replacing Front Turn Signal/
Parking and Side Marker Light
Bulbs
FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LIGHT
BULB
6. Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
CONNECTOR
3. Remove the bulb by turning it
about one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
SOCKET
1. Open the hood.
If you need to change the bulbs on
the driver’s side, remove the front
end of the air intake duct by
pulling it out.
2. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
CONTINUED
587
Maintenance
2. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
11/08/01 11:06:48 31SZA630_595
Lights
SIDE MARKER LIGHT
Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb
BULB
Except LX models
UNDER COVER
Your vehicle uses halogen light
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its plastic case, and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
HOLDING CLIP
SOCKET
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
4. Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
5. Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
588
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,
perspiration, or a scratch on the glass
can cause the bulb to overheat and
shatter.
1. Remove the five holding clips with
a flat-tip screwdriver.
2. Pull down the under cover from
the bumper carefully.
11/08/01 11:06:59 31SZA630_596
Lights
BULB
Replacing Rear Bulbs
(in Rear Pillar)
CONNECTOR
4. Remove the bulb from the fog
light assembly by turning it onequarter turn counterclockwise.
5. Install the new bulb into the hole
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the two mounting bolts
with an 8 mm wrench.
3. Place a cloth on the inner edge of
the assembly to prevent scratches.
Loosen the assembly by carefully
prying on the top and side edges
with a small flat-tip screwdriver.
Use your fingers to further pull it
loose.
4. Remove the assembly from the
mounting holes by pulling it out.
CONTINUED
589
Maintenance
3. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
11/08/01 11:07:10 31SZA630_597
Lights
8. Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
TABS
BULB
9. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
10.Put the socket back into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
SOCKET
5. Determine which of the four bulbs
is burned out: stop/taillight,
back-up light, side marker light, or
turn signal light.
6. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
7. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
590
11.Align the two tabs on the light
assembly with the mounting holes
and install the rear light assembly
in the rear pillar. Tighten the two
bolts securely.
Side Turn Signal Lights
On Touring models
Each outside mirror has side turn
signal lights. The lights should be
replaced by your dealer.
11/08/01 11:07:23 31SZA630_598
Lights
7. Put the lens back on the light
assembly, and tighten the
mounting bolts securely.
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
8. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
LENS SEGMENT
9. Put the light assembly back into
the vehicle. Install the screws and
tighten them securely.
Reinstall the lens segments.
4. Remove the two mounting screws
from the light assembly.
2. Remove the screw under each lens.
6. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
3. Pull the high-mount brake light
assembly out of the vehicle.
Maintenance
1. Place a cloth on the edge of the
lens segment to prevent scratches.
Remove each lens segment by
carefully prying on its edge with a
small flat-tip screwdriver.
5. Remove the lens from the light
assembly.
591
11/08/01 11:07:31 31SZA630_599
Lights
Replacing a Rear License Plate
Bulb
SCREWDRIVER
LENS
BULB
CLOTH
LENS
1. Place a cloth on the edge of the
lens segment to prevent
scratching. Insert a small flat-tip
screwdriver between the left edge
of the lens and the housing. The
lens will come down.
2. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb in until
it bottoms in the socket.
592
3. Turn on the parking lights and
check that the new bulb is
working.
4. Put the lens back into the light
assembly, right side first. Push on
the left edge until it snaps into
place.
11/08/01 11:07:40 31SZA630_600
Dust and Pollen Filter, Cleaning the Seat Belts
Dust and Pollen Filter
This filter removes the dust and
pollen that is brought in from the
outside through the heating and
cooling system/climate control
system.
LOOP
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Maintenance
Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display or multiinformation display (depending on
the model). It should be replaced
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if you
drive primarily in urban areas that
have high concentrations of soot in
the air, or if the flow from the
heating and cooling system/climate
control system becomes less than
usual.
Cleaning the Seat Belts
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
593
11/08/01 11:07:46 31SZA630_601
Floor Mats
Front
The floor mats that came with your
vehicle hook over the floor mat
anchors. This keeps the floor mats
from sliding forward, possibly
interfering with the pedals, or
backwards, making the front
passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective.
594
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
to re-anchor it when you put it back
in your vehicle.
Rear
If you use a non-Honda floor mat,
make sure it fits properly and that it
can be used with the floor mat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.
11/08/01 11:07:57 31SZA630_602
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, and areas
that are getting hard or if they leave
streaks and unwiped areas when
used.
WIPER ARMS
LOCK TAB
1. Raise each wiper arm off the
windshield, lifting the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and the wiper arms.
2. Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm:
Press and hold the lock tab.
Slide the blade assembly toward
the lock tab until it releases
from the wiper arm.
When replacing a wiper blade, make
sure not to drop the wiper blade or
wiper arm down on the windshield.
CONTINUED
595
Maintenance
To replace the front wiper blades:
11/08/01 11:08:07 31SZA630_603
Wiper Blades
BLADE
BLADE
5. Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm against the
window.
Windshield: Lower the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
REINFORCEMENT
3. Remove the blade from its holder
by grabbing the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
596
4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
11/08/01 11:08:16 31SZA630_604
Wiper Blades
WIPER ARM
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
1. Raise the wiper arm off the glass
hatch and hold it.
2. Slide the blade out of the wiper
arm.
3. Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
CONTINUED
597
Maintenance
To replace the rear wiper blade:
11/08/01 11:08:21 31SZA630_605
Wiper Blades
4. Slide the new blade into the wiper
arm. Make sure it is engaged in
the slot along its full length.
5. Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield or the hatch glass.
598
11/08/01 11:08:32 31SZA630_606
Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicle ride more harshly, are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
spare tire at the same time.
The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) warns you when a tire
pressure is low. See page 522 or
525 for more information.
CONTINUED
599
Maintenance
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Inflation Guidelines
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
11/08/01 11:08:47 31SZA630_607
Tires
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures.
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot (driven for several
miles/kilometers), you will see
readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3
to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
You should get your own tire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
Recommended Tire Pressures
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal and high-speed driving
conditions.
Tire Size
P235/65R17 103T
P235/60R18 102T
Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Front:
31 psi (210 kPa ,
2.1 kgf/cm )
Rear:
33 psi (230 kPa ,
2.3 kgf/cm )
Front/Rear:
35 psi (240 kPa ,
2.4 kgf/cm )
The compact spare tire pressure is:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional information about
your tires, see page 644 .
600
11/08/01 11:09:00 31SZA630_608
Tires
Tire Inspection
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
You should look for:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
you find either of these conditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the
tread. This shows there is less than
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on
the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
The last four digits of the TIN (tire
identification number) are found on
the sidewall of the tire and indicate
the date of manufacture (See Tire
Labeling on page 646 ).
601
Maintenance
Excessive tread wear.
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
Tire Service Life
The service life of your tires is
dependent on many factors,
including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even
when the tires are not in use).
In addition to your regular
inspections and inflation pressure
maintenance, it is recommended that
you have annual inspections
performed once the tires reach five
years old. It is also recommended
that all tires, including the spare, be
removed from service after 10 years
from the date of manufacture,
regardless of their condition or state
of wear.
11/08/01 11:09:10 31SZA630_609
Tires
Tire Maintenance
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
On vehicles with aluminum wheels,
improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only Honda wheel weights f or
balancing.
602
Tire Rotation
Front
Front
(For Non-directional (For Directional
Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels)
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display or multiinformation display (depending on
the model). Move the tires to the
positions shown in the diagram each
time they are rotated. If you
purchase directional tires, rotate
only front-to-back.
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
11/08/01 11:09:17 31SZA630_610
Tires
The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. When replacing
tires, use the same size originally
supplied with the vehicle. Tire size
and construction can affect wheel
speed and may cause the system to
activate.
When the tires are rotated, make
sure the air pressures are checked.
It is best to replace all four tires at
the same time. If that is not possible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels. If you do not, the
tire pressure monitoring system will
not work.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
Maintenance
CONTINUED
603
11/08/01 11:09:25 31SZA630_611
Tires
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
SPACER
If you store a full size tire on the
hoist, remove the spacer.
Otherwise the hoist will not fully
return to its original position.
604
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
BOLTS (10 mm)
To remove the spacer, loosen the
two bolts.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
11/08/01 11:09:35 31SZA630_612
Tires
Wheel and Tire Specifications
Wheels:
U.S. LX models
17 x 7 1/2J
All models except U.S. LX models
Winter Driving
Tires marked ‘‘M + S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an allweather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
18 x 7 1/2J
Tires:
U.S. LX models
P235/65R17 103T
All models except U.S. LX models
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
Snow Tires
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow
tires on all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may be lower than your original tires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
P235/60R18 102T
Maintenance
See page 644 for information about
DOT Tire Quality Grading, and page
646 for tire size and labeling
information.
605
11/08/01 11:09:45 31SZA630_613
Tires
Tire Chains
Mount tire chains on your tires when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Install them only on the
front tires.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, Honda strongly
recommends using the chains listed
below.
Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
SCC Super Z-6#SZ-429
When installing chains, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with chains installed. If
you hear them contacting the body
or chassis, stop and investigate.
Make sure the chains are installed
tightly, and that they are not
contacting the brake lines or
suspension. Remove the chains as
soon as you start driving on cleared
roads.
606
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
Wheels
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
the same solution, and rinse them
thoroughly.
Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps the
aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
brush can damage the clear-coat. To
clean the wheels, use a mild
detergent and a soft brush or sponge.
11/08/01 11:09:53 31SZA630_614
Checking the Battery
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative (−) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
607
Maintenance
Check the condition of the battery
monthly by looking at the test
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
further corrosion.
11/08/01 11:10:03 31SZA630_615
Checking the Battery, Vehicle Storage
On vehicles without navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the time
is reset to 1:00. To set the time again,
follow the setting procedure (see
page 294 ).
The navigation system will also
disable itself. The next time you turn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
navigation system manual.
Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Fill the fuel tank.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
608
11/08/01 11:10:13 31SZA630_616
Vehicle Storage, Interior Care
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Disconnect the battery.
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
Leather
On EX-L and Touring models
Vacuum dirt and dust from the
leather frequently. Pay particular
attention to the pleats and seams.
Clean the leather with a soft cloth
dampened with water solution of
approximately 10% neutral wool
detergent, then buff it with a clean,
dry cloth. Remove any dust or dirt on
leather surfaces immediately.
Maintenance
Support the front and rear wiper
blade arms with a folded towel or
rag so they do not touch the
windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
609
11/08/01 11:10:15 31SZA630_617
610
11/08/01 11:10:20 31SZA630_618
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
Compact Spare Tire....................... 612
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 613
If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 620
Jump Starting ................................. 621
If the Engine Overheats ............... 623
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 625
Charging System Indicator........... 626
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 626
Brake System Indicator ................ 627
Fuses ............................................... 629
Fuse Locations ............................... 633
Emergency Towing ....................... 636
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ........... 637
Taking Care of the Unexpected
611
11/08/01 11:10:32 31SZA630_619
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Check the air pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Follow these precautions:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
Do not mount snow chains on a
compact spare.
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
the same make and model.
612
If you store a full size tire on the
hoist, remove the spacer.
Otherwise the hoist will not fully
return to its original position.
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
Except Touring models
The low tire pressure indicator
comes on and stays on after you
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare tire. After several miles
(kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low tire
pressure indicator goes off.
On Touring models
After the flat tire is replaced with the
spare tire, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator stays on. After
several miles (kilometers) driving
with the spare, this indicator begins
to flash, then stays on again. You will
also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 528 ).
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement tire should be the same
size and design, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
11/08/01 11:10:42 31SZA630_620
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.
CARGO AREA
FLOOR
JACK
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park. Apply the
parking brake.
TOOLS
SPARE TIRE
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
4. Push the rear edge of the handle
to raise the handle loop and pull up
the loop to raise the cargo area
floor.
Remove the cargo area floor.
3. Open the tailgate.
CONTINUED
613
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
11/08/01 11:10:51 31SZA630_621
Changing a Flat Tire
COVER
PLASTIC COVER
WHEEL NUT
WRENCH
KNOB
5. The tools and jack are under the
cargo area behind a cover on the
passenger’s side. Remove the
cover and take the jack out of the
tool kit case.
6. The spare tire is stored
underneath the rear cargo area.
Remove the plastic cover and the
rubber cap on the cargo area
lining to access the shaft for the
spare tire hoist.
7. Fold down the third row seat (see
page 162 ).
614
The wheel nut wrench supplied with
your vehicle is specially adapted to f it
the hoist shaf t. Do not use any other
tool.
8. Put the extension with the wheel
nut wrench on the hoist shaft.
Turn the wrench
counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire to the ground.
11/08/01 11:11:01 31SZA630_622
Changing a Flat Tire
JACKING POINTS
BRACKET
9. Keep turning the wheel nut
wrench to create slack in the cable.
11.Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
10.Remove the bracket from the
spare tire.
CONTINUED
615
Taking Care of the Unexpected
12.Place the jack under the jacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change.
11/08/01 11:11:09 31SZA630_623
Changing a Flat Tire
CONNECTOR BUTTON
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
DIAL
HOOK
EXTENSION
DIAL
13.Turn the dial at the bottom of the
jack clockwise until the top of the
jack contacts the jacking point.
Make sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
616
STAY
14.Attach the stay to the extension,
then attach the wheel nut wrench
to the end of the extension.
Make sure the stay, the extension,
and the wheel nut wrench are
securely attached.
CONNECTOR BUTTON
15.Insert the hook at the end of the
stay into the opening on the dial at
the bottom of the jack.
11/08/01 11:11:18 31SZA630_624
Changing a Flat Tire
18.Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
19.Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
BRAKE HUB
17. Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; it may be hot from
driving.
CONTINUED
617
Taking Care of the Unexpected
16. Turn the jack dial (wheel nut
wrench) clockwise as shown to
raise the vehicle until the flat tire
is off the ground.
11/08/01 11:11:24 31SZA630_625
Changing a Flat Tire
21.Remove the center cap from the
flat tire, and place the flat tire
under the hoist, with the valve
stem facing up.
20.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)
618
22.Insert the hoist bracket into the
center hole of the flat tire.
11/08/01 11:11:33 31SZA630_626
Changing a Flat Tire
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
Always raise the spare tire hoist, even
if you are not stowing a tire. If the
hoist is lef t down, it will be damaged
during driving and need to be replaced.
25.Store the jack and the tools in the
tool box.
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
26.Refer to Changing a Tire with
TPMS (see page 524 or 529 ).
Taking Care of the Unexpected
23.Slowly turn the extension with the
wheel nut wrench clockwise to
take up the slack of the hoist cable.
Make sure the bracket is seated in
the center hole of the flat tire.
24.Turn the extension with the wheel
nut wrench clockwise until the flat
tire rests against the underbody of
the vehicle and you hear the hoist
click.
619
11/08/01 11:11:47 31SZA630_627
If the Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
620
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
or neutral or the starter will not
operate.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 621 .
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
are OK, there is probably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
Emergency Towing on page 636 .
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal connections (see page 607 ). You can
then try jump starting the vehicle
from a booster battery (see page
621 ).
The Starter Operates Normally
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page 76 ).
11/08/01 11:12:01 31SZA630_628
If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to Starting the
Engine on page 513 .
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the warning indicator may
not be working.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page 630 ).
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
You cannot start your vehicle by
pushing or pulling it.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
2. Turn off all the electrical accessories: heater, A/C, climate
control, audio system, lights, etc.
Put the transmission in neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
CONTINUED
621
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If you find nothing wrong, you will
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See Emergency
Towing on page 636 .
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
1. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
11/08/01 11:12:12 31SZA630_629
Jump Starting
5. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
6. Start your vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
BOOSTER BATTERY
The numbers in the illustration show
you the order to connect the jumper
cables.
3. Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on your
vehicle’s battery. Connect the
other end to the positive (+)
terminal on the booster battery.
622
4. Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative (−) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
7. Once the vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
and then from the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
11/08/01 11:12:21 31SZA630_630
If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of your vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange under most conditions.
If it climbs to the red mark, you
should determine the reason (hot
day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).
If the vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
2. If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
CONTINUED
623
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Park, and
set the parking brake. Turn off all
the accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning lights.
11/08/01 11:12:32 31SZA630_631
If the Engine Overheats
4. If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see Emergency
Towing on page 636 ).
6. If you do not find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark.
7. If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the temperature gauge, or lower, before checking the radiator.
624
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
8. Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
9. Start the engine, and set the
temperature to maximum heat
(climate control to AUTO at
‘‘
’’). Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
10.Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see Emergency
Towing on page 636 ).
11.If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
11/08/01 11:12:42 31SZA630_632
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
This indicator should never
come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing or stays
on, the oil pressure has dropped very
low or lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message on
the multi-information display when
this indicator comes on.
The indicator notifies you of low oil
pressure and does not measure the
oil level. Check your vehicle’s oil
level at each refueling.
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the vehicle stopped.
1. Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page 500 ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page 576 ).
625
Taking Care of the Unexpected
4. Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
636 ).
11/08/01 11:12:55 31SZA630_633
Charging System Indicator, Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Charging System
Indicator
If the charging system indicator
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, the battery is not being
charged.
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page 93 ).
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
626
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
If this indicator comes on while
driving, it means one of the engine’s
emissions control systems may have
a problem. Even though you may
feel no difference in your vehicle’s
performance, it can reduce your fuel
economy and cause increased
emissions. Continued operation may
cause serious damage.
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until it
clicks at least once. Tightening the
cap will not turn the indicator off
immediately; it can take several days
of normal driving.
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may turn off as you
continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by the dealer as soon as
possible.
If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page 93 ).
Readiness Code
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
11/08/01 11:13:05 31SZA630_634
Malfunction Indicator Lamp, Brake System Indicator
If the battery in your vehicle has
been disconnected or gone dead,
these codes may be erased. It takes
several days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
Canada
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
the next time you stop at a service
station (see page 584 ).
On Touring models
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 93 ).
You will also see a ‘‘LOW BRAKE
FLUID’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 93 ).
CONTINUED
627
Taking Care of the Unexpected
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for an emissions
test until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to Emissions Testing for
more information (see page 654 ).
Parking Brake
and Brake
System
Indicator (Red)
The brake system indicator normally
comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, and as
a reminder to check the parking
brake. It will stay on if you do not
fully release the parking brake.
U.S.
11/08/01 11:13:09 31SZA630_635
Brake System Indicator
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed, and repaired as
soon as possible (see Emergency
Towing on page 636 ).
628
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
system indicator come on with the
brake system indicator, have your
vehicle inspected by your dealer
immediately.
11/08/01 11:13:20 31SZA630_636
Fuses
REAR
LID
UNDER-HOOD (PRIMARY)
TAB
The vehicle’s fuses are located in
four fuse boxes.
The primary under-hood fuse box is
located on the passenger’s side. The
secondary fuse box is located next to
the battery.
UNDER-HOOD (SECONDARY)
Taking Care of the Unexpected
The interior fuse box is underneath
the dashboard on the driver’s side.
The rear fuse box is located at the
left side of cargo area.
TAB
To open it, push the tabs as shown.
629
11/08/01 11:13:28 31SZA630_637
Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
633 , 634 , and 635 , or the diagram
on the fuse box lid, which fuse or
fuses control that device. Check
those fuses first, but check all the
fuses before deciding that a blown
fuse is the cause. Replace any blown
fuses, and check if the device works.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
2. Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
630
FUSE
BLOWN
3. Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse boxes by
looking through the top at the wire
inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
BLOWN
11/08/01 11:13:36 31SZA630_638
Fuses
BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
5. Look for a burned wire inside the
fuse. If it is burned out, replace it
with one of the spare fuses of the
same rating or lower.
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate that anything is wrong.
Replace the fuse with one of the
correct rating as soon as you can.
CONTINUED
631
Taking Care of the Unexpected
4. Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse boxes and rear
fuse box, and all the fuses in the
interior and rear fuse boxes by
pulling out each one with the fuse
puller provided in the primary
under-hood fuse box.
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sure you can do without that circuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
11/08/01 11:13:41 31SZA630_639
Fuses
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
632
6. If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.
11/08/01 11:13:49 31SZA630_640
Fuse Locations
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
No. Amps.
1
2
3
4
Main Fuse
Not Used
OP Main
IG Main
Blower
AC Inverter
Head Light Main
Power Window Main
Not Used
Condenser Fan
Cooling Fan
Rear Defroster
Not Used
Front Fog Light
Sub
ACM
No. Amps.
13
20 A
14
20 A
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
7.5 A
7.5 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
15 A
7.5 A
10 A
Circuits Protected
Front Passenger’s Power
Seat Reclining
Front Passenger’s Power
Seat Slide
Oil Level
FI ECU
Radio
IG Coil
Main
MG Clutch
DBW
Interior Light
Back Up
CONTINUED
633
Taking Care of the Unexpected
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
120 A
−
80 A
50 A
40 A
30 A
50 A
40 A
−
30 A
30 A
30 A
−
20 A
15 A
10 A
Circuits Protected
11/08/01 11:14:01 31SZA630_641
Fuse Locations
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
REAR FUSE BOX
No. Amps.
No. Amps.
1
2
3
4
634
40 A
20 A
30 A
40 A
Circuits Protected
Power Tailgate Motor
VTM-4
Trailer Main
VSA FSR
5
6
7
8
9
30 A
30 A
15 A
20 A
20 A
10
11
12
20 A
20 A
15 A
13
14
15
16
10 A
20 A
20 A
15 A
17
18
19
20
21
22
20 A
15 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
30 A
Circuits Protected
Rear Blower
VSA Motor
Hazard
Power Tailgate Closer
Driver’s Power Seat
Reclining
Driver’s Power Seat Slide
Stop & Horn
Rear Console Accessory
Socket
Rear Wiper
Trailer E-Brake
Front Heated Seat
Center Console Accessory
Socket
Trailer Charge
Front Accessory Socket
Rear Accessory Socket
Glass Hatch Motor
Rear Heated Seat
Head Light Washer Motor
No. Amps.
1
2
3
4
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
Circuits Protected
Small Light
Stop Lamp
Back Lamp
Turn Lamp, Hazard
11/08/01 11:14:12 31SZA630_642
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
No. Amps.
1
2
3
4
5
7.5 A
20 A
10 A
7.5 A
−
Circuits Protected
VTM-4
Fuel Pump
ACG
VSA
Not Used
21
−
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
10 A
15 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
−
7.5 A
20 A
Not Used
Auto Light
Auto Light
ODS
Meter
SRS
Right Daytime Running Light
Left Daytime Running Light
Small Lights (Interior)
Small Lights (Exterior)
Right Head Light Low
Left Head Light Low
Daytime Running Light Main
Small Lights Main
Not Used
TPMS
Head Light Low Main
No. Amps.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
7.5 A
7.5 A
−
−
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
31
32
30 A
20 A
33
20 A
34
35
36
37
38
−
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
30 A
Circuits Protected
VBSOL2
STRLD
Not Used
Not Used
Driver’s Power Window
HAC OP
Moonroof
Door Lock
Front Passenger’s Power
Window
Audio Amp*
Passenger’s Side Rear
Power Window
Driver’s Side Rear Power
Window
Not Used
ACC
HAC
Day Light
Wiper
* : On vehicles with rear entertainment system
635
Taking Care of the Unexpected
No. Amps.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Circuits Protected
11/08/01 11:14:19 31SZA630_643
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
4WD models
The only way you can safely tow
your vehicle is with flat-bed
equipment. The operator will load
your vehicle on the back of a truck.
Any other method of towing will
damage the drive system. When you
contact the towing agency, inform
them a flat-bed is required.
Towing with only two tires on the
ground will damage parts of the 4WD
system. It should be transported on a
f lat-bed truck or trailer.
636
Except 4WD models
There are two ways to tow your
vehicle:
Flat-bed Equipment − The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck. This is the best way to
transport your vehicle.
Wheel-lift Equipment − The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on
the ground. This is an acceptable
way to tow your vehicle.
11/08/01 11:14:31 31SZA630_644
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,
mud, or snow, call a towing service
to pull it out (see the previous page).
Front
RUBBER CAP
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
For very short distances, such as
freeing the vehicle, you can use the
detachable towing hook that mounts
on the anchors in the front and rear
bumpers.
COVER
3. Remove the towing hook and
wheel nut wrench placed behind a
cover under the cargo area.
4. Screw the towing hook into the
hole, and tighten it with the wheel
nut wrench.
The cover is attached to the
bumper with a tether.
2. Remove the rubber cap by pulling
it out.
CONTINUED
637
Taking Care of the Unexpected
To use the front towing hook:
1. Remove the cover, put cloth on the
edge of the cover to prevent
scratches and carefully pry with a
small flat-tip screwdriver or a
metal fingernail file.
TOWING HOOK
11/08/01 11:14:38 31SZA630_645
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
Rear
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use
the towing hook f or straight, f lat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. The tow hook should not be used
to tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Do
not use it as a tie down.
TOWING HOOK
To use the rear towing hook:
Remove the rear bumper cover.
Refer to ‘‘Towing a Trailer’’ on page
547 .
638
11/08/01 11:14:42 31SZA630_646
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
Identification Numbers ................. 640
Specifications ................................. 642
DOT Tire Quality Grading
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 644
Tire Labeling .................................. 646
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) − Required Federal
Explanation............................. 648
Emissions Controls........................ 651
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 653
Emissions Testing ......................... 654
Technical Information
639
11/08/01 11:14:47 31SZA630_647
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers located in various places.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
640
11/08/01 11:14:53 31SZA630_648
Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front.
ENGINE NUMBER
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
Technical Information
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
641
11/08/01 11:15:18 31SZA630_649
Specifications
Dimensions
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
191.4 in (4,861 mm)
78.5 in (1,995 mm)
70.9 in (1,802 mm)*1
72.7 in (1,846 mm)*2
109.3 in (2,775 mm)
67.7 in (1,720 mm)
67.5 in (1,715 mm)
Front
Rear
*1 : U.S. LX models
*2 : Except U.S. LX models
Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross combined weight
rating (GCWR)*1
See the tire information label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb.
8,466 lbs (3,840 kg)*2
9,579 lbs (4,345 kg)*3
*1 : The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305
meters) of elevation.
*2 : 2WD models
*3 : 4WD models
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
Seating Capacities
Total
Front
Second
Third
642
Capacities
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
HFC-134a (R-134a)
21.2−22.9 oz (600−650 g)
ND-OIL8
8
2
3
3
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Change*1
Total
Change*2
Including
filter
Without
filter
Total
2WD Change
Total
4WD Change
Total
Change
Total
Approx. 21.00 US gal (79.5 )
1.98 US gal (7.5 )
2.48 US gal (9.4 )
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
5.3 US qt (5.0 )
3.3 US qt (3.1 )*3
3.6 US qt (3.4 )*4
8.0 US qt (7.6 )*3
8.6 US qt (8.1 )*4
3.6 US qt (3.4 )
8.6 US qt (8.1 )
2.79 US qt (2.64 )
3.01 US qt (2.85 )
Rear
differential
fluid (4WD)
Transfer
Change
0.45 US qt (0.43 )
Total
assembly
0.48 US qt (0.45 )
fluid (4WD)
U.S. vehicles
Windshield
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
Canadian
washer
6.9 US qt (6.5 )
vehicles
reservoir
*1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity: 0.196 US gal (0.74 )
*2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
*3 : Without automatic transmission fluid cooler
*4 : With automatic transmission fluid cooler
11/08/01 11:15:42 31SZA630_650
Specifications
Alignment
Toe-in
Camber
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
60 W (HB3)
55 W (H11)
3 CP
28/8 W
55 W (H11)
21/5 W
21/5 W
5W
18 W
5W
8W
4 CP
8W
5W
1.4 W
2 CP
1.4 W
1.4 W
12 V − 60 AH/5 HR
12 V − 72 AH/20 HR
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
−0°30’
−0°30’
Alignment
Caster
Fuses
Interior
4°17’
See page 635 or the fuse label
attached on the side panel.
See page 634 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box lid.
See page 633 and 634 or the fuse
box cover.
Rear
Under-hood
Engine
Type
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Tires
Size
Front/Rear
Pressure
Spare
Front
Rear
Spare
Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC i-VTEC
VCM 6-cylinder (V6) gasoline engine
3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)
212 cu-in (3,471 cm )
10.5 : 1
DILZKR7A11G
DILZKR7A11DS
P235/65R17 103T *1
P235/60R18 102T *2
T165/80D17 104M
31 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm
35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm
33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm
35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)*1
)*2
)*1
)*2
)
*1 : U.S. LX models
*2 : Except U.S. LX models
643
Technical Information
Lights
Headlights (High)/
Daytime running lights
Headlights (Low)
Front side marker lights
Front turn signal/
parking lights
Front fog lights*
Rear turn signal/taillights
Stop/taillights
Rear side marker lights
Back-up lights
License plate lights
Individual map lights
Front
Rear
Cargo area lights
High-mount brake lights
Vanity mirror lights
Door courtesy lights
Glove box light
Front console compartment
light
* : Except LX models
Battery
Capacity
11/08/01 11:15:51 31SZA630_651
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
644
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and onehalf (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
11/08/01 11:15:56 31SZA630_652
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
Technical Information
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
645
11/08/01 11:16:13 31SZA630_653
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE
(1)
Tire Size
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. The following is an
example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component
means.
P235/60R18 102T
P
− Vehicle type (P indicates
passenger vehicle).
235 − Tire width in millimeters.
60 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
(1)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
646
(3)
(2)
Tire Size
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load
R
− Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
18 − Rim diameter in inches.
102 − Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
T
− Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example.
TIN is located on the sidewall of the
tire.
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
DOT − This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R − Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
11/08/01 11:16:22 31SZA630_654
Tire Labeling
FW6X − Tire type code.
2202
− Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
Glossary of Tire Terminology
Cold Tire Pressure − The tire air
pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating − Means the maximum
load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure − The
maximum tire air pressure that the
tire can hold.
Maximum Load Rating − Means the
load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure −
The cold tire inflation pressure
recommended by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) −
Means the projections within the
principal grooves designed to give a
visual indication of the degrees of
wear of the tread.
Technical Information
647
11/08/01 11:16:30 31SZA630_655
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale
Driving on a significantly under
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
648
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.
11/08/01 11:16:37 31SZA630_656
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Except Touring models
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is provided by
a separate telltale, which displays the
symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
Technical Information
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
649
11/08/01 11:16:43 31SZA630_657
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
On Touring models
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
650
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
11/08/01 11:16:54 31SZA630_658
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several byproducts. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Controlling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contribute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The Clean Air Act
The United States Clean Air Act*
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
work and what to do to maintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on page
573 .
*
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
651
Technical Information
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
11/08/01 11:17:07 31SZA630_659
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
Ignition Timing Control System
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
PGM-FI System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: air intake,
engine control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM)
uses various sensors to determine
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
(N2), and water vapor.
652
Replacement Parts
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work together in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
quality parts may increase the
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more information.
11/08/01 11:17:17 31SZA630_660
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
The defective three way catalytic
converters contribute to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s
performance. Follow these
guidelines to protect your vehicle’s
three way catalytic converters.
WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTERS
Keep the engine well maintained.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, backfiring, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
653
Technical Information
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
11/08/01 11:17:27 31SZA630_661
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
If you take your vehicle for an
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the onboard diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
1. Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
2. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F (4° and 35°C).
654
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
hold it there until the temperature
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
scale (about 3 minutes).
6. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, let the engine idle for 20
seconds.
11/08/01 11:17:33 31SZA630_662
Emissions Testing
7. Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D. Do not use the cruise control.
When traffic allows, drive for 90
seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least
30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
8. Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
9. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 30
minutes.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
Technical Information
655
11/08/01 11:17:35 31SZA630_663
656
11/08/01 11:17:38 31SZA630_664
Warranty and Customer Relations
657
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service Information..... 658
Warranty Coverages ..................... 659
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 660
Authorized Manuals ...................... 661
11/08/01 11:17:49 31SZA630_665
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact Honda
Customer Service.
U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
658
Canadian Owners:
Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-Mail: honda_cr@ch.honda.com
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page 640 )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Odometer reading of your vehicle
Vortex Motor Corp.
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Your name, address, and telephone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Tel: (787) 620-7546
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
11/08/01 11:18:02 31SZA630_666
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty − these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
− all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty −
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty − covers all Honda
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty − provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty − provides
coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2012 Honda warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2012 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.
659
Warranty and Customer Relations
New Vehicle Limited Warranty −
covers your new vehicle, except for
the emissions control systems and
accessories, against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.
11/08/01 11:18:10 31SZA630_667
Reporting Safety Defects
In the US
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also
inform Transport Canada.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and
remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot
become involved in individual problems between you,
your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.saf ercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington,
DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.saf ercar.gov.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and
Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more
information on reporting safety defects or about motor
vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf ety.
660
11/08/01 11:18:23 31SZA630_668
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online:
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at www.helminc.com
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
Publication
Form Number
61SZA03
61SZA03EL
31SZAM30
31SZAQ30
HON
2012 Honda Pilot Service Manual
2012 Honda Pilot
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2012 Honda Pilot Body Repair Manual
2012 Honda Pilot Owner’s Manual
2012 Honda Pilot
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
2012 Honda Pilot Honda Service History
2012 Honda Pilot Technology Reference Guide
Order Form for Previous Years
Indicate Year and Model Desired
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
in your vehicle.
Body Repair Manual:
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
of damaged body parts.
661
Authorized Manuals
61SZA30
31SZA630
31SZA830
Form Description
Service Manual:
Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
11/08/01 11:18:25 31SZA630_669
662
11/08/01 11:18:32 31SZA630_670
Index
A
Belts, Seat ..................................... 9, 22
Beverage Holders .......................... 181
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink ................ 441, 462
Booster Seats ................................... 57
Brakes
Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 531
Break-in, New Linings .............. 494
Bulb Replacement ............. 589, 591
Fluid ............................................ 584
Parking ........................................ 171
System Indicator .................. 69, 627
Wear Indicators ......................... 531
Braking System.............................. 530
Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 494
Brightness Control,
Instruments ................................ 130
B
Battery
Charging System
Indicator............................ 68, 626
Jump Starting ............................. 621
Maintenance ............................... 607
Specifications ............................. 643
Before Driving ............................... 493
INDEX
Accessories and Modifications .... 504
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
Position) ...................................... 136
Accessory Power Sockets............. 186
AC Power Outlet ............................ 187
Active Head Restraints ................. 159
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 577
Advanced Airbags............................ 30
Airbag (SRS) .............................. 11, 26
Airbag System Components ........... 26
Air Conditioning System....... 192, 199
Rear A/C Control .............. 197, 205
Air Outlets (Vents) ........................ 207
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 600
Antifreeze ....................................... 579
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Indicator Light ..................... 70, 532
Operation .................................... 531
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 394
Anti-theft Steering Column
Lock ............................................. 136
Audio System ................................. 209
Auto Control Mode, Starting
Engine ......................................... 513
Auto Door Lock ............................. 114
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .... 138
Auto Door Unlock.......................... 115
Automatic Climate Control........... 199
Automatic Lighting........................ 126
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 24
Automatic Speed Control.............. 430
Automatic Transmission............... 515
Capacity, Fluid ........................... 642
Checking Fluid Level ................ 582
Shifting ........................................ 515
Shift Lever Position
Indicators ................................ 515
Shift Lever Positions ................. 516
Shift Lock Release ..................... 518
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 391
CONTINUED
I
11/08/01 11:18:38 31SZA630_671
Index
Bulb Replacement
Back-up Lights ........................... 589
Brake Lights............................... 589
Fog Lights .................................. 588
Front Parking Lights ................. 587
Front Side Marker Lights......... 587
Headlights .................................. 586
Rear Bulbs .................................. 589
Specifications ............................. 643
Turn Signal Lights ..................... 587
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 586
C
Cancel Button................................. 432
Capacities Chart............................. 642
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 60
Cargo Area Light ........................... 178
Cargo Hook .................................... 510
Cargo, How to Carry ..................... 506
CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iv
CD Care .......................................... 332
CD Player ....................... 219, 243, 319
CD Player Error
Messages .................... 226, 253, 331
CD Library ...................................... 254
II
Certification Label ......................... 640
Chains, Tires .................................. 606
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 613
Changing Oil
How to ......................................... 577
When to....................................... 559
Charging System Indicator .... 68, 626
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 512
Childproof Door Locks ................. 143
Child Safety ...................................... 38
Booster Seats ............................... 57
Child Seats .............................. 43, 46
Important Safety Reminders ...... 38
Infants ........................................... 43
Larger Children ........................... 56
LATCH.......................................... 48
Risks with Airbags....................... 39
Small Children.............................. 44
Tether ........................................... 53
Warning Labels ............................ 61
Where Should a Child Sit? .......... 39
Child Seats ........................................ 46
LATCH Anchorage Points ......... 48
Tether Anchorage Points ..... 54, 55
Cleaning Seat Belts........................ 593
Climate Control System ................ 199
Clock ............................................... 294
Coat Hooks ..................................... 185
Code, Audio System ...................... 394
CO in the Exhaust ......................... 652
Compact Spare Tire....................... 612
Console Compartment .................. 180
Consumer Information.................. 658
Controls, Instruments and .............. 63
Conversation Mirror ..................... 184
Coolant
Adding ......................................... 579
Checking ..................................... 500
Proper Solution .......................... 579
Temperature Gauge .................... 80
Crankcase Emissions Control
System......................................... 651
Cruise Control Indicator ................. 76
Cruise Control Operation ............. 430
Cup Holders.................................... 181
Customer Service Office .............. 658
Customize Settings .......................... 95
Door/Window Setup ................. 113
Lighting Setup............................ 108
Meter Setup ................................ 101
Position Setup ............................ 106
Setting to Default ......................... 98
11/08/01 11:18:43 31SZA630_672
Index
D
E
Economy, Fuel ............................... 501
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
System......................................... 533
Emergencies................................... 611
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 621
Brake System Indicator ............ 627
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 613
Charging System Indicator ...... 626
Checking the Fuses................... 630
Driving with a Flat Tire ............ 612
Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 129
Jump Starting ............................. 621
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 625
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 626
Overheated Engine ................... 623
Towing ........................................ 636
Emergency Brake .......................... 171
Emergency Flashers ..................... 129
Emergency Towing ....................... 636
Emissions Controls........................ 651
Emissions Testing ......................... 654
Engine
Check Starter System ............... 514
Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 80
If it Won’t Start .......................... 620
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp ................................. 68, 626
Oil Life ........................................ 559
Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 68, 625
Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 576
Overheating................................ 623
Specifications ............................. 643
Speed Limiter ............................. 518
Starting........................................ 513
Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 651
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 60
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
System......................................... 652
INDEX
DANGER, Explanation of ................ iv
Dashboard .................................... 3, 64
Daytime Running Lights............... 127
Dead Battery .................................. 621
Defects, Reporting Safety............. 660
Defogger, Rear Window ............... 129
Defrosting the Windows....... 196, 204
Differential Fluid ........................... 642
Dimensions ..................................... 642
Dimming the Headlights .............. 125
Dipstick
Automatic Transmission........... 582
Engine Oil ................................... 500
Directional Signals ........................... 71
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 531
Disc Care ........................................ 332
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 578
Doors
Indicator .................................. 13, 79
Locking and Unlocking ............. 137
Lockout Prevention ................... 143
Power Door Locks ..................... 137
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 644
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5
Driving ............................................ 511
Economy ..................................... 501
Driving Position Memory
System......................................... 174
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 593
DVD Player Error Messages ....... 424
DVD Player .................................... 400
CONTINUED
III
11/08/01 11:18:49 31SZA630_673
Index
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Belts by ......................................... 20
F
Fan, Interior ........................... 193, 203
Features, Comfort and
Convenience ............................... 191
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 497
Filters
Dust and Pollen .......................... 593
Oil ................................................ 577
Flashers, Hazard Warning............ 129
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 613
Floor Mats ...................................... 594
Fluids
Automatic Transmission........... 582
Brake ........................................... 584
Power Steering........................... 585
Windshield Washer ................... 581
FM Stereo Radio
Reception .................................... 389
Fog Lights ...................................... 127
Folding the Second Seat ............... 160
Folding the Third Seat .................. 161
Four-way Flashers ......................... 129
IV
Front Airbags ............................. 11, 28
Front Seat ....................................... 154
Adjusting..................................... 154
Airbags .................................... 11, 28
Heaters........................................ 165
Fuel .................................................. 495
Fill Door and Cap....................... 497
Gauge ............................................ 80
Octane Requirement ................. 495
Oxygenated ................................ 495
Reserve Indicator......................... 78
Tank, Filling the......................... 497
Tighten Fuel Cap ....................... 498
Fuel Economy ................................ 501
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 630
Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature .... 80
Fuel ................................................ 80
Speedometer ................................ 80
Tachometer .................................. 80
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) ........................................ 537
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) ........................................ 538
Gearshift Lever Positions ............. 515
Glass Hatch .................................... 148
Glove Box ....................................... 183
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) ........................................ 537
H
G
Gas Mileage, Improving................ 502
Gasoline .......................................... 495
Gauge ............................................ 80
Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 78
Octane Requirement ................. 495
Tank, Refueling ......................... 497
Gas Station Procedures................. 497
Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 586
HandsFreeLink .................... 441, 462
HFL Buttons ...................... 442, 463
Hazard Warning Flashers............. 129
11/08/01 11:18:55 31SZA630_674
Index
Headlights ...................................... 125
Aiming ......................................... 586
Automatic Lighting ................... 126
Daytime Running Lights .......... 127
High Beam Indicator ................... 76
High Beams, Turning on .......... 125
Lights On Indicator ..................... 76
Low Beams, Turning on ........... 125
Reminder Chime........................ 125
Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 586
Turning on .................................. 125
Headphones.................................... 426
Head Restraints ............................. 157
Heated Mirror ................................ 173
Heaters, Seats ................................ 165
Heating and Cooling.............. 192, 199
High-Low Beam Switch ................ 125
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 437
Hood, Opening the ........................ 499
Horn ............................................ 4, 122
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 640
Side Airbag Off ............................ 70
Seat Belt ........................................ 67
SRS ................................................ 70
System Message .................... 75, 92
Tire Pressure Monitor ................ 73
Turn Signal and Hazard
Warning .................................... 71
VSA OFF ....................................... 71
VSA System .................................. 71
Individual Map Lights ................... 177
Infant Restraint ................................ 43
Infant Seats ....................................... 43
Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 599
INFO Buttons ................................... 85
Inside Mirror .................................. 172
Inspection, Tire .............................. 601
Instrument Panel ....................... 65, 66
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 130
Instruments and Controls ............... 63
Integrated Sunshade ..................... 183
Interface Dial.................................. 298
Interior Lights ................................ 176
Introduction ......................................... i
iPod ........................................ 265, 363
CONTINUED
V
INDEX
I
Ignition
Keys............................................. 133
Switch .......................................... 136
Timing Control System ............. 652
Immobilizer System....................... 134
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Indicators, Instrument Panel.... 65, 66
ABS (Anti-lock Brake) ................ 70
A/T Temp..................................... 74
Brake (Parking and Brake
System) ............................. 69, 627
Charging System ................. 68, 626
Cruise Control .............................. 76
Cruise Main .................................. 76
DRL (Daytime Running
Lights)....................................... 77
Fog Lights .................................... 76
High Beam .................................... 76
Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 76
Lights On ...................................... 76
Low Fuel ....................................... 78
Low Oil Pressure ................. 68, 625
Low Tire Pressure ....................... 72
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp ................................. 68, 626
Security System ........................... 79
11/08/01 11:19:04 31SZA630_675
Index
J
Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 615
Jack, Tire ........................................ 613
Jump Starting ................................. 621
K
Keys ................................................. 133
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 497
Glove Box ................................... 183
Lockout Prevention ................... 143
Power Door ................................ 137
Tailgate ............................... 143, 144
Low Coolant Level ......................... 500
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 78
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 68, 625
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 642
Luggage, Storing (cargo) ............. 506
Modifying Your Vehicle................ 505
Moonroof ........................................ 170
Multi-Information Display .............. 85
N
Neutral Gear Position.................... 516
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 494
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
Numbers, Identification ................ 640
L
M
Label, Certification ........................ 640
Lane Change, Signaling ................ 125
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 17, 23
Light Control Switch ..................... 176
Lights
Bulb Replacement ..................... 586
Indicator .................................. 65, 66
Interior ........................................ 176
Parking ........................................ 125
Turn Signal ................................. 125
Load Limit .............................. 507, 536
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ..... 136
Locks
Anti-theft Steering Column ...... 136
VI
Maintenance ................................... 557
Minder......................................... 559
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks .................................... 571
Safety........................................... 558
Schedule ..................................... 573
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 68, 626
Memory, Driving Position ............ 174
Message Display .............................. 93
Message Indicator ........................... 75
Meters, Gauges ................................ 80
Mirrors, Adjusting ......................... 172
Modifications.................................. 505
O
Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 495
Odometer .................................... 81, 87
Odometer, Trip .......................... 81, 87
Off-Highway Driving ..................... 552
Off-Road Precautions .................... 552
Oil
Change, How to ......................... 577
Change, When to ....................... 559
Checking Engine ....................... 500
Life, Engine ................................ 559
Pressure Indicator ............... 68, 625
Selecting Proper Viscosity
Chart ....................................... 576
11/08/01 11:19:10 31SZA630_676
Index
ON (Ignition Key Position) .......... 136
Outside Mirrors ............................. 172
Outside Temperature ................ 83, 88
Overheating, Engine ..................... 623
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 571
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 495
P
R
Radiator Overheating .................... 623
Radio/Disc Sound System ............ 209
Radio Theft Protection.................. 394
Readiness Codes ............................ 654
Rear A/C Unit ........................ 197, 205
Rear Audio Control Panel ............. 396
Rear Entertainment System ......... 396
Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 589
Rearview Camera and Monitor .... 491
Rearview Mirror ............................ 172
Rear Window Defogger ................ 129
Rear Window Wiper and
Washer ........................................ 124
Reclining the Seat Backs ...... 154, 155
Reclining the Second Seats .......... 160
Recall a Memorized Driving
Position ....................................... 153
Reminder Indicators ........................ 67
Remote Audio Controls................. 392
Remote Control (RES) .................. 406
Remote Transmitter ...................... 150
Replacement Information
Engine Oil and Filter ................. 577
Fuses ........................................... 630
Light Bulbs ................................. 586
Schedule ..................................... 573
Timing Belt ................................. 585
Tires ............................................ 602
Wiper Blades .............................. 595
Replacing Seat Belt After a
Crash ............................................. 25
Reporting Safety Defects.............. 660
Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant .... 500
Restraint, Child ................................ 38
Reverse Gear Position................... 516
CONTINUED
VII
INDEX
Panel Brightness Control ............. 130
Park Gear Position......................... 516
Parking ............................................ 521
Parking Brake ................................ 171
Parking Brake and Brake
System Indicator .................. 69, 627
Parking Lights................................ 125
Parking Sensor System ................. 484
Parking Over Things that Burn ... 521
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ..... 35
PGM-FI System.............................. 652
Pollen Filter .................................... 593
Power Door Locks ......................... 137
Power Seat Adjustments ............... 154
Power Socket Locations................ 179
Power Windows ............................. 167
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 20
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 13
Additional Safety Precautions .... 21
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 20
Protecting Children ......................... 38
General Guidelines ...................... 38
Protecting Infants ........................ 43
Protecting Larger Children ........ 56
Protecting Small Children .......... 44
Using Child Seats with
Tethers...................................... 53
Using LATCH .............................. 48
11/08/01 11:19:15 31SZA630_677
Index
Rotation Tire .................................. 602
S
Safety Belts................................... 9, 22
Safety Defects, Reporting............. 660
Safety Features .................................. 8
Airbags .......................................... 11
Door Locks ................................... 13
Head Restraints ........................... 16
Seat Belts .................................. 9, 17
Seats & Seat-Backs ................ 15, 16
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 61
Safety Messages ............................... iv
Seat Belts ...................................... 9, 17
Additional Information ................ 22
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 24
Cleaning ...................................... 593
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 23
Maintenance ................................. 25
Reminder Light and
Beeper ................................. 22, 67
System Components.................... 22
Use During Pregnancy................ 20
Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt .... 17
VIII
Seats ................................................ 154
Adjusting the Second Seat ........ 160
Folding the Second Seat ........... 161
Folding the Third Seat .............. 162
Head Restraints ......................... 157
Heaters........................................ 165
Position Memory ....................... 174
Third Row Access ..................... 161
Security System ............................. 429
Sensors
Driver’s Seat Position Sensor ..... 30
Front Passenger’s Weight
Sensors...................................... 30
Impact Sensors....................... 26, 27
Serial Number ................................ 640
Service Intervals ............................ 559
Service Manual* ............................ 661
Service Minder ............................... 559
Service Station Procedures .......... 497
Setting the Clock ........................... 294
Shifting the Automatic
Transmission .............................. 515
Shift Lever Position Indicator ...... 515
Shift Lock Release ......................... 518
Side Airbags ..................................... 31
Off Indicator ................................. 34
Side Curtain Airbags ....................... 33
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
Replacement in .................. 587, 589
Signaling Turns ................................ 71
Snow Tires ...................................... 605
Sound System ................................. 209
Spare Tire
Inflating............................... 600, 612
Specifications ............................. 643
Specifications Charts..................... 642
Speed Control ................................. 430
Speed Limiter ................................. 518
Speedometer .................................... 80
SRS, Additional Information........... 26
Additional Safety Precautions .... 36
Airbag Service .............................. 36
Airbag System Components ....... 26
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 34
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 28
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 31
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 33
SRS Indicator.............................. 34, 70
START (Ignition Key Position) ... 136
11/08/01 11:19:21 31SZA630_678
Index
Starting the Engine........................ 513
Auto Control Mode.................... 513
In Cold Weather at High
Altitude ................................... 514
With a Dead Battery ................. 621
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 623
Steering Wheel
Adjustment ................................. 132
Anti-theft Column Lock ............ 136
Buttons ............... 392, 430, 442, 463
Stereo Sound System .................... 209
Storage Compartment ................... 182
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 608
Sunglasses Holder ......................... 183
Sun Visor......................................... 184
Supplemental Restraint System
Servicing ....................................... 36
SRS Indicator.......................... 34, 70
System Components.................... 26
Synthetic Oil ................................... 577
T
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) ............. 522, 648
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator............................ 72, 525
Tire Pressure Monitor ........ 89, 526
Tires ................................................ 599
Air Pressure ............................... 599
Checking Wear .......................... 601
Compact Spare ........................... 612
DOT Tire Quality Grading* ..... 644
Inflation ....................................... 599
Inspection ................................... 601
Maintenance ............................... 602
Replacing .................................... 602
Rotating....................................... 602
Snow ............................................ 605
Specifications ............................. 643
Tire Chains ................................. 606
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 613
INDEX
Tachometer ...................................... 80
Tailgate ........................................... 143
Glass Hatch ................................ 148
Open Indicator ....................... 13, 79
Opening the ................................ 143
Power .......................................... 144
Taillights, Changing Bulbs in ....... 589
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 611
Technical Descriptions
DOT Tire Quality Grading* ..... 644
Emissions Control Systems ...... 651
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ................................ 653
Temperature Gauge ........................ 80
Temperature, Inside Sensor ......... 208
Temperature, Outside ..................... 88
Tensioners, Seat Belts .................... 24
Tether Anchorage Points ......... 54, 55
Theft Protection, Radio................. 394
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 653
Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel .. 132
Time, Setting the ........................... 294
Timing Belt ..................................... 585
Tire Chains ..................................... 606
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 613
Tire Labeling .................................. 646
CONTINUED
IX
11/08/01 11:19:28 31SZA630_679
Index
Towing
A Trailer ...................................... 536
Emergency Wrecker ................. 636
Equipment and Accessories ..... 544
Weight Limit .............................. 536
Trailer Loading .......................... 536
Trailer Towing Tips .................. 549
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level ................ 582
Fluid Selection............................ 583
Identification Number............... 640
Shifting the Automatic .............. 515
Treadwear ...................................... 601
Trip Computer ................................. 90
Trip Meter .......................... 81, 87, 292
Turn Signals ..................................... 71
V
Vanity Mirror ................................. 185
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 507
Vehicle Dimensions....................... 642
Vehicle Identification Number..... 640
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA )
System..................................... 533
VSA OFF Indicator .............. 71, 533
VSA Off Switch .......................... 534
VSA System Indicator ... 71, 93, 533
Vehicle Storage .............................. 608
Ventilation ...................................... 195
VIN .................................................. 640
Viscosity, Oil................................... 576
Voice Control System.................... 200
VTM-4 Lock ................................... 520
U
W
Unexpected, Taking Care
of the ........................................... 611
Uniform Tire Quality Grading* ... 644
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 495
USB Flash Memory Device.. 274, 372
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 578
X
WARNING, Explanation of ............. iv
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 61
Warranty Coverages* ................... 659
Washer, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 581
Level Indicator ............................. 78
Operation .................................... 123
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering .............. 132
Alignment and Balance ............. 602
Aluminum Alloy Wheels ........... 606
Cleaning ...................................... 606
Compact Spare ........................... 612
Wrench, Nut ............................... 614
Windows
Auto Reverse .............................. 168
Operating the Power ................. 167
Rear, Defogger .......................... 129
Windshield
Cleaning ...................................... 123
Defroster ............................ 196, 204
Washers ...................................... 123
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 595
Operation .................................... 123
Rear Windshield Wiper and
Washer .................................... 124
Worn Tires ..................................... 601
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 636
11/08/01 11:19:32 31SZA630_680
Index
X
XM Radio .............................. 237, 312
*: U.S. only
XI
11/08/01 11:19:53 31SZA630_681
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
Premium fuel is recommended
when towing in certain conditions
(see page 549 ).
Fuel Tank Capacity:
21.00 US gal (79.5 )
Recommended Engine Oil:
API Premium grade 0W-20
detergent oil (see page 576 ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic
transmission fluid) (see page 583 ).
4WD models only
Rear Differential Fluid:
Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid.
4WD models only
Transfer Assembly Fluid:
SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity
hypoid gear oil, API service
classified GL4 or GL5 only.
Power Steering Fluid:
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page 585 ).
Brake Fluid:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page 584 ).
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
U.S. LX models:
Front:
31 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
Rear:
33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )
Except U.S. LX models:
Front/Rear:
35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )
Compact Spare Tire:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising